Casio Fx CG50 CG50_Soft Soft AR
User Manual: Casio fx-CG50_Soft fx-CG50 | الآلات الحاسبة | الدليل | CASIO
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 623
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
AR
fx-CG50
ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺘﻮﻳﺮ 3.00
ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ CASIO
http://edu.casio.com
ﻛﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ
http://world.casio.com/manual/calc
• ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ.
• ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ.
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ.
i
ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ – ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﹼﻻ ﹰ!
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ 1-1 ............................................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ 1-3 .............................................................................................................................
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ 1-7 ......................................................................................................
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ 1-14 ...............................................................................
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )1-29 ..................................................................................................... (OPTN
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ )1-30 .......................................................................................... (VARS
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )1-33 ..................................................................................................... (PRGM
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 1-34 ..................................................................................................
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 1-38 .....................................................................................................
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ1-39 ............................................................................................ ...
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ
.1ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ 2-1 .............................................................................................................
.2ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ 2-7 .................................................................................................................
.3ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ2-12 .........................................................................................
.4ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ 2-14 ..................................................................................................
.5ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ 2-25 .................................................................................................
.6ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ 2-35 ............................................................................................
.7ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ,ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ,ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ 2-39 ...........................
.8ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ 2-42 ...............................................................................................
.9ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ 2-59 .............................................................................................
.10ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ2-64 .....................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 3-1 ..........................................................................................................
ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 3-7 ..........................................................................................................
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ 3-13 ..............................................................................
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 3-17 .................................................................................................
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ 3-18 .......................................................................................................CSV
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ
.1ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ 4-1 ..........................................................................................................
.2ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ 4-3 ...........................................................
.3ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ 4-4 .........................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ 5-1 .....................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﲟﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ 5-5 .............................................................................
ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ 5-13 ...........................................................................................................
ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ 5-20 ......................................................................
ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 5-23 .................................................................................
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ 5-25 .........................................................................................................
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ5-30 ...............................................................................................................
ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ 5-36 .........................................................................................................
ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ 5-40 ...........................................................................................
ﺭﺳﻢ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ 5-43 ...........................................................................................................
ii
.11ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ 5-48 .......................................................................................................
.12ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ،ﻭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ(5-50 ....................................
.13ﲢﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ 5-52 ...............................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ6-1 ..........................................................................
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ6-8 ................................................
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ )ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ( 6-15 ..................
ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ 6-23 ...........................................................................................
ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ6-33 ...........................................................................................................................
ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ 6-47 .....................................................................................................................
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ 6-50 ..............................................................................................................................
ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ 6-66 .......................................................
ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ 6-69 ............................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ 7-1 ..........................................................................................
ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ 7-3 ....................................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ7-4 ....................................................................................................................
ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ )ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ( 7-7 ...............................................................................................
ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ 7-9 ...................................................................................................................
ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ 7-12 ...........................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻔﻠﺔ ،ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ،ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ7-13 ...............................................................................................
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ/ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ 7-14 ..............................................................................................
ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ 7-15 ......................................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ7-17 ...................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ 7-20 ...........................................................................
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ 8-1 ..................................................................................................
ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ 8-2 ............................................................................................
ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ 8-4 ......................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﳌﻠﻒ 8-6 ...................................................................................................................
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ 8-11 ....................................................................................................................
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ 8-28 ..............................................................................
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ 8-51 ................................................................................................
ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ⇔ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ 8-59 ......................................
ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ 8-66 ................................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ 9-1 ..........................................................................................
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ 9-3 ......................................................................................................
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Spreadsheetﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ 9-19 ........................................................................
ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ 9-21 .............................................................................................................
ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ 9-27 ..............................
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ 9-34 ..............................................................................................Spreadsheet
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ eActivity
.1
.2
.3
.4
ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ 10-1 ................................................................................................... eActivity
ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ 10-2 .....................................................................................................eActivity
ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ 10-4 ..................................................................................................... eActivity
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ 10-6 .....................................................................................................
iii
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ 11-1 .......................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ 12-1 ........................................................................................................
.2ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ 12-1 .................................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
.1ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ 13-3 ................................................
.2ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺘﲔ 13-10 ...........................................................................................
.3ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ 13-16 ........................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ 14-1 .................................................................................................
ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ14-11 ........................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ 14-33 .....................................................................................
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 14-37 ......................................................................
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ 14-41 ..................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ 14-56 ...............................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺓ15-3 ...............................................................................................
ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ15-5 .................................................................................................
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ15-7 .................................................................................................
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ15-13 ............................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ 15-18 ..............................................................................
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ 16-2 ................................................................................ 3D Graph
ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 16-3 ............................................................................................... 3D
ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 16-4 ......................................................................... 3D
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ 16-7 ........................................................................................................
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 16-11 ............................................................................... 3D
ﻣﻠﺤﻖ
.1ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﻃﺌﺔα-1 ..........................................................................................................
.2ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ α-14 .................................................................................................................
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭβ-1 .......................................................................................................................................................
)E-CON4 Application (English
ε-1 .............................................................................................. E-CON4 Mode Overview .1
ε-3 ...........................................................................................................Sampling Screen .2
ε-9 .............................................................................Auto Sensor Detection (CLAB Only) .3
ε-10 ......................................................................................................Selecting a Sensor .4
ε-12 ................................................................................. Configuring the Sampling Setup .5
ε-20 ......................................... Performing Auto Sensor Calibration and Zero Adjustment .6
ε-23 ................................................................................................Using a Custom Probe .7
ε-25 .................................................................................................. Using Setup Memory .8
ε-28 ....................................................................................Starting a Sampling Operation .9
ε-31 ....................................................................................... Using Sample Data Memory .10
ε-33 .......................................................... Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data .11
ε-37 ..........................................................Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations .12
ε-48 .............................................................. Calling E-CON4 Functions from an eActivity .13
iv
ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ – ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﹼﻻﹰ!
0
kﺣﻮﻝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ
uﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ" ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﻜﻦ
ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻭﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻓﻮﺍﺭﻕ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ
ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺒﻬﺎ .ﻓﻲ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ" ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹶ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ" ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﺀ ,ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﺧﻂ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ.
ﺍﻻﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ>" .ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ
ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ<" ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻟﻸﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ.
• ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺡ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ " "Input/Outputﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ" ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-34
• ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﻄﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/
ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ" ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-14
!x(') u
ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ! ﺛﻢ xﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ )'( .ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ .ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻻﻣﺮ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ.
m Equation u
ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻭﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ،mﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) (f, c, d, eﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .wﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺍﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
uﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ
• ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ
.6ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﻛﻠﺔ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ
ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
) 1(Compﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ 1ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ } {Compﻭﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻝ ) (gﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ 6ﻓﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ 6ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
v
uﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ
• ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻻﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ .ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Kﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ } {LISTﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻛـ.[OPTN]-[LIST] :
• ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ) 6 (gﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ.
uﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (8-51ﲤﻨﺢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ
ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ [VARS]-[FACTOR]-[Xfct] :Xfct
kﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ.
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) (f, c, d, eﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺛﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ
).1 (DISPLAY
.2ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
• ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ eﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻏﻤﻖ.
• ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ dﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ.
• ) 1 (INITIALﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ.
.3ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .m
vi
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ
.1ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ
1
kﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
5-2,
5-33
5-54
5-50
5-5
5-8
5-52
1-34
1-3
1-33
1-30
1-29
1-2
2-16
2-17
2-16
2-17
2-16
10-19
10-21
2-7
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
2-1
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
1-7,1-19
1-21
1-8
2-1
2-36
2-16
2-16
2-9
1-2
2-1
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
1-12
2-16
1-17
2-23
2-23
1-24,
2-23
2-1,
2-23
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
1-11
1-38
5-4,
5-15
1-12
2-1
2-49
3-3
2-1
2-11
2-1
2-16
2-9
2-1
1-1
2-36
kﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ .ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻟﻬﺎ
ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ.
ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ
1
log
l
2
10x
!l
3
B
al
ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ.
ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ
•
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ
ﺍﺻﻔﺮ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ! ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ
ﺍﺣﻤﺮ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ aﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ
ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻟﻔﺎ
ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ aﺛﻢ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺑﺠﺪﻱ ,ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ.
ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ! ﺛﻢ aﺳﺘﻐﻠﻖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ a
ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ.
1-2
.2ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
kﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ
ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
uﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ mﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) (d, e, f, cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻻﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻻﳝﻦ ﻟﻼﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ.
ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ.
ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ
Run-Matrix
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻝ ،ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ
ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ،ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ،ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ
ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ.
Statistics
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ)ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ
ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ( ﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ( .ﻭﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
eActivity
eActivityﲤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻧﺺ،ﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﳌﻔﻜﺮﺓ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻴﻎ ،ﺃﻭ
ﲡﻬﻴﺰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
Spreadsheet
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ .ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ
ﻣﻦ 26ﻋﻤﻮﺩ 999xﺧﻂ ،ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﻞ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ .
Graph
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ.
Dyna Graph
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﲔ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ.
)ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(
1-3
ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ
Table
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ،ﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ
ﺗﻌﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
Recursion
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ .ﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ
ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
Conic Graphs
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ.
Equation
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﳊﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺛﻨﲔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﺖ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ ،ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ
ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ.
Program
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ.
Financial
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
E-CON4
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ "ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ" ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ.
Link
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ
ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
Memory
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻻﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
System
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ،ﻭ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ
ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ.
Geometry
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ.
Picture Plot
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ) ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭ
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻄﻄﺔ.
3D Graph
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ.
Conversion
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ "ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ".
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ).(OPTN
ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ) ،(OPTNﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .1-29
ﻭ ﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(2-64
1-4
kﻋﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ 6 ،1ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺯﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻩ.
kﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ
ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
• ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ:
ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ:
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ .ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ( :ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ،3ﻭ
ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ ،2ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ،1ﻓﺎﺭﻍ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ
ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-40
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ،( ) 1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ
ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ" ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻞ.
ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ! ﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﻌ ﹼﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ aﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﻌ ﹼﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﻭﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ) ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ .(eActivity
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻟﻔﺎ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-2ﻣﺘﺄﺛﺮﺍ.
ﰎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !i (CLIPﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﻌ ﹼﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-11
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "."Input/Output
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "."Angle
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "."Display
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "."Frac Result
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "."Complex Mode
• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-34
• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳌﻐﻄﻰ ﻟﻜﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ.
1-5
kﻋﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻧﻮﻋﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ :ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺮﻭﻓﺎ
ﻣﻦ 21ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ 8ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ،ﻣﻊ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ .ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻪ 384ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﺎ × 216ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻃﻮﻻ.
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ
kﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ .ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﻲ.
uﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ
1.2E+12ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ ﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻝ 1.2 × 1012ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺮﻙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ 1.2
ﺍﺛﻨﻰ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﲔ ﻻﻥ ﺍﻷﺱ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ .ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﻲ .1,200,000,000,000
1.2E–03ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻝ .1.2 × 10-3ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺮﻙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ 1.2ﺛﻼﺙ ﺍﻣﺎﻛﻦ
ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ،ﻷﻥ ﺍﻷﺱ ﺳﺎﻟﺐ .ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ .0.0012
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
Norm 1 .................. 10–2 (0.01) > |x|, |x| > 1010
Norm 2 .................. 10–9 (0.000000001) > |x|, |x| > 1010
ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭ .1
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 2-13ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ 1ﻭ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ .2
1-6
kﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ /ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ /ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ.
uﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ
12
.................ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ:
23
456
uﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮ
...............ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ،0ABCDEF1(16) :ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ
)180150001(10
uﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ /ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ /ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ
.................ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ12° 34’ 56.78” :
• ﻭ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ،ﻓﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ.
.3ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ
kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ Aﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ
ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ،ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ،ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﺘﺤﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻻ:
= 2 + 3 – 4 + 10
Ac+d-e+baw
kﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ،ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ
ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .wﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ
ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ* .1ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺪﺧﻠﻪ ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ
ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ) .!D (INSﻳﻈﻬﺮ
ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻛـ " " ﻟﻼﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻛـ " " ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ.
* 1ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-34
1-7
uﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ
ﻣﺜﺎﻻ
ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ cos60ﺍﻟﻰ sin60
Acga
ddd
D
s
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ
ﻣﺜﺎﻻ
ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ 369 × × 2ﺍﻟﻰ 369 × 2
Adgj**c
dD
ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ،ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ Dﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ.
uﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ
ﻣﺜﺎﻻ
ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ 2.362ﺍﻟﻰ .sin2.362
Ac.dgx
ddddddd
s
kﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﳉﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ
ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ
ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ :ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ،ﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ،ﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ،ﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ،ﻭ
ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ،ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺪﺀﺍ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ.
1-8
• ﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ
• ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻮﻯ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ.
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ.
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ .ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ eﺍﻭ .d
ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ eﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ .ﻭﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ dﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ.
• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﻌﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ .ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ .ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
.(1-23
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1
ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺘﲔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ:
4.12 × 6.4 = 26.368
4.12 × 7.1 = 29.252
Ae.bc*g.ew
dddd
)!D(INS
h.b
w
1-9
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Aﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ fﺍﻭ cﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ،ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ
)ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(.ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﺓ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺟﻌﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :2
Abcd+efgw
cde-fghw
A
) fﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(
) fﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺘﻴﻦ(
• ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ.
• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ،Aﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ .A
kﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺻﻠﻴﺔ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
14 ÷ 0 × 2.3ﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻋﻦ 14 ÷ 10 × 2.3
Abe/a*c.d
w
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .J
ﻳﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺎﳋﻄﺎ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ
db
ﻧ ﹼﻔﺬ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ.
w
1-10
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ) ﺃﻭ ﻗﹼﺺ( ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻟﺼﻖ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ.
ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ )ﺍﻟﻘﺺ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ .ﻓﻲ
ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻱ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ ﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ.
uﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ
.1ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).!i (CLIP
• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1 (COPYﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ.
ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ
ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ
ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﺺ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
uﻟﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ
.1ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).!i(CLIP
• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 2 (CUTﻟﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ
1-11
uﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ
ﺣﺮﻕ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﻪ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).!j(PASTE
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
A
)!j(PASTE
kﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ
ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ.
• ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ.
• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ " "1:ALLﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻱ.
uﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﺎ
ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ .ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ " "1:ALLﻭﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺺ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ .ﺗﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ.
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) !e(CATALOGﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ.
• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(CATﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﺎ) .ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "1:ALLﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ(.
• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "2:Calculationﺃﻭ " ،"3:Statisticsﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ
cﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ.
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(INPUTﺃﻭ .w
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﻐﻂ ! fﺃﻭ .! c
1-12
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ "( ،"FMaxﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ
)A!e(CATALOG)6(CAT
)c1(EXE
)cc1(EXE
cccccc
)1(INPUT
ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﺃﻭ ).!J(QUIT
uﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻣ ﹴﺮ ﻣﺎ
ﺗﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ.
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) !e(CATALOGﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(CATﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ.
.3ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ " "1:ALLﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(EXEﺃﻭ .w
• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ.
.4ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ.
• ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ،ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻌﻪ.
.5ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﻪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(INPUTﺃﻭ .w
1-13
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ "("FMax
)A!e(CATALOG)6(CAT
)1(EXE)t(F)h(M
)1(INPUT
uﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ
ﲢﺘﻔﻆ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺴﺠﻞ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ.
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).5(HISTORY
• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(INPUTﺃﻭ .w
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Mathﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ " "Input/Outputﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-34ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ،ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺗﻚ.
• ﻭﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
ﻫﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺍﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ -34
.(1
• ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺩﺭﺍﺝ )ﻟﻴﺲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ( .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ
)) !D (INSﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-7ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ
ﻭ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻛﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ
ﻛﺤﺠﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-19
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻓﻜﻞ ﺍﻻﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix
1-14
kﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
uﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺗﻪ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ "ﺑﺎﻳﺖ" ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ/ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ
ﺑﺎﻳﺖ
ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ
'
9
)(('!
14
ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ )ﺍﻷﺱ(
M
4
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ
x
4
ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ )ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ(
)!)(x –1
5
'
)'(!x
6
ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻌﻴﺒﻲ
)'!((3
9
ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ
)'!M(x
9
ex
)!I(ex
6
10x
)!l(10x
6
)log(a,b
)ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ*(2
7
) Absﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ(
)ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ*(2
6
ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ
)ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ*(2
7
ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ
)ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ*(2
7
)ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ*(2
8
)ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ*(2
11
ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﺘﻠﻂ*
1
3
ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ*
Σﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ*
4
2
5
ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ
)ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ* (
ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ
)ﻭ(
1
ﺍﻻﻗﻮﺍﺱ )ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(
) } ( !/ﻭ ) { (*!
1
ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ )ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ /ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ(
) ] ( !-ﻭ ) [ (!+
1
* 14
* 1ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﺘﻠﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ.
* 2ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ"
ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ.
* 3ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/
ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ.
* 4ﻟﻠﺤﺴﺎﺏ Σﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ .1ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ.
* 5ﻫﺬﺍ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .2 × 2
1-15
uﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ).4(MATH
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ,ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ,ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ.
• } ... {MAT/VCTﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ،MAT/VCTﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ /ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ
• } ... {2×2ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ 2 × 2
• } ... {3×3ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ 3 × 3
• } ... {m×nﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ/ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ mﻭ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ) nﺇﻟﻰ (6 × 6
• } ... {2×1ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ 2 × 1
• } ... {3×1ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ 3 × 1
• } ... {1×2ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ 1 × 2
• } ... {1×3ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ 1 × 3
• } ... {logabﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺜﻢ logab
• } ... {Absﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ ||X
)d f(x
• } ... {d/dxﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻘﺎﻕ x = a
dx
2
d f(x)x = a
• } ... {d2/dx2ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ
2
dx
b
• } … {∫dxﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ f(x)dx
a
β
• }( … {Σﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ Σﳊﺴﺎﺏ )Σ f(x
α
x=α
uﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
MATHﻳﻮﻓﹼﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻛﻴﻒ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ
ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :1
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ 23 + 1
AcM
d
e
+b
w
1-16
(
1+ 2
5
A(b+
)
2
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
:2 ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
'
cc
f
e
)x
w
1
1+
0
x + 1dx ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
Ab+4(MATH)6(g)1(∫dx)
v+b
ea
fb
e
w
1-17
:3 ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :4
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
2
1
2
1
2
2
×2
)Ac*4(MATH)1(MAT/VCT)1(2×2
'bcc
ee
!x(')ce
e!x(')cee'bcc
w
uﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ
ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺳﻬﻢ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﻭ ﻟﺘﺮﻯ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
1-18
uﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ.
ﻳﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ .ﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ
ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ .ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﺪ.
uﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﺤﺠﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻛﺤﺠﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ") "(2+3ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺠﺔ
ﻝ ' ،ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ). (2+3
ﻣﺜﻼ:
.1ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺣﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻠﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )!D(INS
• ﻳﺒﺪﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻻﺩﺭﺍﺝ ) (
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) '( !xﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ '.
• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺭﺝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ' ﻭ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺣﺠﺘﻬﺎ.
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﳝﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ) !D(INSﺣﺠﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﲢﺪﺩ
ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﹰ .ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﻤﻞ ﻛﺤﺠﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﳝﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ,ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ )) log2(4) ،sin (30ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(.
1-19
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ
ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺻﻠﻴﺔ
ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ
ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ
'
ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ )ﺍﻷﺱ(
M
'
)'(!x
ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻌﻴﺒﻲ
)'!((3
ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ
)'!M(x
ex
)!I(ex
10x
)!l(10x
)log(a,b
)4(MATH)2(logab
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ
)4(MATH)3(Abs
ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ
)4(MATH)4(d/dx
ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ
)4(MATH)5(d2/dx2
ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ
)4(MATH)6(g
)1(∫dx
Σﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ
)4(MATH)6(g
) (2(Σ
ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﺭﺍﺝ
• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ،ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) !D (INSﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺩﺭﺍﺝ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-7ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ.
uﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ
ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-7
ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ،ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﲔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ.
• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﻭ
ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ.
• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ .D
1-20
• ﻻﺣﻆ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ :
ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ
ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺘﻪ
ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ
e
d
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ
ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ (wﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍ ﹰ.
-ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔaD(UNDO) :
ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).aD(UNDO• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ .Aﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ Aﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺩﺭﺟﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ
) aD(UNDOﺳﻴﺴﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ .A
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ eﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺛﻢ )،aD(UNDO
ﻓﺴﻴﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ .e
• ﻭ ﻳﻌﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ .ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) aD(UNDOﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ
ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ .D
ﻣﺜﻼ
b+'be
D
)aD(UNDO
c
A
)aD(UNDO
1-21
kﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ
ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺗﻚ.
ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﺇ ﹼﻣﺎ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺴﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
"."Frac Resultﻋﻄﻔﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-34
• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ .6 × 6ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ MatAnsﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ.
• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ 1 × 6ﺃﻭ .6 × 1ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ
ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ VctAnsﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ.
• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ .ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ListAnsﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ.
• ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻓﻚ ﺍﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(DELETE)1(DEL-LINEﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ
ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ.
• ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺘﻠﻄﺔ .ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ
ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
ﻣﺜﻼ2× 2 :
5
c*c'f
• ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ x ،Mﺃﻭ ) !)(x–1ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﲟﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺁﺧﺮ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ
ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ x ،Mﺃﻭ )!)(x–1
ﻣﺜﻼ(32)–1 :
)(dx)!)(x–1
1-22
kﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﲢﺘﻔﻆ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﲔ
ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ.
b+cw
*cw
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﺎ .ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻴﻌﻴﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ
ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻟﺔ.
ﻣﺜﻼ:
ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ " "1+2ﺍﻟﻰ " "1+3ﻭ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ.
ffffdDdw
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ )ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ( ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ
ﻣﻦ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ .ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ.
• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ.
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻓﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻴﻬﺎ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ،ﻓﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﻲ " "0ﺇﺫ ﻻﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ.
1-23
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ.
• ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﺼﻞ 2ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ".
uﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ
ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ
6 = 3
4 × 5 10
A6'4*5w
)cos π = 1 (Angle: Rad
3
2
(π)'3e)w
log28 = 3
A4(MATH)2(logab) 2e8w
) (
A!M(x') 7e123w
7
123 = 1.988647795
A2+3*!M(x') 3e64e-4w
2 + 3 × 3 64 − 4 = 10
3
= 0.1249387366
4
!(Ac
A4(MATH)3(Abs)l3'4w
log
2 + 3 1 = 73
5
4 20
A2'5e+3!'(()1e4w
1.5 + 2.3i = 3 + 23 i
2 10
A1.5+2.3!a(i)wf
d 3
2
dx ( x + 4x + x − 6 ) x = 3 = 52
A4(MATH)4(d/dx)vM3e+4
vx+v-6e3w
+ 3 x + 4 dx = 404
3
)
− 3k + 5 = 55
6
∑ (k
2
2
∫ 2x
5
1
A4(MATH)6(g)1(∫dx) 2vx+3v+4e1
e5w
)A4(MATH)6(g)2(Σ)a,(K)x-3a,(K
+5ea,(K)e2e6w
k=2
1-24
kﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ /ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ /ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ
.1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﺍﺿﻐﻂ .!m(SET UP)1(Math)J
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 4(MATHﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .MATH
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(MAT/VCTﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
• } … {2×2ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ 2 × 2
• } … {3×3ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ 3 × 3
ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ mﻭﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ) nﺍﻟﻰ (6 × 6
• } … {m×nﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ
ﹰ
• } ... {2×1ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ 2 × 1
• } ... {3×1ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ 3 × 1
• } ... {1×2ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ 1 × 2
• } ... {1×3ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ 1 × 3
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﳋﻄﲔ × ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ.
)3(m×n
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ.
cw
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ.
dw
w
1-25
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ
×8
33
1
2
1
6
5
13
4
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
beb'ceedde
bd'eeefege
*iw
uﻟﺘﻌﲔ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻝ Mat J
!c(Mat)!-(Ans)a
!c(Mat)a)(J)w
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ Dﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ( ،ﺳﻴﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
D
⇒
1-26
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ:
)Run-Matrix, eActivity, Graph, Dyna Graph, Table, Recursion, Equation (SOLVER
ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ:
Run-Matrix, eActivity, Equation
ﺍﻻﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ Graphﻭ Dyna Graphﻭ Tableﻭ
Recursionﻭ Equationﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Equation
• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻟﻸﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ.
• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-15ﻭ "ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-24ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺼﻴﻼﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix
• ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ eActivityﻭ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻟﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrixﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ
ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،eActivityﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ ."eActivity
uﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ Graphﻭ
Dyna Graphﻭ Tableﻭ Recursion
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 1
x 2 − x −1
' = yﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ,ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ،Graphﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
2
' 2
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ.
ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
mGraphvx'!x(')c
ee-v'!x(')cee
-bw
)6(DRAW
1-27
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 2
ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ 1 x 2− 1 x −1 dx
4
2
x
∫
0
= yﺍﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Graph
ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
)mGraphK2(CALC)3(∫dx
b'eevx-b'ce
v-beaevw
)6(DRAW
• ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻟﻼﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ.
• ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ )) (1(SIMLﻛﺜﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ )) ،(2(POLYﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻫﺎ )ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ π ،'،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ(.
• ﻓﻲ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ )) ،(3(SOLVERﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ x2 + 3x + 5 = 0ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Equation
)mEquation!m(SET UP
)cccc(Complex Mode
2(a+bi)J
2(POLY)1(2)bwdwfww
1-28
.5ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )(OPTN
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ .K
• ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ Kﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ.
• ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ) ،(OPTNﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ "ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ "Kﻓﻲ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (8-51
• ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ.
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Program
• }} ... {LISTﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ{
• }} ... {MAT/VCTﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ /ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ{
• }} ... {COMPLEXﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ{
• }} ... {CALCﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻲ{
• }} ... {STATﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ،ﺍﻹﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ،ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ{
• }} ... {CONVERTﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ{*
• }} ... {HYPERBLﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ{
• }} ... {PROBﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ/ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ{
• }} ... {NUMERICﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ{
• }} ... {ANGLEﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ/ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﻨﻲ/ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ{
• }} ... {ENG-SYMﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ{
• }} ... {PICTUREﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ/ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{
• }} ... {FUNCMEMﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ{
• }} ... {LOGICﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ{
• }} ... {CAPTUREﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ{
• }} ... {FINANCEﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ{
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Mathﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ " "Input/Outputﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ CAPTURE, FUNCMEM, PICTUREﻏﻴﺮ
ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
* ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﻱ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﻱ.
1-29
.6ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ )(VARS
ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ.
{V-WIN}/{FACTOR}/{STAT}/{GRAPH}/{DYNA}/{TABLE}/{RECURSION}/{EQUATION}/
}{FINANCE}/{Str
• ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻭﺿﺎﻉ ،FINANCE ،EQUATIONﻓﻘﻂ ﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ) 3ﻭ (4ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Program
• ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ Jﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ،ﺃﻭ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻣﻌﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ.
• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ) ،(VARSﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ "ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ "Jﻓﻲ
"ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-51
— V-WIN uﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ .V-Window
• }} ... {T,θ}/{Y}/{Xﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ}/{x-ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ}/{y-ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ {T,θ
• }} ... {R-T,θ}/{R-Y}/{R-Xﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ}/{x-ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ}/{y-ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ {T,θﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ.
• }} ... {pitch}/{dot}/{scale}/{max}/{minﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ{}/ﺍﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ{}/ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ{/
}ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ*}/{1ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ{.
* 1ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ - Xmaxﻗﻴﻤﺔ (Xminﺍﳌﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﲢﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻭﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ.
— FACTOR uﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ
• }} ... {Yfct}/{Xfctﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ}/{x-ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ{y-
— STAT uﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ
• }} … {Xﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ،ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ{x-
• }} ... {maxX}/{minX}/{sx}/{σx}/{Σx2}/{Σx}/{x¯ }/{nﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ{}/ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ{}/ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ{}/ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ{}/ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ{}/ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ{}/ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ{}/ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ{
• }} ... {Yﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ{y-
• }} ... {maxY}/{minY}/{sy}/{σy}/{Σxy}/{Σy2}/{Σy}/{ӯﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ{}/ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ{}/ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ{/
}ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ x-ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ}/{y-ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ{}/ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ{}/ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ{/
}ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ{
• }} ... {GRAPHﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{
• } ... {e}/{d}/{c}/{b}/{aﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ
• }} ... {r2}/{rﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ{
• }} ... {MSeﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ{
• }} ... {Q3}/{Q1ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﻭﻝ{}/ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ{
• }} ... {Mod}/{Medﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ{}/ﻭﺿﻊ{ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ
• } ... {Pitch}/{Startﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺗﺮ }ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ{}/ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ{
1-30
• }} ... {PTSﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳌﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ{
• } ... {y3}/{x3}/{y2}/{x2}/{y1}/{x1ﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ
• }} ... {INPUTﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ{
• }} ... {sp}/{sx2}/{sx1}/{x¯ 2}/{x¯ 1}/{n2}/{n1}/{sx}/{x¯ }/{nﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ{}/ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ{/
}ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ{}/ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ }/{1ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ }/{2ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ }/{1ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ /{2
}ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ }/{1ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ }/{2ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ {p
• }} ... {RESULTﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ{
• }} ... {TESTﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ{
• }/{pb}/{MSa}/{SSa}/{Adf}/{Fa}/{pa}/{r }/{r}/{se}/{df}/{ pˆ 2}/{ pˆ 1}/{ pˆ }/{F}/{Chi}/{t}/{z}/{p
}{MSe}/{SSe}/{Edf}/{MSab}/{SSab}/{ABdf}/{Fab}/{pab}/{MSb}/{SSb}/{Bdf}/{Fb
2
} ...ﻗﻴﻤﺔ}/{p-ﻋﻼﻣﺔ }/{zﻋﻼﻣﺔ }/{tﻗﻴﻤﺔ }/{χ2ﻗﻴﻤﺔ }/{Fﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ{ }/ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ
ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ }/{1ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ }/{2ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ{}/ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Aﻗﻴﻤﺔ}/{p-ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Aﻗﻴﻤﺔ }/{Fﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Aﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Aﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Aﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Bﻗﻴﻤﺔ}/{p-ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Bﻗﻴﻤﺔ }/{Fﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Bﺩﺭﺟﺔ
ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Bﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Bﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ABﻗﻴﻤﺔ}/{p-ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ AB
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ }/{Fﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ABﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ABﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ABﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ{/
}ﺧﻄﺄ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ{}/ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ{}/ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ{
• }} ... {INTRﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺛﻴﻘﺔ{
• }} ... {df}/{ pˆ 2}/{ pˆ 1}/{pˆ }/{Upper}/{Lowerﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺛﻴﻘﺔ{}/ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺛﻴﻘﺔ{/
}ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻘﺪﺭ{}/ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻘﺪﺭ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ }/{1ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻘﺪﺭ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ }/{2ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ{
• }} ... {DISTﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ{
• }} ... {tUp}/{tLow}/{zUp}/{zLow}/{x2Inv}/{x1Inv}/{xInv}/{pﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ)ﻗﻴﻤﺔ}/{(p-ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ t-ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ F ،χ2 ،ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ،
ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ{}/ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﺍﳊﺪ ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ)ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﳝﲔ(
ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﳊﺪ )ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ({}/ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﺪ ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ)ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﳝﲔ({}/ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ({}/ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ)ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﳝﲔ({}/ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﳊﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ) t-ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ({}/ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ) t-ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﳝﲔ({
— GRAPH uﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
• }} ... {r}/{Yﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ )ﻧﻮﻉ )}/{(Y=f(xﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ{
• } ... {Yt}/{Xtﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺎﺗﺮﻳﻲ }{Xt}/{Yt
• }} ... {Xﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ )ﻧﻮﻉ ){(X=f(y
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
— DYNA uﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
• }} ... {Pitch}/{End}/{Startﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ{}/ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ{}/ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ{
1-31
— TABLE uﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
• }} ... {Pitch}/{End}/{Startﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{}/ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{}/ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{
• }} ... {1*Resultﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{
* 1ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ Resultﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ TABLEﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﻭﻭﺿﻊ .Program
— RECURSION uﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ*, 1ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
• }} ... {FORMULAﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ{
• }{an}/{an+1}/{an+2}/{bn}/{bn+1}/{bn+2}/ ... {an}/{an+1}/{an+2}/{bn}/{bn+1}/{bn+2}/{cn}/{cn+1}/{cn+2
} {cn}/{cn+1}/{cn+2ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ
• }} ... {RANGEﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{
• } ... {End}/{Startﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ }ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ{}/ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ{
• } {a0}/{a1}/{a2}/{b0}/{b1}/{b2}/{c0}/{c1}/{c2} ... {a0}/{a1}/{a2}/{b0}/{b1}/{b2}/{c0}/{c1}/{c2ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
• } ... {anStart}/{bnStart}/{cnStartﺃﺻﻮﻝ } {an}/{bn}/{cnﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ /ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪ
)ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ(
• }} ... {2*Resultﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ*{3
* 1ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
* "Result" 2ﺗﺘﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ Run-Matrixﻭ .Program
* 3ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ).(MatAns
— EQUATION uﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ** 1
2
• } ... {SimCoef}/{SimResﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻝ}ﺣﻠﻮﻝ*}/{3ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ{ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺛﻨﲔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﺖ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ*
4
• } ... {PlyCoef}/{PlyResﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻝ }ﺣﻞ{} /ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ{ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ.
* 1ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ).(MatAns
* 2ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ* 3ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ " "Infinitely Many Solutionsﺃﻭ " ،"No Solutionﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ Rref
)ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﺘﺰﻝ(.
* 4ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
— FINANCE uﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ
• }} ... {FV}/{PMT}/{PV}/{I%}/{nﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻁ({}/ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ{}/ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ{/
}ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻲ{}/ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ{
• }} ... {C/Y}/{P/Yﻣﺪﺓ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ{}/ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ{
Str — Str uﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ
• }} ... {Strﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ{
1-32
.7ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )(PRGM
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ) (PRGMﺃﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ Programﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ
) .!J(PRGMﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ).(PRGM
• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ) (PRGMﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Mathﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ " "Input/Outputﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
• }} .... {COMMANDﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ{
• }} ..... {CONTROLﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ{
• }} .............{JUMPﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ{
• }?{ } ...................ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ{
• }^{ } .................ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ{
• }} .......... {CLEARﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺢ{
• }} ....... {DISPLAYﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{
• }} ...... {RELATNLﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻁ{
• } I/O} ................ {I/Oﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ/ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ{
• }} ................... {:ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ{
• }} .............. {STRﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ{
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻂ ) !J(PRGMﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ
Programﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻲ ,ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻣﻌﺪﺍ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ.
• }} .............. {Progﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ{
• }{JUMP}/{?}/{^}/{RELATNL}/{:
ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Comp
ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ".
1-33
.8ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ ﳝﻨﺤﻚ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ .ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
uﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ
.1ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ .ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ
.Run-Matrix
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) m!(SET UPﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ.
• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﹰ ﳑﻜﻨﺎ .ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ) 1ﺍﻟﻰ (6ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ.
.5ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﲤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ.
kﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﻳﻔﺼﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ .ﻳﺸﻴﺮ
ﹼ
ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ.
• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
) Input/Output uﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ/ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ(
• } ... {Line}/{Mathﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ }ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ{}/ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ{
) Mode uﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ(
• }} ... {Compﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ{
• }} ... {Oct}/{Bin}/{Hex}/{Decﻋﺸﺮﻱ{}/ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ{}/ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ{}/ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ{
) Frac Result uﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ(
• } ... {ab/c}/{d/cﻛﺴﻮﺭ }ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ{}/ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ{
1-34
) Func Type uﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(
ﲢﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ vﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﹼ
• }=} ... {X=}/{Parm}/{r=}/{Yﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ )ﻧﻮﻉ )}/{(Y= f (xﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ{/
}ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﻚ{}/ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ )ﻧﻮﻉ ){(X= f (y
• } {y>f(x)}/{y}/{Y<}/{Yt}/{Ysﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ
• } {x>f(y)}/{x}/{X<}/{Xt}/{Xsﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ
) Draw Type uﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(
• }} ... {Plot}/{Connectﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ{}/ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ{
) Derivative uﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ(
• }} ... {Off}/{Onﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{}/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{ﺣﲔ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ،ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ.
) Angle uﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ(
• }} ... {Gra}/{Rad}/{Degﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ{}/ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ{}/ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ{
Complex Mode u
• }} ... {Realﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ{
• } ... {r∠θ}/{a+biﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ}ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻲ{}/ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ{
) Coord uﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(
• }} ... {Off}/{Onﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{}/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{
) Grid uﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻂ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ(
• }} ... {Line}/{Off}/{Onﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻛﻨﻘﺎﻁ{}/ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ{}/ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻛﺨﻄﻮﻁ{
) Axes uﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(
• }} ... {Scale}/{Off}/{Onﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ{}/ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ{}/ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﻄﺮﺓ{
) Label uﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(
• }} ... {Off}/{Onﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{}/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{
) Display uﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(
• }} ... {Eng}/{Norm}/{Sci}/{Fixﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ{}/ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮﺓ{/
}ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ{}/ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ{
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ،ﻓﻴﻠﺤﻖ " "/Eﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻣﺜﻞ
) Stat Wind uﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ V-Windowﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ(
• }} ... {Manual}/{Autoﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ{}/ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ{
) Resid List uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ(
• }} ... {LIST}/{Noneﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ{}/ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﺔ ﰎ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﺎ{
1-35
) List File uﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ(
• }} ... {FILEﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{
) Sub Name uﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(
• }} ... {Off}/{Onﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{}/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{
) Graph Func uﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ(
• }} ... {Off}/{Onﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{}/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{
) Dual Screen uﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ(
• }} ... {Off}/{GtoT}/{G+Gﺭﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ{}/ﺭﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺁﺧﺮ{}/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ{
) Simul Graph uﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ(
• }} ... {Off}/{Onﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ )ﺭﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎ({}/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ )ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ({
) Background uﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ(
• }} ...{OPEN}/{PICT n}/{Noneﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ{ }/ﲢﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ{}/ﲢﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ
ﻛﺎﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ{
) Plot/LineCol uﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ(
• } ...{Black}/{Blue}/{Red}/{Magenta}/{Green}/{Cyan}/{Yellowﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ.
) Sketch Line uﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ(
•}
{} /
{} /
{}/
{}/
{ } ...ﻋﺎﺩﻱ{}/ﺳﻤﻴﻚ{}/ﻣﺘﻜﺴﺮ{}/ﻣﻨﻘﻂ{}/ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻊ{
) Dynamic Type uﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(
• }} ... {Stop}/{Contﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ)ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ({}/ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ 10ﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ{
) Locus uﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(
• }} ... {Off}/{Onﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ{}/ﻣﺤﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ{
) Y=Draw Speed uﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(
• }} ... {High}/{Normﻋﺎﺩﻱ{}/ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ{
) Variable uﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(
• }} ... {LIST}/{RANGﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{}/ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ{
) ΣDisplay uﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ Σﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ(
• }} ... {Off}/{Onﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{}/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{
1-36
) Slope uﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺸﺘﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﺭﻭﻃﻲ(
• }} ... {Off}/{Onﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{}/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{
) Payment uﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ(
• }} ... {END}/{BEGINﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ{}/ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ{ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ
) Date Mode uﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ(
• } ... {360}/{365ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ } {360}/{365ﻳﻮﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻦ
) Periods/YR. uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ(
• }} ... {Semi}/{Annualﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ{}/ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ{
Graph Color u
• } ... {Black}/{Blue}/{Red}/{Magenta}/{Green}/{Cyan}/{Yellowﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻲ.
) Ineq Type uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﲤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ(
• } ... {Union}/{Intsectﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ} ،ﺍﻣﻼ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ
ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻓﻴﺔ{}/ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ{
) Simplify uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ /ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ(
• }} ... {Manual}/{Autoﻳﺨﻔﺾ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ{}/ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ{
) Q1Q3 Type uﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ (Q1/Q3
• }} ... {OnData}/{Stdﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ،
ﲟﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ Q1ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ }/{Q3ﺟﻌﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ
ﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 1/4ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻟـ Q1 1/4ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ
3/4ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻟـ {Q3 3/4
) Auto Calc uﺍﻛﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ(
• }} ... {Off}/{Onﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ{}/ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ{ﺻﻴﻎ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ.
) Show Cell uﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ(
• }} ... {Val}/{Formﺻﻴﻐﺔ{*}/ 1ﻗﻴﻤﺔ{
) Move uﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ(*
2
• }} ... {Right}/{Lowﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ{}/ﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ{
* 1ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ") "Formﺻﻴﻐﺔ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ "Form" .ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ.
* 2ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ wﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ،ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺮﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
1-37
.9ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻﻗﻄﺔ.
uﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ
.1ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).!h(CAPTURE
• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
.3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 20ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ w
• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﺎﺓ " = n) "Capt nﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ(.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ Memory ERRORﺍﺫ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ.
uﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻﻗﻄﺔ.
ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ.
.1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،Run-Matrixﺍﺿﻐﻂ
)K6(g)6(g)5(CAPTURE)1(Recall
.2ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻﻗﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ،20ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ.
.3ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺪﺃﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ،1ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻣﺮ RclCaptﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻﻗﻄﺔ.
1-38
.10ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ...
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
kﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).5(RESET
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) ،1(SETUPﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(Yes
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jmﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺭﺍﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
kﺍﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ
uﺍﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ .ﻻﺣﻆ ،ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ
ﺍﻥ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻻ ﺑﺂﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ .ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﳝﻬﺪ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ,
ﻓﺘﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺁﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﲢﻴﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﲔ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ .ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺑﻌﺪ
ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺳﺘﻔﻘﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(12-6
1-39
uﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ.
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﻻ .ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
.(12-4
kﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ
ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻴﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ.
ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﺣﻔﻈﺎ ﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ،
ﻓﻠﻦ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪﻫﺎ ﲤﺎﻣﺎ.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ.
kﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ) (g3p/g3bﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ) ﺃﻭ ﺍﶈﺪﺛﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ fx-CG50ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
.fx-CG10
• "ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-38
• "ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (5-11
• "ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻔﺔ )ﺑﻬﺖ (I/Oﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (5-12
• "ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﻠﻒ ) "(g3pﺻﻔﺤﺔ (5-21
• "ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﻠﻒ (g3pﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-9
• "ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (15-5
• ") "K1(PICTUREﲢﺖ ") "Graph Screen Key Operationsﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (ε-37
• ﻭﲢﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻷﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ) ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺃﻛﺴﻞ ،ﻣﺎﻟﻲ ،ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(.
1-40
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ
• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ fx-CG10ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .fx-CG50
• ﻭ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ fx-CG50ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ
.fx-CG10
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ eActivityﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺪﺛﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ
fx-CG50ﺑﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ .fx-CG10
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "Provided by CASIOﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ
eActivityﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﲢﺖ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ"
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(11-6ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ fx-CG10ﻭ .fx-CG50
1-41
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ
.1ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ
2
kﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ
• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ،ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ.
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ -ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ.
• ﲡﺮﻯ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑـ 15ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ .ﻭ ﺗﻘﺮﺏ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ.
• ﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﻀﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ.
ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ
56 × (–12) ÷ (–2.5) = 268.8
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
56*-12/-2.5w
(2 + 3) × 102 = 500
2w
2 + 3 × (4 + 5) = 29
2+3*(4+5w*1
6
3
=
)(0.3
4 × 5 10
'6c4*5w
>ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ<
6/(4*5)w
(2+3)*1
* 1ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﲔ )ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ، (wﻷﻳﻬﻢ ﻛﻢ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
kﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ،ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ،ﻭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ
][SET UP]- [Display] -[Fix] / [Sci] / [Norm
• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﲡﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 15ﺭﻗﻢ
ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ،ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﺑـ 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ )(NUMERIC
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (2-14ﻟﺘﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ.
• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ) (Fixﻭ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ) (Sciﺗﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ
ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ).(Norm
2-1
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1
100 ÷ 6 = 16.66666666...
ﺷﺮﻭﻁ
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ
16.66666667
100/6w
4ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ
!m(SET UP) ff
1(Fix)ewJw
5ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ
!m(SET UP) ff
2(Sci)fwJw
ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
*1
16.6667
*1E+01
1.6667
!m(SET UP) ff
3(Norm)Jw
16.66666667
* 1ﰎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2
200 ÷ 7 × 14 = 400
ﺷﺮﻭﻁ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ
200/7*14w
400
ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ 3
!m(SET UP) ff
1(Fix)dwJw
400.000
ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻝ 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ
200/7w
*
14w
28.571
Ans × I
400.000
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﺼﺼﺔ:
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ
ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ
ﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ.
) ﻣﺜﺎﻻ :ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻻﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ(
200/7w
28.571
K6(g)4(NUMERIC)4(Rnd)w
*
14w
28.571
399.994
200/7w
28.571
)6(g)1(RndFix)!-(Ans),2
w
*
14w
)RndFix(Ans,2
28.570
Ans × I
Ans × I
399.980
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ،ﻭ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ،Σ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ/ﺍﻟﻜﺒﺮﻯ ،ﻭ ،Solveﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،RndFixﺍﻭ logabﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .RndFix
2-2
kﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻖ ﺍﳉﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ:
1ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ A
• ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )Pol (x, y), Rec (r, θ
2
3
4
5
6
7
• ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻮﻱ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ )ﻛﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﻭ ،Σﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(
d/dx, d2/dx2, ∫dx, Σ, Solve, SolveN, FMin, FMax, List→Mat, Fill, Seq, SortA, SortD, Min,
Max, Median, Mean, Augment, Mat→List, DotP, CrossP, Angle, UnitV, Norm, P(, Q(,
R(, t(, RndFix, logab
• ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ*List, Mat, Vct, fn, Yn, rn, Xtn, Ytn, Xn ،1
ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ B
ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
g r
،” ’ ° ،x! ،x–1 ،x2ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ،ENGﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ، ،°
ﻃﺎﻗﺔ/ﺟﺬﺭ '^(xy), x
ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ a b/c
ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ،πﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ.
،F Start ،Xmin ،5A ،2πﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ
ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ C
ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ،ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ.
x
x
3
', ', log, ln, e , 10 , sin, cos, tan, sin–1, cos–1, tan–1, sinh, cosh, tanh, sinh–1, cosh–1,
tanh–1, (–), d, h, b, o, Neg, Not, Det, Trn, Dim, Identity, Ref, Rref, Sum, Prod, Cuml,
Percent, ΔList, Abs, Int, Frac, Intg, Arg, Conjg, ReP, ImP
ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ،Aﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ،Cﻭ ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ،
' ،A log2 ،2ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ
3
8ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ،ﻭ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ،ﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﻄﺒﻲ ∠ nPr, nCr,
2
9ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ*
×, ÷, Int÷, Rmdr 0
! – +,
@ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﻴﺔ ≤ =, ≠, >, <, ≥,
) And #ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ() and ،ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ(
) Xor ،Or $ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ() xnor ،xor ،or ،ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ(
* 1ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ) (fnﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )Yn, rn, Xtn, Ytn,
(Xnﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ .ﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ) ،fn1(fn2ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ) fn1°fn2ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-14
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﲢﻮﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ.
* 2ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
2-3
)ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ = 2 + 3 × (log sin2π2 + 6.8) = 22.07101691 (Rad
ﻣﺜﺎﻻ
1
2
3
4
5
6
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﻓﻀﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ،ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ.
})exln 120 → ex{ln( 120
ﻭ ﺇﻻ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ.
• ﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ.
• ﻛﻞ ﺷﻴﺊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ ﻳﺤﻈﻰ ﺑﺎﻻﻓﻀﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ.
kﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ )ﺑﺘﻀﻤﲔ ' ﺃﻭ (πﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ""Math
ﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ " "Input/Outputﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻻ
'
'2+
'8 = 3
2
)(Math :Input/Output
!x(')ce+!x(')iw
uﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ
'
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ' ﻣﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ' ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﺪﺗﲔ .ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ
' ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
'b ± d
e
'± a
'b, ± d ± a
'b, ± a
f
c
• ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ) (a, b, c, d, e, fﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ '.
1 < a < 100, 1 < b < 1000, 1 < c < 100
0 < d < 100, 0 < e < 1000, 1 < f < 100
• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ' ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺗﻬﺎ ) (a, c, dﺧﺎﺭﺝ
ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ.
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﻜﻞ ' ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻛﻘﺎﺳﻢ ﻋﺎﻡ
'´b + d
e
'a
'b + d
'´e → a
´c
c
f
* ´ cﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺩﻧﻲ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻝ cﻭ f
2-4
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺳﻢ ﻋﺎﻡ ،ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ '
ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ )´ (a´, c´, dﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ).(a, c, d
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
'3 + 11
2
' 3
'2 10
'
+
=
110
11
10
ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
'2 × (3 – 2
'5) = 6 – 4
5
ﺷﻜﻞ '
'35
' 2 × 3 = 148.492424 (= 105
2)*1
ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ
'150
2
= 8.485281374*1
25
'23 × (5 – 2
'3) = 35.32566285 (= 115 – 46
3)*1
ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ
'
'2+
'3+
'=8
'3 + 3
2
ﺷﻜﻞ '
'2+
'3+
6 = 5.595754113*2
'
ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ
* 1ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ.
* 2ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻷﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ.
• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﻟﻮ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ
ﺑﻨﺪﻳﻦ.
' (1 +
'2+
' – 3) (1
'–2
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ3) :
'( = – 4 – 2
)6
= –8.898979486
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ' ﻭ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻛﻜﺴﺮ ،ﻓﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ.
' log3 +
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ2 = 1.891334817 :
uﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ π
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻜﻞ πﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ nπ
nﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻰ |.|106
b
b
ﺃﻭ π
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ π
c
c
b
b
2 1
ﺃﻭ * *.a
ﻟﻜﻦ } ،ﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ + aﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ + bﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ {cﻳﺤﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ 8ﺃﻭ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ
c
c
2
ﻭﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ cﺛﻼﺙ*.
* 1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ،c < bﻓﺎﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ aﻭ bﻭ cﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺣﲔ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ) ( bﺍﻟﻰ
c
ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﺘﻠﻂ ) .(a b
c
* 2ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ " "Manualﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Simplifyﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ .ﻓﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ
ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ،ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ.
a
2-5
ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ:
ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ:
78π × 2 = 156π
πﺷﻜﻞ
123456π × 9 = 3490636.164 (= 11111104 π)*3
ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ
568
71
π = 105
π
824
103
129
π *4
1619
2
πﺷﻜﻞ
105
258
π = 6.533503684
3238
ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ
2
* 3ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻷﻥ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ | |106ﺃﻭ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ.
b
* 4ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻷﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ .a π
c
kﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ )×( ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ 1) Aﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (2-3ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ) 6ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (2-3ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 1
3 ،10log1.2 ،2sin30
' 2Pol(5, 12) ،2ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ
• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﺑﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 2
3Y1 ،3Ans ،2AB ،2πﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ
• ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﲔ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 3
) (A + 1)(B – 1) ،3(5 + 6ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ
ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 1
))6 ÷ (2(1 + 2
→
)6 ÷ 2(1 + 2
))6 ÷ (A(1 + 2
→
)6 ÷ A(1 + 2
)1 ÷ ((2 + 3)sin30
→
1 ÷ (2 + 3)sin30
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ،ﻭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ،ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 2
)6 ÷ (2π
→
6 ÷ 2π
'2 ÷ (2
)2
'2 ÷ 2
→ 2
)4π ÷ (2π
→
4π ÷ 2π
2-6
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ )ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ(،ﺳﻮﻑ
ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
) ( 13
4
) ( sin 2
5
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
2
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
→
(2 × 1 ): 2 1
3
→
3
(sin 2 × 4 ): sin 2 4
5
5
kﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ
ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻓﻠﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﻠﺔ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ .ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ
ﺍﳋﻄﺄ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .α-1
• ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ.
kﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ،ﻓﻴﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ .ﻓﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﻲ b :ﻭ cﻭ dﻭ sinﻭ cosﻭ tanﻭ logﻭ lnﻭ ' ﻭ .π
ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﻲ d/dx( :ﻭ Matﻭ Vctﻭ Xminﻭ Ifﻭ Forﻭ Returnﻭ DrawGraph
ﻭ ( SortAﻭ PxIOnﻭ Sumﻭ .an+1
• ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
.1-15
.2ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ
193.2aav(A)w
193.2
193.2 ÷ 23 = 8.4
av(A)/23w
8.4
193.2 ÷ 28 = 6.9
av(A)/28w
6.9
kﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
uﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ )ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎ(
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺏ 28ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻨﻲ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻭﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻓﺎ ﺍﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﻭ rﻭ .θ
ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻫﻲ 15ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻠﺪﻟﻴﻞ.
ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﹼ
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﲔ ﺇﻃﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
2-7
uﻟﺘﻌﲔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ.
] wﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ[ ] aﻗﻴﻤﺔ[
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1
ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ 123ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ .A
Abcdaav(A)w
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2
ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ 456ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ Aﻭ ﳋﺰﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ .B
Aav(A)+efga
al(B)w
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ Xﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) a+(Xﺍﻭ .vﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) a+(Xﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ
ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ،Xﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ vﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ .xﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟـ Xﻭ xﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ
ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 3
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﲔ 10ﻟـ xﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﲔ 5ﻟـ .Xﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎ ،ﲢﻘﻖ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻟـ .x
Abaavw
faa+(X)w
vw
uﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
] wﺍﺳﻢ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ[ ~ ]ﺍﺳﻢ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ[ ] aﻗﻴﻤﺔ[
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ " "rﺃﻭ " "θﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝ 10ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ Aﺧﻼﻝ .F
)Abaaav(A
!e(CATALOG)6(CAT)cccc
)1(EXE
ff
1(INPUT)at(F)w
uﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ) ﺍﳌﺴﻤﺎﺓ Str 1ﺍﻟﻰ (Str 20ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ .ﻭ ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ
ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻛﺤﺠﺔ.
ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-25
2-8
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ " "ABCﺍﻟﻰ Str 1ﺛﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ Str 1ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ.
!m(SET UP)2(Line)J
)(”)v(A
)A!a( A -LOCK
)ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ((”)a
)l(B)I(C
aJ6(g)5(Str)bw
5(Str)bw
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﺒﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/
ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ.
uﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
][OPTN]-[FUNCMEM
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ .ﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻃﻮﻝ ،ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ Graphﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ Programﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ.
• }} ... {SEE}/{fn}/{RECALL}/{STOREﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ{}/ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ{}/ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﺎﺳﻢ
ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ{}/ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ{
uﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) (A+B) (A-Bﻛﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ 1
!m(SET UP)2(Line)J
))A(av(A)+al(B
))(av(A)-al(B
)K6(g)6(g)3(FUNCMEM
1(STORE)bw
JJJ
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺧﺰﻧﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﻓﺎﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ
ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ aﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ.
2-9
uﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ 1
)AK6(g)6(g)3(FUNCMEM
2(RECALL)bw
• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
uﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ
Adaav(A)w
baal(B)w
)K6(g)6(g)3(FUNCMEM)3(fn
b+cw
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ
)K6(g)6(g)3(FUNCMEM
)4(SEE
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺬﻑ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ 1
A
)K6(g)6(g)3(FUNCMEM
1(STORE)bw
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
2-10
kﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ.
ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) wﻭﺍﻻ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ wﺧﻄﺄ( ﻭ
ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ.
• ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﻲ 15ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﺃﺳﲔ.
• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ Aﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻄﻔﺄ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
uﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
123 + 456 = 579
789 – 579 = 210
Abcd+efgw
hij-!-(Ans)w
• ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻔﺎ ) (faal(B)wﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ
kﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ
ﲤﻨﺤﻚ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺠﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﳌﻘﺒﻠﺔ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
=1÷3
=1÷3×3
Ab/dw
)*dwﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ(
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ،x! ،x–1 ،x2) Bﺻﻔﺤﺔ ° ’ ” ،x' ،^(xy) ،– ،+ ،(2-3
ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ.
2-11
.3ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
kﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
][SET UP]- [Angle
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ " "Angleﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
• }} ... {Gra}/{Rad}/{Degﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ{ }/ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ{ }/ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ{
• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ.
ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ = 400ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ 360° = 2π
ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ = 100ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ 90° = π/2
kﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
][SET UP]- [Display
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ " "Displayﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
• }} ... {Eng}/{Norm}/{Sci}/{Fixﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ{}/ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮﺓ{/
}ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ{}/ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ{
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻼﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ )(Fix
ﻣﺜﺎﻻ
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ
1(Fix)cw
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ) 0 = nﺍﻟﻰ (9
• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺪﺩ.
2-12
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ )(Sci
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ
ﻣﺜﺎﻻ
2(Sci)dw
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ) 0 = nﺍﻟﻰ (9ﲢﺪﻳﺪ 0ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﺒﺮﺓ
.10
• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ )(Norm 1/Norm 2
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 3(Normﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ Norm 1ﻭ .Norm 2
Norm 1: 10–2 (0.01) > |x|, |x| >1010
Norm 2: 10–9 (0.000000001) > |x|, |x| >1010
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ )ﻭﺿﻊ (Eng
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 4(Engﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ .ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ " "/Eﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﲔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ
ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﻔﻌﻞ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ،ﻣﺜﻞ ).2k ← 2,000 (= 2 × 103
) Eﺍﻳﻜﺰﺍ(
× 1018
) mﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ(
× 10–3
) Pﺑﻴﻄﺎ(
× 1015
) μﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭ(
× 10–6
) Tﺗﻴﺮﺍ(
× 1012
) nﻧﺎﻧﻮ(
× 10–9
) Gﺟﻴﻐﺎ(
× 109
) pﺑﻴﻜﻮ(
× 10–12
) Mﻣﻴﻐﺎ(
× 106
) fﻓﻴﻤﺘﻮ(
× 10–15
) kﻛﻴﻠﻮ(
× 103
• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 1000ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ
ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﻔﻌﻞ.
2-13
.4ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
kﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﻨﺤﻚ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ
ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ.
• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ .Kﺗﺒﲔ
ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .Program
uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ )(HYPERBL
][OPTN]-[HYPERBL
• } ... {sinh}/{cosh}/{tanhﺯﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ }ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ{}/ﺟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﻡ{}/ﺟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ{
• } ... {sinh–1}/{cosh–1}/{tanh–1ﺯﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ }ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ{}/ﺟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﻡ{}/ﺟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ{
uﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ/ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )(PROB
][OPTN]-[PROB
• }! ... {xﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻀﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
• }} ... {nCr}/{nPrﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ{}/ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ{
• }} ... {RANDﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ{
• }} ... {Samp}/{List}/{Bin}/{Norm}/{Int}/{Ran#ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ) 0ﺇﻟﻰ }/{(1ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ
ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ{ }/ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻂ μﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ
ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ }/{σﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻱ nﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ /{p
}ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ) 0ﺇﻟﻰ (1ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ }/{ListAnsﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﻲ {ListAns
• }( ... {P(}/{Q(}/{Rﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ }){P(t)}/{Q(t)}/{R(t
• }(} ... {tﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ){t(x
uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ
][OPTN]-[NUMERIC
• } ... {Absﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ
• } ... {Frac}/{Intﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺟﺰﺀ }ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ {}/ﻛﺴﺮ{.
• } ... {Rndﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻝ 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ )ﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ( ،ﺃﻭ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ) (Fixﻭ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ) (Sciﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ
• } ... {Intgﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
• } ... {RndFixﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ) 0ﺍﻟﻰ ) (9ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (2-2
• }} ... {GCDﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺘﲔ{
• }} ... {LCMﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺘﲔ{
• }} ... {MODﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ )ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ nﺏ {(m
• }} ... {MOD_Expﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺣﲔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ )ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﲔ ﻳﺮﻓﻊ nﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ pﺛﻢ
ﺗﻘﺴﻢ nﺏ {(m
2-14
uﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻮﻧﻲ )(ANGLE
][OPTN]-[ANGLE
• }} ... {g}/{r}/{°ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ{}/ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ{}/ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ{ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ
• }” ’ ... {°ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ(،ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ،ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ/ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ/ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ
• }” ’ ... {°ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ/ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ/ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ
• ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ }” ’ {°ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
• }( ... {Rec(}/{Polﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ }ﺩﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻄﺒﻴﺔ{}/ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺩﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ{
• } ... {'DMSﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﻨﻲ
uﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ )(ENG-SYM
][OPTN]-[ENG-SYM
• }} ... {f}/{p}/{n}/{μ}/{mﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ )}/{(10–3ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭ )}/{(10–6ﻧﺎﻧﻮ )}/{(10–9ﺑﻴﻜﻮ )}/{(10–12ﻓﻴﻤﺘﻮ ){(10–15
• }} ... {E}/{P}/{T}/{G}/{M}/{kﻛﻴﻠﻮ )}/{(103ﻣﻴﻐﺎ )}/{(106ﺟﻴﻐﺎ )}/{(109ﺗﻴﺮﺍ )}/{(1012ﺑﻴﻄﺎ )/{(1015
}ﺍﻳﻜﺰﺍ ){(1018
• } ... {ENG}/{ENGﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻰ }ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ{}/ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ{ﻭ }ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ{}/ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ{
ﺍﻷﺱ ﺑﺜﻼﺙ.
ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺒﺎﻋﺎ ﹰ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ،ﻓﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ
ﹼ
• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ } {ENGﻭ } {ENGﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
kﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟـ Modeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ
!m(SET UP)cccccc1(Deg)J
ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ 4.25ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ243.5070629 :
4.25K6(g)5(ANGLE)2(r)w
47.3° + 82.5rad = 4774.20181°
47.3+82.5K6(g)5(ANGLE)2(r)w
˝2°20´30˝ + 39´30˝ = 3°00´00
2K6(g)5(ANGLE)4(° ’ ”) 204(° ’ ”) 30
4(° ’ ”)+04(° ’ ”)394(° ’ ”) 304(° ’ ”)w
)” ’ 5 ( °
˝2.255° = 2°15´18
2.255K6(g)5(ANGLE)6(g)3('DMS)w
2-15
kﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ.
π
)ﺗﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ = 100ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ
2
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟـ Modeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
= (90°
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ
1
= )cos ( π rad
)(0.5
3
2
!m(SET UP)cccccc2(Rad)J
(π)c3w
>ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ<
!(c
(π)/3)w
!'c
!m(SET UP)cccccc1(Deg)J 2 • sin 45° × cos 65° = 0.5976724775
2*s45*c65w*1
!s(sin–1) 0.5*2w
sin–10.5 = 30°
) xﺣﲔ (sinx = 0.5
* 1ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ *.
* 2ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ.
kﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻴﺔ
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟـ Modeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ
l1.23w log 1.23 (log101.23) = 0.08990511144
4(MATH)2(logab) 2e8w
log28 = 3
>ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ<
K4(CALC)6(g)4(logab) 2,8)w
(–3)4 = (–3) × (–3) × (–3) × (–3) = 81
1
123 (= 123 7 ) = 1.988647795
7
(-3)M4w
!M(x') 7e123w
>ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ<
7!M(x')123w
• ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ،ﻣﺜﻞ2 M 3 M 2 :
2
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺔ 2^3^2 = 64 :ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ23 = 512 :
ﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻳﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺜﻞ2^(3^(2)) :
2-16
kﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟـ Modeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ
K6(g)2(HYPERBL)1(sinh) 3.6w
sinh 3.6 = 18.28545536
20
= 0.7953654612
15
K6(g)2(HYPERBL)5(cosh–1)'20c15w
cosh–1
>ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ<
K6(g)2(HYPERBL)5(cosh–1)(20
/15)w
kﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟـ Modeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ
!x(') 2e+!x(') 5wf
'
'2 +
5 = 3.65028154
>ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ<
!x(') 2+!x(')5w
(–3)2 = (–3) × (–3) = 9
(-3)xw
8! (= 1 × 2 × 3 × .... × 8) = 40320
8K6(g)3(PROB)1(x!)w
K6(g)4(NUMERIC)2(Int)-3.5w
ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻝ – 3.5؟
–3
kﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ )(RAND
uﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ) 0ﺇﻟﻰ (Ran#, RanList#) (1
ﻳﻮﻟﺪ Ran#ﻭ RanList# 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ 0ﺍﻟﻰ 1ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ .ﻳﻌﻴﺪ Ran#ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ RanList#ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ Ran#ﻭ .RanList#
]Ran# [a
10
)]RanNorm# (σ, μ [,n
ﺍﳌﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ .ﻭ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟـ nﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ
• ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟـ nﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ
ﹼ
ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ
)K6(g)3(PROB)4(RAND)3(Norm
)RanNorm# (8, 68
)ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﲢﺼﻴﻠﻪ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ 8,68)w
ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ
ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﺴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ 68ﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ (.8
)RanNorm# (8, 68, 5
)K6(g)3(PROB)4(RAND)3(Norm
)ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﺴﻢ ﳋﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻣﺜﻠﺔ
ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ،ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(.
8,68,5)w
2-19
uﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ )(RanBin#
ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺛﺮﻱ nﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ .p
0ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ<
2'5+3'1'4w
)*1ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ( = 3.65
f
1
1
––––– + ––––– = 6.066202547 × 10–4 *2
2578
4572
'1c2578e+'1c4572w
>ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ<
1'2578+1'4572w
1
–– × 0.5 = 0.25*3
2
'1c2e*.5w
>ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ<
1'2*.5w
* 1ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ.
* 2ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ 10ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺎ ﹰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺑﺴﻂ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ،ﺗﻌﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ.
* 3ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺴﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺎ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ.
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ )
ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
( !fﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﺍﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ
ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ.
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟـ Modeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ
)999k (kilo) + 25k (kilo
)!m(SET UP)ff4(Eng)J999K6(g)6(g
1(ENG-SYM)6(g)1(k)+251(k)w
)9 ÷ 10 = 0.9 = 900m (milli
9/10w
= 0.9
K6(g)6(g)1(ENG-SYM)6(g)6(g)3(ENG)*1
)= 0.0009k (kilo
3(ENG)*1
= 0.9
2(ENG)*2
= 900m
2
)= 1.024M (mega
*)2(ENG
* 1ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ،ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ.
* 2ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ،ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ.
2-23
kﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ )(AND, OR, NOT, XOR
][OPTN]-[LOGIC
ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ.
• } AND} ... {Xor}/{Not}/{Or}/{Andﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ{ OR}/ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ{ NOT}/ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ{ XOR}/ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ{
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟـ Modeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ANDﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻟـ Aﻭ Bﺣﲔ A = 3ﻭ B = 2؟
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
3aav(A)w
2aal(B)w
)av(A)K6(g)6(g
4(LOGIC)1(And)al(B)w
1
uﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ
• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺇﻣﺎ 0ﺃﻭ 1ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ.
• ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ANDﺃﻭ ORﻭ .XOR
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ A
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ B
A AND B
A OR B
A XOR B
A≠0
B≠0
1
1
0
A≠0
B=0
0
1
1
A=0
B≠0
0
1
1
A=0
B=0
0
0
0
• ﻭ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ .NOT
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ A
NOT A
A≠0
0
A=0
1
2-24
.5ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ
ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ) K4(CALCﻭﳝﻜﻦ
ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ .
• }÷} ... {Simp}/{Rmdr}/{Intﺣﺎﺻﻞ{}/ﺑﺎﻗﻲ{}/ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ{
• }} ... {SolveN}/{∫dx}/{d2/dx2}/{d/dx}/{Solveﺣﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ{}/ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ{}/ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ{}/ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ{}/ﺣﻞ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ){f(x
• }} ... {logab}/{Σ(}/{FMax}/{FMinﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ{}/ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ {}/ﺟﻤﻊ{}/ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺖ {logab
kﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ÷ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ
]÷[OPTN]-[CALC]-[Int
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ "÷ "Intﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻞ ﺣﲔ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺁﺧﺮ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ 107 ÷ 7
)AbahK4(CALC)6(g
6(g)1(Int÷)h
w
kﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ÷ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ
][OPTN]-[CALC]-[Rmdr
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ " "Rmdrﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺁﺧﺮ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻦ 107 ÷ 7
)AbahK4(CALC)6(g
6(g)2(Rmdr)h
w
2-25
kﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ
][OPTN]-[CALC]-[Simp
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ " "'Simpﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﺴﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
• ... {Simp} wﺗﺒﺴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ.
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺴﻂ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
• ... {Simp} n wﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ .n
ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺗﺒﺴﻂ ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ .ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ
ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ " "Simplifyﻣﻦ " "Autoﺍﻟﻰ ") "Manualﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-37
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ " "r∠θﺍﻭ " "a+biﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ " ،"Complex Modeﻓﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ
ﺗﺒﺴﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ،ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ Simplifyﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ "."Manual
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ) ، (Manual :Simplifyﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Realﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "."Complex Mode
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1
15
ﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ
60
5
1
15
=
=
4
60 20
A'bfcgaw
K4(CALC)6(g)6(g)3(Simp)w
3(Simp)w
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻢ "="F
2-26
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2
27
ﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ
63
ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻝ 9
3
27
=
7
63
A'chcgdw
K4(CALC)6(g)6(g)3(Simp)j
w
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ.
• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ 'Simpﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ،ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﺘﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ "="F
kﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
][OPTN]-[CALC]-[Solve
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ Solveﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
)Solve(f(x), n, a, b
) :aﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ :b ،ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ :n ،ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ(
ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﲔ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ Solveﻫﻤﺎ :ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ
ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺠﺪﻭﻝ.
ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ،ﺗﺨﺼﺺ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ .ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﳌﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
Solveﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .Program
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ Solveﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ .ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
Solveﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ) (Time Outﺣﲔ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺀ ﻟﻠﺤﻞ.
ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .4-4
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ﻭ ،Σﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﺮﻯ/ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ Solveﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ Aﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ) Solveﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻓﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻴﻖ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
kﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )f(x
][OPTN]-[CALC]-[SolveN
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ SolveNﳊﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) f(xﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﶈﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ .ﻭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻴﺔ.
)]ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ,ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ] [,ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ] [,ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ=[ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ( SolveN
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ.
• ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ "]ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ=[ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ" ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ .ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻤﺔ Aﺧﻼﻝ ،r ،Zﻭ .θﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ
ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻓﻴﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ = .0
• ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺣﻠﻬﺎ ﻝ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ ،r ،Zﻭ (θﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Xﻛﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ.
2-27
• ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻄﺎﻕ.
• ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺠﺞ.
(Solve(, d2/dx2(, FMin(, FMax(, Σ
ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺣﺘﻰ 10ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ .ListAns
• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "No Solutionﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ.
• ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "More solutions may exist.ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺏ .SolveN
ﳊﻞ x2 – 5x – 6 = 0
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
)K4(CALC)5(SolveN
vx-fv-g)w
J
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ
][OPTN]-[CALC]-[d/dx
ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭﻻ ،ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
>ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ<
K4(CALC)2(d/dx) f(x)ea
ﺃﻭ
4(MATH)4(d/dx) f(x)ea
>ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ<
)K4(CALC)2(d/dx) f(x),a
aﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ.
)d f (a
dx
⇒ )d/dx ( f (x), a
ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﻛـ:
)f (a + Ax) – f (a
––––––––––––– f ' (a) = lim
Ax→0
Ax
2-28
ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ،ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻫﻲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ،Axﻣﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟـ ) f' (aﻛـ:
)f (a + Ax) – f (a
––––––––––––– ⱌ )f ' (a
Ax
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﻓﻲ x = 3ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ y = x3 + 4x2 + x – 6
) f(xﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
AK4(CALC)2(d/dx)vMde+evx+v-ge
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ x = aﻟﻠﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﻪ.
dw
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ aﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 2-28ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ .Y2 = d/dx (Y1) :ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ Xﺑﺪﻻ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ .a
ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ
• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) ،f(xﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Xﻓﻘﻂ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ .ﻭ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﻣﻦ Aﺍﻟﻰ Zﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ
(X ،r ،θﻛﺜﻮﺍﺑﺖ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Aﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﻳﻌﻄﻞ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ:
ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ x ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ x ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ x ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ x ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ x ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ.• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ) ﻭﺿﻊ (Radﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ،ﻭ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ،Σ ،ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ/ﺍﻟﻜﺒﺮﻯ ،ﺍﳊﻞ ،ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ RndFixﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ.
2-29
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ
][OPTN]-[CALC]-[d2/dx2
ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
>ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ<
K4(CALC)3(d2/dx2) f(x)ea
ﺃﻭ
4(MATH)5(d2/dx2) f(x)ea
>ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ<
)K4(CALC)3(d2/dx2) f(x),a
aﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ.
)d 2 ( f (x), a
)d 2 f (a
–––
–––
⇒
dx2
dx2
ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ
ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﻮﻟﻨﻮﻣﻲ ﻟﻨﻴﻮﺗﺎﻥ.
)2 f(a + 3h) – 27 f(a + 2h) + 270 f(a + h) – 490 f(a) + 270 f(a – h) – 27 f(a –2h) + 2 f(a – 3h
180h2
= )f ''(a
ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟـ "ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟـ "hﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ).f"(a
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ x = 3ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ y = x3 + 4x2 + x – 6
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ).f(x
AK4(CALC)3(d2/dx2)vMde+evx+v-ge
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ 3ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ،aﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ.
dw
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ aﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ:
) .Y2 = d2/dx2 (Y1ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ Xﺑﺪﻻ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ .a
ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ) ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
.(2-29
2-30
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ
][OPTN]-[CALC]-[∫dx
ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
>ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ<
K4(CALC)4(∫dx) f(x)e a f b
ﺃﻭ
4(MATH)6(g)1(∫dx) f(x)e a f b
>ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ<
) K4(CALC)4(∫dx) f(x) , a , b , tol
) :aﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ :b ،ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ :tol ،ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ(
∫( f(x), a, b, tol) ⇒ ∫a f(x)dx
b
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ f(x)dx
b
∫
a
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ aﺇﻟﻰ b
ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) y = f (xﺣﻴﺚ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ a < x < bﻭ .f (x) > 0ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1
ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ "tol" = 1E – 4
(2x2 + 3x + 4) dx
5
1
∫
• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
K4(CALC)4(∫dx)cvx+
dv+eebffw
• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )f(x
AK4(CALC)4(∫dx)cvx+dv+e,
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ،ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ.
-e)w
b,f,b
2-31
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ
ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ = (Deg
ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﹼﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ.
) (1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ،ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﺃﻭ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺎ.
) (Sﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ
) (Sﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻲ
f(x)dx
b
c
∫
) (Sﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻲ
f(x)dx +
c
∫
a
= f(x)dx
b
∫
a
) (Sﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ
) (2ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ،ﲢﺴﺐ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺍ )ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ( ﺛﻢ ﺗﻀﺎﻑ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺎ.
f(x)dx
b
∫
x
4
x
2
f(x)dx +.....+
∫
x
1
x
1
f(x)dx +
∫
a
= f(x)dx
b
∫
a
• ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ Aﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ )ﺣﲔ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(.
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ (Radﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ.
• ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ) (Time Outﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺼﻴﻞ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﻣﺢ.
2-32
ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ
• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) ،f(xﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Xﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ Zﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ (X, r, θ
ﺗﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻛﺜﻮﺍﺑﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ " "tolﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ " ،"tolﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻝ 1E-5
• ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭﺃﻗﺼﻰ/ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺣﻞ ﻭ RndFixﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ logabﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻲ.
• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ 1E-5ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ
Σ kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ
]([OPTN]-[CALC]-[Σ
ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،Σﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
>ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ<
K4(CALC)6(g)3(Σ( ) ak e k e α e β
ﺃﻭ
4(MATH)6(g)2(Σ( ) ak e k e α e β
>ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ<
) K4(CALC)6(g)3(Σ( ) ak , k , α , β , n
β
+ aα +1 +........+ aβ
Σ a =a
α
k
k=α
= )(a k, k, α, β, n
Σ
) :nﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ(
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ:
)– 3k + 5
2
6
Σ (k
k=2
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ n = 1ﻛﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ
)AK4(CALC)6(g)3(Σ( )a,(K
x-da,(K)+fe
a,(K)ecegw
Σﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ
• ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﻭﺩ ﺧﻼﻝ Σﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻊ .ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ
ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺼﻮﺻﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ .ak
2-33
• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ) (αﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ akﻭ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ) (βﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ .ak
• ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ nﻭﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﺪﺩ ،nﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ .n = 1
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺁﺧﺮ βﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺃﻭﻝ αﻭ ﺇﻻ،
ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
• ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ Σﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ .A
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ Σﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﺮﻯ/ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﻭ ﺣﻞ ﻭ RndFixﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ Σﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻲ.
• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ) (nﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ 1ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ.
kﻷﺩﻧﻰ/ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
][OPTN]-[CALC]-[FMin]/[FMax
ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ/ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ،
ﻭ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ .a < x < b
uﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
) K4(CALC)6(g)1(FMin) f (x) , a , b , n
) :aﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ :b ،ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ :n ،ﺩﻗﺔ ) 1 = nﺍﻟﻰ ((9
uﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
) K4(CALC)6(g)2(FMax) f (x), a , b , n
) :aﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ :b ،ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ :n ،ﺩﻗﺔ ) 1 = nﺍﻟﻰ ((9
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻯ ﻳﻔﹼ ﺼﻞ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ a = 0ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ،b = 3ﻣﻊ ﺩﻗﺔ
n = 6ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ y = x2 – 4x + 9
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ).f (x
AK4(CALC)6(g)1(FMin)vx-ev+j,
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ .a = 0, b = 3
a,d,
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ .n = 6
g)w
• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) ،f(xﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Xﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ Zﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ (X, r, θ
ﺗﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻛﺜﻮﺍﺑﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﲔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
2-34
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ nﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ.
• ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ.
• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻝ nﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ،ﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺻﻞ ) (bﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ
) .(aﻭﺍﻻ ﹼ ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ/ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .A
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 9ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ .nﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ Σﻭﺃﻗﺼﻰ /ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺣﻞ ﻭ RndFixﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ /ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
.6ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﳉﻤﻊ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ 2-1ﺍﻟﻲ .2-17
• ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ/ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻟﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ 10ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻸﺱ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ.
x
x
y
x
', x 2, x –1, ^(x ), 3', ', ln, log, logab, 10 , e , Int, Frac, Rnd, Intg, RndFix(, Fix, Sci,
ENG, ENG, ° ’ ”, ° ’ ”, a b/c, d /c
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
1
• } ... {Realﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ*
• } ... {a+biﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪ
• } ... {r∠θﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻄﺒﻲ*
2
* 1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﺨﻴﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ،ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻜﻞ
ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪ.
ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ:
= 0.6931471806 + 1.570796327i
ln 2i
)ln 2i + ln (– 2) = (Non-Real ERROR
* 2ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻝ θﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻋﺪﺩﺕ ﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
• Deg ... –180 < θ < 180
• Rad ... – π < θ < π
• Gra ... –200 < θ < 200
2-35
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) K3(COMPLEXﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• }} ... {iﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﻴﻠﻴﺔ {i
• } ... {Arg}/{Absﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ } ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ{ }/ﺣﺠﺔ{
• }} ... {Conjgﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﻓﻖ{
• }} ... {ImP}/{RePﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ{}/ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻲ{ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ
• } ... {'a+bi}/{'r∠θﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ }ﻗﻄﺒﻲ{ }/ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪ{
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) !a(iﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ) K3(COMPLEX)1(iﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ.
• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ a+bi ،Realﻭ r∠θﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ )' (xﻋﻨﺪ x < 0
ﻭ y = m/nﺣﲔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ nﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ– 2 (Real) :
= )3x' (– 8
)= 1 + 1.732050808i (a +b i
)ﻭﺿﻊ = 2∠60 (r ∠θ , Deg
• ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻡ ﻝ" ∠" ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ ) (r ∠θﺍﺿﻐﻂ )∠(.!v
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
][OPTN]-[COMPLEX]-[i
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻭ
ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
)(1 + 2i) + (2 + 3i
)AK3(COMPLEX
))(b+c1(i
+(c+d1(i))w
kﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳉﺬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
)(3 + i
)AK3(COMPLEX
!x(')(d+1(i))w
2-36
kﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
2∠30 × 3∠45 = 6∠75
!m(SET UP)cccccc
1(Deg)c3(r∠θ)J
Ac!v(∠)da*d
!v(∠)efw
kﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺣﺠﺔ
][OPTN]-[COMPLEX]-[Abs]/[Arg
ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ a + biﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻄﺔ ﻏﺎﻭﺳﻲ ،ﻭ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ⎮ ⎮Zﻭ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ
).(arg
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ) (rﻭ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ) (θﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ،3 + 4iﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ
ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ
ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻲ
ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ
)AK3(COMPLEX)2(Abs
d+e1(i)w
)ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ(
)AK3(COMPLEX)3(Arg
(d+e1(i))w
)ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺠﺔ(
• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺠﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ
ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ(.
2-37
kﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ
][OPTN]-[COMPLEX]-[Conjg
ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ a + biﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ .a – bi
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ 2 + 4i
)AK3(COMPLEX)4(Conjg
(c+e1(i))w
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻴﺔ
][OPTN]-[COMPLEX]-[ReP]/[lmP
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ aﻭ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻲ bﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ .a + bi
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ 2 + 5i
)AK3(COMPLEX)6(g)1(ReP
(c+f6(g)1(i))w
)ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ(
)AK3(COMPLEX)6(g)2(ImP
(c+f6(g)1(i))w
)ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻲ(
kﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ
][OPTN]-[COMPLEX]-['r∠θ ]/['a+bi
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
' 1 +ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﻜﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ
ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ 3 i
!m(SET UP)cccccc
1(Deg)c2(a+bi)J
)Ab+(!x(')de
)K3(COMPLEX)1(i)6(g
3('r∠θ)w
Ac!v(∠)ga
K3(COMPLEX)6(g)4('a+bi)w
2-38
.7ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ,ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ,ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ
ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﻳﺔ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ،ﺗﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ
ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﳊﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ )ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ( ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ،ﻓﺴﻮﻑ
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ .ﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ.
ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ0, 1 :
ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 :
ﻋﺸﺮﻱ0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 :
ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, F :
• ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ.
• ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ.
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ
ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ
ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ
ﻋﺸﺮﻱ
ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ
ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
16ﺭﻗﻢ
11ﺭﻗﻢ
10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ
8ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ
• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ
A
B
C
D
E
F
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ
ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ
v
l
I
• ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ.
ﻗﻴﻢ ﻫﻲ
ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ0 < x < 111111111111111 :
ﺳﻠﺒﻲ1000000000000000 < x < 1111111111111111 :
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ0 < x < 17777777777 :
ﺳﻠﺒﻲ20000000000 < x < 37777777777 :
ﻗﻴﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ
ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ0 < x < 2147483647 :
ﺳﻠﺒﻲ–2147483648 < x < –1 :
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ
ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ0 < x < 7FFFFFFF :
ﺳﻠﺒﻲ80000000 < x < FFFFFFFF :
2-39
s
c
t
kﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
uﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ
][SET UP]-[Mode]-[Dec]/[Hex]/[Bin]/[Oct
.1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ .Run-Matrix
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) .!m(SET UPﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "Modeﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ 4(Bin), 3(Hex), 2(Dec), ،ﺃﻭ ) 5(Octﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• } ... {DISPLAY}/{LOGIC}/{d~oﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ}ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ{}/ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ{}/ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ/
ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ /ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ /ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻲ{
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(d~oﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ.
• }} ... {o}/{b}/{h}/{dﻋﺸﺮﻱ{}/ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ{}/ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ{}/ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ{
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﺘﻠﻄﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ،12310ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ
)!m(SET UP
ﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " ،"Modeﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
.3(Hex)J
A1(d~o)1(d)bcdw
kﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 2(LOGICﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ.
1
• }} ... {Negﺳﺎﻟﺐ{*
2
3
• }{NOT}* /{AND}/{OR}/{XOR}/{XNOR}* ... {Not}/{and}/{or}/{xor}/{xnor
* 1ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻤﻠﺔ
* 2ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻤﻠﺔ )ﺗﻜﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ(
* AND 3ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ OR ،ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ XOR ،ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ XNOR ،ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ
2-40
uﻗﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﻝ 1100102
)!m(SET UP
ﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " ،"Modeﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
.4(Bin)J
)A2(LOGIC)1(Neg
bbaabaw
• ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﺛﻢ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ.
uﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ " "12016 and AD16ﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ
)!m(SET UP
ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " ،"Modeﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
.3(Hex)J
)Abca2(LOGIC
3(and)ADw
kﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 3(DISPLAYﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ.
• } ... {'Oct}/{'Bin}/{'Hex}/{'Decﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺘﻬﺎ } ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ{}/ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ{/
}ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ{ }/ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ{
uﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ) 2210ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ
)A!m(SET UP
ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " ،"Modeﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
.2(Dec)J
1(d~o)1(d)ccw
J3(DISPLAY)3('Bin)w
4('Oct)w
2-41
.8ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 3('MAT/VCTﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ 26ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) Mat Zﺍﻟﻰ (Mat Aﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) ،(MatAnsﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻥ ﲡﻌﻞ
ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺎ ﹰ.
• ﺟﻤﻊ ،ﻭ ﻃﺮﺡ ،ﻭﺿﺮﺏ
• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ
• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ
• ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
• ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
• ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
• ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ
• ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ،ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﺮ ،ﻭﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ
ﺻﺤﻴﺢ
• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ
• ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ .999
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ )) X (a+(Xﺍﻭ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ) x (vﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ " ."Mat Xﻛﻼ
” “Mat Xﻭ ” “Mat xﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
ﻋﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )(MatAns
ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ
ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺒﺪﻟﺔ ﺑﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ
ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ .ﻭﲢﺬﻑ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ.
• ﺃ ﹼﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ) mﺻﻔﻮﻑ( × ) 1ﻋﻤﻮﺩ( ﺃﻭ ) 1ﺻﻒ( × ) nﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ( ،ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ).(VctAns
ﹰ
kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3('MAT/VCTﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭ
ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ.
) m … m × nﺻﻒ( × ) nﻋﻤﻮﺩ( ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
…Noneﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ
2-42
• } ... {DEL-ALL}/{DELETEﻳﺤﺬﻑ } ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ{}/ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ{
• }} ... {DIMﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ({
• } ... {CSVﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ CSVﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ CSVﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻛﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )Mat A
ﺇﻟﻰ Mat Zﻭ ) (MatAnsﺻﻔﺤﺔ (2-48
• } ... {M⇔Vﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﱢﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (2-60
uﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺗﻌﲔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻭﹼﻻ )ﺍﳊﺠﻢ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﹼ
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺣﺠﻢ( ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻔﲔ × ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﻤﻰ ﺏ Mat B
ﻇﻠﻞ .Mat B
c
)) 3(DIMﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ(.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ.
cw
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ.
dw
w
• ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ .0
• ﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ " "Memory ERRORﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ،ﻓﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ.
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ :B
3
6
2
5
1
4
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
bwcwdw
ewfwgw
)ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ
ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ،wﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ(.
2-43
• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ( .ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻸﺱ .ﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﻳﺔ.
uﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
uﳊﺬﻑ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ
.1ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(DELETE
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ.
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ
.1ﺣﲔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).2(DEL-ALL
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ.
kﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ.
.1ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺰ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ) ،ai(Nﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺰ ﺍﻟﻰ .Mat Nﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
).!-(Ans
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• }} ... {ROW-OPﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ{
• }{ROW
• } ... {ADD}/{INSERT}/{DELETEﺻﻒ }ﺣﺬﻑ{}/ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ{}/ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ{
• }{COLUMN
• } ... {ADD}/{INSERT}/{DELETEﻋﺎﻣﺪ}ﺣﺬﻑ{}/ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ{}/ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ{
• }} ... {EDITﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ{
ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .A
2-44
uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻒ
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ) 1(ROW-OPﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
• }} ... {SWAPﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ{
• }} ... { Rowﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ{
• }} ... { Row+ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ{
• }} ... {Row+ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ{
uﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻔﲔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
ﲡﺮﻱ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = A
2
1
4
3
6
5
)1(ROW-OP)1(SWAP
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ.
cwdww
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﺼﻒ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 2ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ 4
)1(ROW-OP)2( Row
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺮﻭﺑﺔ*.
ew
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ.
cww
* ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ).(k
2-45
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﻟﺼﻒ ﻭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 2ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ،4ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 3
)1(ROW-OP)3( Row+
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺮﻭﺑﺔ*.
ew
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻪ.
cw
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ.
dww
* ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻀﺮﻭﺑﺔ ).(k
uﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻔﲔ ﻣﻌﺎ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 2ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 3
)1(ROW-OP)4(Row+
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ.
cw
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ.
dww
uﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ
• }} ... {DELETEﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ{
• }} ... {INSERTﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ{
• }} ... {ADDﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ{
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 2
2(ROW)c
)1(DELETE
2-46
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﲔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ
2(ROW)c
)2(INSERT
uﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻒ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ
2(ROW)cc
)3(ADD
uﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ
• }} ... {DELETEﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ{
• }} ... {INSERTﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ{
• }} ... {ADDﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ{
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ 2
3(COLUMN)e
)1(DELETE
2-47
kﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ CVS
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﳌﻠﻒ CVSﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
) Mat Aﺍﻟﻰ ،Mat Zﻭ .(MatAnsﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) Mat Aﺍﻟﻰ ،Mat Zﻭ
(MatAnsﻛﻤﻠﻒ .CSV
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ.
• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ) "CSVﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(3-18
.2ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ،ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).4(CSV)1(LOAD
.4ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﺍﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ CSVﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻮﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺄ.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
) CSVﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ،2ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ (3ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ.
• ﻣﻠﻒ CVSﻣﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ 999ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ 999ﺻﻒ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ "."Invalid Data Size
uﳊﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ CSV
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ .CSV
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).4(CSV)2(SAVE • AS
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ.
.3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .CSV
• ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺬﺭ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ "."ROOT
ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
• ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﻓﻲ ﹼ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(OPEN
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(SAVE • AS
.5ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
2-48
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ،CSVﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ.ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ(2{3{4 → =2+3/4 :
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ :ﹼ'(
ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ3 → 1.732050808 :
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ' ﻭ :πﹼ uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ CSV
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 4(CSV)3(SETﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ
.CSVﺛﻢ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 3ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ "CSV
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(3-20
kﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Kﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 2(MAT/VCTﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
• }} ... {Matﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ({
• }} ... {Mat→Lstﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﺗﻌﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ({
• }} ... {Augmentﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ )ﻳﺮﺑﻂ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ({
• }} ... {Identityﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ )ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ({
• }} ... {Dimﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ(
• }(} ... {Fillﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ )ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ({
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) !c(Matﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ).K2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat
2-49
uﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Mat
ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
a22 ... a2n
a21
...
...
...
] ]= [ [a11, a12, ..., a1n] [a21, a22, ..., a2n] .... [am1, am2, ..., amn
a12 ... a1n
a11
am2 ... amn
am1
]ﺣﺮﻑ Aﺍﻟﻰ → Mat [Z
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ :A
1 3 5
2 4 6
!+( [ )!+( [ )b,d,f
!-( ] )!+( [ )c,e,g
)!-( ] )!-( ] )aK2(MAT/VCT
)1(Mat)av(A
w
• ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ mﻭ nﻫﻰ .999
• ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﻸﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ
][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Identity
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ 3 × 3ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ A
)K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)1(Identity
da6(g)1(Mat)av(A)w
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ /ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ
2-50
uﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Dim
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻻﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ A
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1
)K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)2(Dim
6(g)1(Mat)av(A)w
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Aﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﲔ ﻭ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ.
ﲟﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻻﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ListAns
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ } {Dimﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﲔ ﻭ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ B
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2
!*( )c,d!/( )a
)K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)2(Dim
6(g)1(Mat)al(B)w
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ " "Dimﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ.
uﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻭﳌﻞﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ
ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﳉﻤﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ،ﻭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
uﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻭﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Mat
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ.
]Mat X [m, n
= Xﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ ،Zﺃﻭ (Ans
= mﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ
= nﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ
2-51
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ 10ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 1ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = A
2
1
4
3
6
5
)baaK2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat
av(A)!+( )b,c
!-( )w
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ " "Vctﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2
ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ،2ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ 2ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺨﻤﺴﺔ
)K2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat
av(A)!+( )c,c
!-( )*fw
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ " "Vctﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ.
uﳌﻸ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭ ﳉﻤﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Fill(]/[Augment
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻞﺀ ﳌﻞﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ﳉﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1
ﳌﻞﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Aﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 3
) (K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)3(Fill
d,6(g)1(Mat)av(A))w
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ " "Fillﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2
ﳉﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ:
ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = A
1
2
ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = B
3
4
)K2(MAT/VCT)5(Augment
1(Mat)av(A),
1(Mat)al(B))w
• ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻠﺘﲔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺠﻤﻌﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺘﻮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ .ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺟﻤﻊ
ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﲢﻮﻳﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .ﻭ
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
Augment (Mat α, Mat β) → Mat γ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ،β ،αﻭ γﺍﻱ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ Aﺍﻟﻰ .Z
ﺍﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ .ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ " "Augmentﻟﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
2-52
uﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Mat→Lst
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Mat→Listﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
Mat→List (Mat X, m) → List n
= Xﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ (Z
= mﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ
= nﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ 2ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ :1
ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = A
2
1
4
3
6
5
)K2(MAT/VCT)2(Mat→Lst
)1(Mat)av(A),c
aK1(LIST)1(List)bw
1(List)bw
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Kﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 2(MAT/VCTﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
• }} ... {Matﺃﻣﺮ ) Matﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ({
• }} ... {Detﺃﻣﺮ ) Detﺍﻣﺮ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ({
• }} ... {Trnﺃﻣﺮ ) Trnﺃﻣﺮ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ({
• }} ... {Identityﺃﻣﺮ ) Identityﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ({
• }} ... {Refﺃﻣﺮ ) Refﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ({
• }} ... {Rrefﺃﻣﺮ ) Rrefﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ({
ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻗﺪ ﰎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
2-53
uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1
][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Mat]/[Identity
ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ )ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ + Aﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ :(B
ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ A
1
1
1
2
ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ B
3
2
1
2
K2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat)av(A)+
1(Mat)al(B)w
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2
ﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ) 1ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ × Aﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ (B
*)K2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat)av(A
1(Mat)al(B)w
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺟﻤﻌﻬﻢ ﻭﺿﺮﺑﻬﻢ .ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺡ
ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ.
• ﻟﻀﺮﺏ )ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ × 1ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،(2ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ 1ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
.2ﻭ ﺇﻻ ﹼ ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
uﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍﺕ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Det
ﻟﺘﺤﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = A
3
2
1
6
5
4
0
−1 −2
)K2(MAT/VCT)3(Det)1(Mat
av(A)w
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ )ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ( .ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ
ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﲢﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ.
• ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ 2 × 2ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ.
= a11a22 – a12a21
a11 a12
a21 a22
= ||A
• ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ 3 × 3ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ.
= a11a22a33 + a12a23a31 + a13a21a32 – a11a23a32 – a12a21a33 – a13a22a31
2-54
a11 a12 a13
a21 a22 a23
a31 a32 a33
= ||A
uﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Trn
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺻﻔﻮﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺻﻔﻮﻓﺎ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = A
2
1
4
3
6
5
)K2(MAT/VCT)4(Trn)1(Mat
av(A)w
ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ -1ﺻﻒ × -nﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ -nﺻﻒ × -1ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ،ﺃﻭ
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ .ﻓﻬﻮ
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ " "Trnﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﹰ
ﱢ
ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ -mﺻﻒ × -1ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ -1ﺻﻒ × -mﻋﻤﻮﺩ.
ﱢ
uﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ
][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Ref
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﺎﻭﺳﻲ ﻻﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = A
3
2
1
6
5
4
)K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)4(Ref
6(g)1(Mat)av(A)w
2-55
uﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﺘﺰﻝ
][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Rref
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﺘﺰﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﺘﺰﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = A
19
3
−1
2
−21
−5
1
1
0
3
4
0
)K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)5(Rref
6(g)1(Mat)av(A)w
• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﺘﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ.
uﺗﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
][x–1
ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = A
2
1
4
3
)K2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat
av(A)!)(x–1)w
• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ ) ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ( .ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ .ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ
ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ.
• ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ.
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻮﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
1 0
0 1
= A A–1 = A–1 A = E
ﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Aﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .A–1
d –b
–c a
a b
c d
=A
1
ad – bc
=A–1
ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ .ad – bc ≠ 0
2-56
uﺗﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
][x2
ﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = A
2
1
4
3
)K2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat)av(A
xw
uﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
]^[
ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ:
ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = A
2
1
4
3
)K2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat)av(A
Mdw
• ﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ .32766
uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ،ﻭﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
][OPTN]-[NUMERIC]-[Abs]/[Frac]/[Int]/[Intg
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = A
–2
1
4
–3
)K6(g)4(NUMERIC)1(Abs
K2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat)av(A)w
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ " "Absﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ.
2-57
uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ:
ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = D
1+i
–2 + 2i
–1 + i
1+i
)K6(g)4(NUMERIC)1(Abs
K2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat)as(D)w
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ.
i, Abs, Arg, Conjg, ReP, ImP
ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
• ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﺄ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻼﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ،ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻹﲤﺎﻣﻬﺎ.
• ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ±1ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﻡ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﻳﻘﻊ
ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ(.
MatAns → Mat α
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ αﻫﻮ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ Aﺍﻟﻰ .Zﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
2-58
.9ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ
ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ،Run-Matrixﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
).3('MAT/VCT)6(M⇔V
ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻠﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﲔ) m :ﺻﻔﻮﻑ( × ) 1ﻋﻤﻮﺩ( ﺃﻭ ) 1ﺻﻒ( × ) nﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ(.
ﻳﹸﻌﺮﱠﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﹴ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻜﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ mﻭ nﻫﻲ .999
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 26ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ )ﻣﻦ Vct Aﺇﻟﻰ (Vct Zﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ) (VctAnsﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
• ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ
• ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ
• ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ
• ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﻲ
• ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )ﺣﺠﻤﻪ(
• ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ
• ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ Xﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ )) (a+(Xﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ xﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ) (vﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ
" ."Vct Xﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ " "Vct Xﻭ" "Vct xﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
ﺣﻮﻝ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻪ )(VctAns
ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ .ﺗﻨﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ
ﺗﺨﺰﱢﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ
ﹰ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ.
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﲢﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ.
• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ.
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ).(MatAns
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﹰ
2-59
kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3('MAT/VCT)6(M⇔Vﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﱢﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﱢﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ.
... m × nﻣﺘﺠﻪ ) mﺻﻒ( × ) nﻋﻤﻮﺩ(
... Noneﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ
• } ... {DEL-ALL}/{DELETEﺣﺬﻑ }ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ{}/ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ{
• } ... {DIMﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ) mﺻﻔﻮﻑ × 1ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ 1ﺻﻒ × nﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ(
• } ... {M⇔Vﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﱢﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (2-42
ﺗﺘﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ )ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ( ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ .ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (2-42ﻭ"ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(2-44ﻟﻜﻦ ﲡﺪﺭ
ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
• ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ) 1(ROW-OPﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻻﺕ.
ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ mﺻﻔﻮﻑ × 1ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ 1ﺻﻒ × nﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ.
• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﺗﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﹰ
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ
][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ.
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Kﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(MAT/VCT)6(g)6(gﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ.
• }} ... {Vctﺍﻷﻣﺮ ) Vctﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ({
• }(} ... {DotPﺍﻷﻣﺮ ) DotPﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ({
• }(} ... {CrossPﺍﻷﻣﺮ ) CrossPﺃﻣﺮ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﻲ({
• }(} ... {Angleﺍﻷﻣﺮ ) Angleﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ({
• }(} ... {UnitVﺍﻷﻣﺮ ) UnitVﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ({
• }(} ... {Normﺍﻷﻣﺮ ) Normﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )ﺣﺠﻤﻪ(({
ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺘﻬﺠﲔ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﻲ ﻫﻲ 1 × 2ﺃﻭ 1 × 3ﺃﻭ 2 × 1ﺃﻭ .3 × 1
ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ .ﻳﺠﺐ ﹰ
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ؛ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ
ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ.
2-60
• ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻪ ﻫﻲ ±1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ.
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻹﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ.
VctAns → Vct α
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﺗﺸﻴﺮ αﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ Aﺇﻟﻰ .Zﻭﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ
ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ.
• ﺛﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻭﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ؛ ﻟﺬﺍ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
Vct α → Mat β
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﺗﺸﻴﺮ αﻭ βﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ Aﺇﻟﻰ .Z
uﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ
][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Vct
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ .Vct
] Aﺇﻟﻰ [a11 a12 ... a1n] → Vct [Z
...
] Aﺇﻟﻰ → Vct [Z
a11
a21
am1
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ [ 1 2 3 ] :Vct A
!+( [ )!+( [ )b,c,d
!-( ] )!-( ] )a
)K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)6(g)1(Vct
av(A)w
• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻟﻜﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ mﻭ nﻫﻲ .999
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﻸﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ.
ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻳﹸﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﱠﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ.
2-61
uﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﺮﺑﻬﺎ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1
][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Vct
ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ):(Vct A + Vct B
] Vct B = [ 3 4
] Vct A = [ 1 2
)K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)6(g)1(Vct
av(A)+1(Vct)al(B)w
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2
ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ):(Vct A × Vct B
3
4
= Vct B
] Vct A = [ 1 2
)K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)6(g)1(Vct
av(A)*1(Vct)al(B)w
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 3
ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ):(Mat A × Vct B
1
2
= Vct B
2
1
1
2
= Mat A
)K2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat
)av(A)*6(g)6(g
1(Vct)al(B)w
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﺣﻤﻬﺎ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻬﻤﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ.
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ) Vct A (1 × nﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ) ،Vct B (m × 1ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ nﻭ.m
uﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[DotP
ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ
] Vct B = [ 3 4
] Vct A = [ 1 2
)K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)6(g
2(DotP( )1(Vct)av(A),
1(Vct)al(B))w
2-62
uﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﻲ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[CrossP
ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ
] Vct B = [ 3 4
] Vct A = [ 1 2
)K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)6(g
3(CrossP( )1(Vct)av(A),
1(Vct)al(B))w
uﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Angle
ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ
] Vct B = [ 3 4
] Vct A = [ 1 2
)K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)6(g
4(Angle( )1(Vct)av(A),
1(Vct)al(B))w
uﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[UnitV
ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ
] Vct A = [ 5 5
)K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)6(g
5(UnitV( )1(Vct)av(A))w
uﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )ﺣﺠﻤﻪ(
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Norm
ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )ﺣﺠﻤﻪ(
] Vct A = [ 1 3
)K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)6(g)6(g
)1(Norm( )6(g)6(g)6(g
1(Vct)av(A))w
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ " "Normﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
2-63
.10ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻞ 11ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ
ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ "ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ" ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﺗﻴﺮﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﺗﻴﺮﻱ.
ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮ ﺽ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮ ﺽ
LENGTH
ﻃﻮﻝ
TMPR
ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ
PRESSURE
ﺿﻐﻂ
AREA
ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ
VELOCITY
ﺳﺮﻋﺔ
ENERGY
ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ /ﻋﻤﻞ
VOLUME
ﺣﺠﻢ
MASS
ﻛﺘﻠﺔ
POWER
ﻗﺪﺭﺓ
TIME
ﻭﻗﺖ
FORCE
ﻗﻮﺓ /ﻭﺯﻥ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ.
• ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ (AREAﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ) .ﻣﺜﻞ (TIMEﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﻲ .Conversion ERROR
• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (2-66ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺌﺔ.
2-64
kﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
][OPTN]-[CONVERT
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ
ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ.
}ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ } ' {2ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ }{1ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﲢﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ{
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ }ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ {1ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻭ }ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ {2ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ.
• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻣﺮ ' ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺑﻂ ﺃﻣﺮﻱ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ )'( 1ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ
ﻣﻨﻬﺎ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ،ﻓﺘﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺎﺩ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ)ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .(ListAns
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ .ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1
ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ 50ﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﻮﺻﺔ
)AfaK6(g)1(CONVERT
)'(2(LENGTH)f(cm)1
2(LENGTH)ec(in)w
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2
ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ } m2 {175,162ﺍﻟﻰ ﻫﻜﺘﺎﺭ
A!*({)bhf,bgc
)}(!/
)K6(g)1(CONVERT)3(AREA
c(m2)1(')3(AREA)d(ha)w
2-65
kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﻓﺌﺎﺕ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮ ﺽ
ﻓﺌﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮ ﺽ
fm
ﻓﻴﺮﻣﻲ
cm3
ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ
Å
ﺍﳒﺴﺘﺮﻭﻡ
mL
ﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ ﻟﺘﺮ
μm
ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻣﺘﺮ
L
ﻟﺘﺮ
cm
ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ
in3
ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﻜﻌﺒﺔ
m
ﻣﺘﺮ
ft3
ﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ
km
ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻣﺘﺮ
AU
ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻜﻴﺔ
ﺣﺠﻢ
mm
ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ
m3
ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ
)fl_oz(UK
ﺍﻭﻧﺲ
)fl_oz(US
ﺍﻻﻭﻧﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ
ﻃﻮﻝ
l.y.
ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ
)gal(US
ﻏﺎﻟﻮﻥ
pc
ﻓﺮﺳﺦ
)gal(UK
ﻏﺎﻟﻮﻥ ﻟﻨﺪﻧﻲ
Mil
1/1000ﺑﻮﺻﺔ
pt
ﺑﺎﻳﺖ
in
ﺑﻮﺻﺔ
qt
ﻛﻤﻴﺔ
ft
ﻗﺪﻡ
tsp
ﻣﻠﻌﻘﺔ ﺷﺎﻱ
yd
ﻳﺎﺭﺩﺓ
tbsp
ﻣﻠﻌﻘﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﺪﺓ
fath
ﻗﺎﻣﺔ
cup
ﻛﺄﺱ
rd
ﺫﺭﺍﻉ
ns
ﻧﺎﻧﻮﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ
mile
ﻣﻴﻞ
μs
ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﻣﻴﻞ ﺑﺤﺮﻱ
ms
ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ
n mile
ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ
m2
ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ
ha
ﻫﻜﺘﺎﺭ
km2
ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ
day
in2
ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ
week
ft2
ﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ
ﺯﻣﻦ
cm2
ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ
s
ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ
min
ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ
h
ﺳﺎﻋﺔ
yr
ﻳﻮﻡ
ﺍﺳﺒﻮﻉ
ﺳﻨﺔ
yd2
ﻳﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ
s-yr
ﺳﻨﺔ ﳒﻤﻴﺔ
acre
ﻓﺪﺍﻥ
t-yr
ﺳﻨﺔ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻳﺔ
mile2
ﻣﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ
2-66
ﻓﺌﺎﺕ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮ ﺽ
ﻓﺌﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮ ﺽ
ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ
°C
ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻴﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ
Pa
ﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ
K
ﻛﻠﻔﻦ
kPa
ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ
°F
ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻲ
mmH2O
ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺎﺋﻲ
°R
ﺭﺍﻧﻜﲔ
mmHg
ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺯﺋﺒﻘﻲ
m/s
ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ
km/h
ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ
ﺳﺮﻋﺔ
inH2O
ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﻴﺔ
knot
ﻋﻘﺪﺓ
inHg
ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺯﺋﺒﻘﻴﺔ
ft/s
ﻗﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ
lbf/in2
ﺑﺎﻭﻧﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ
mile/h
ﻣﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ
bar
u
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﺘﻠﺔ ﺫﺭﻳﺔ
kgf/cm2
mg
ﺿﻐﻂ
atm
ﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﻮﻱ
ﻣﻴﻠﻴﺠﺮﺍﻡ
g
ﺟﺮﺍﻡ
eV
J
ﻗﻀﻴﺐ
ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ
ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ
ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ
ﺟﻮﻝ
ﺣﺠﻢ
mton
ﻃﻦ ﻣﺘﺮﻱ
cal15
ﻛﺎﻟﻮﺭﻱ) 15ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻴﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ(
oz
ﺍﻭﻧﺲ ﺍﻓﻮﺍﺭﺩﻳﺒﻮﺍ
calIT
ﻛﺎﻟﻮﺭﻱIT
lb
ﺑﺎﻭﻧﺪ ﻛﺘﻠﺔ
kcalth
ﻛﻴﻠﻮ
kcal15
ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻛﺎﻟﻮﺭﻱ ) 15ﺩﺭﺟﺔ
ﺳﻴﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ(
slug
ﻟﻄﻤﺔ
ﻃﺎﻗﺔ /ﻋﻤﻞ
kg
ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺟﺮﺍﻡ
calth
ﻛﺎﻟﻮﺭﻱth
ﻛﺎﻟﻮﺭﻱth
ﻗﻮﺓ/ﻭﺯﻥ
)ton(short
ﻃﻦ ﺍﻣﻴﺮﻳﻜﻲ )(2000Ibm
)ton(long
ﻃﻦ ﺍﳒﻠﻴﺰﻱ )(2240Ibm
l-atm
N
ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ
kW•h
ﻛﻠﻮ ﻭﺍﻁ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ
lbf
ﺑﺎﻭﻧﺪ ﻗﻮﺓ
ft•lbf
ﻗﺪﻡ-ﺑﺎﻭﻧﺪ
tonf
ﻃﻦ ﻗﻮﺓ
Btu
ﻭﺣﺪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ
dyne
ﺩﺍﻳﻦ
erg
ﺃﺭﻍ
kgf
ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺓ
kcalIT
ﻛﻴﻠﻮ
ﻟﻴﺘﺮ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﻮﻱ
kgf•m
W
calth/s
ﻗﻮﺓ
hp
ft•lbf/s
Btu/min
ﻛﺎﻟﻮﺭﻱIT
ﻣﺘﺮ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺟﺮﺍﻡ
ﻭﺍﺕ
ﻛﺎﻟﻮﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﻗﻮﺓ ﺣﺼﺎﻥ
ﻗﺪﻡ-ﺑﺎﻭﻧﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ
ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ NIST :ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ (2008) 811
2-67
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ 26ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ،ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ 6ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﲤﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻋﻤﻮﺩ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ
ﺻﻒ
List 26
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
ﺧﻠﻴﺔ
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
List 5
List 4
List 3
List 2
4
0
0
2
0
3
9
0
3.5
6
2.1
4.4
3
6.8
2
8.7
107
75
122
87
298
48
338
49
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ
List 1
56
37
21
69
40
48
93
30
•
•
•
•
SUB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
•
•
•
•
.1ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Statisticsﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ،ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ" ﺃﻭﻻ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ.
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ cﻻ ﻳﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ
ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ 1ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .1
.1ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
dw
• ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
3-1
3
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 4ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ 2 + 3ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ewc+dw
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ 999ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
uﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) { (*! ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ,
ﺑﲔ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) } ( !/ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
) } (!*( { )g,h,i!/
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻚ.
w
• ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ،ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ
ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ.
ﺻﺤﻴﺢ{34, 53, 78} :
ﺧﻄﺄ{34, 53, 78,} :
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ .ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ
ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،2ﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .3
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ
ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
3-2
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Kﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ.
K1(LIST)1(List)b+
K1(LIST)1(List)cw
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) !b(Listﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ).K1(LIST)1(List
kﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
uﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ .ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ w
ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
uﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(g)2(EDIT
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(g)3(DELETEﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ.
• ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ
ﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺎﻭﺭﺓ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ.
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻬﺎ.
.2ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(g)4(DEL-ALLﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻴﺊ.
3-3
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(g)5(INSERTﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ،ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ،0ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ
ﻟﻼﺳﻔﻞ.
• ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ
ﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺎﻭﺭﺓ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ.
kﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﲔ "ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ" ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 26ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ.
uﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
.1ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﻇﻠﻞ " "Sub Nameﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .1(On)J
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ.
.3ﺍﻃﺒﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ !aﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .ALPHA-LOCK
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝYEAR :
-(Y)c(E)v(A)g(R)w
3-4
• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix
!m(SET UP)2(Line)J
!b(List) n!+( [ )a!-( ] )w
) = nﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26
• ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ،ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Offﻟـ " "Sub Nameﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ.
kﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ.
uﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ
ﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎ.
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ .ﻟﻦ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) !f(FORMATﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
.w
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
3-5
uﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎ.
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ .ﻟﻦ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ .ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) !f(FORMATﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
.w
• ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ،ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻱ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ
ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ )ﺃﺳﻮﺩ( .ﻻﺣﻆ ،ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻻ ﻳﻐﹼﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ.
kﻓﺮﺯ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍ ﹼﻱ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﹼ
uﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(g)1(TOOL)1(SORTASC
.2ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ " "How Many Lists?:ﻟﻴﺴﺄﻝ ﻛﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﺮﺯﻫﺎ .ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﺪﺧﻞ 1ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﻓﺮﺯ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ.
bw
.3ﻭ ﺭﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ " ،"Select List List No:ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﺮﺯﻫﺎ.
bw
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ .ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
) 2(SORTDESﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ).1(SORTASC
3-6
uﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﺯ ﻣﻌﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺧﻼﻳﺎﻫﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺯ
ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ،ﺣﲔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﹼ
ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(g)1(TOOL)1(SORTASC
.2ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ " "How Many Lists?:ﻟﻴﺴﺄﻝ ﻛﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﻓﺮﺯﻫﺎ .ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﻔﺮﺯ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ.
ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ .ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﻧﺪﺧﻞ .2
cw
.3ﻭ ﺭﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ " ،"Select Base List List No:ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﻓﺮﺯﻫﺎ .ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ.
ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .1
bw
.4ﻭ ﺭﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ " ،"Select Second List List No:ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺭﺑﻄﻬﺎ .ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ .ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .2
cw
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ .ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
) 2(SORTDESﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ).1(SORTASC
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 6ﻛﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﺯ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﺮﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ.
ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﺯ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ )ﺻﻔﻮﻑ(.
.2ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﲤﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ .ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲡﻌﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ،Run-Matrix ،ﻭ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ،
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
3-7
kﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Kﺛﻢ ) 1(LISTﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• {List}/{Lst→Mat}/{Dim}/{Fill(}/{Seq}/{Min}/{Max}/{Mean}/{Med}/{Augment}/{Sum}/{Prod}/
}{Cuml}/{%}/{ΔList
ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
uﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Lst→Mat
> ...ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ > ,1(List) <1 - 26ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)2(Lst→Mat)1(List) <1 - 26
> )wﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ,1(List) <1-26
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ) 1(Listﻓﻲ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﺘﻮ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝList → Mat (1, 2)w :
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (2, 3, 6, 5, 4) 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ،1ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2
) (11, 12, 13, 14, 15ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ 2ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
)AK1(LIST)2(Lst→Mat
1(List)b,1(List)c)w
uﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Dim
> wﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)3(Dim)1(List) <1 - 26
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (36, 16, 58, 46, 56) 1
)AK1(LIST)3(Dim
1(List)bw
3-8
uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Dim
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻛﺸﻒ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
)(n = 1 - 999
> wﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ n> aK1(LIST)3(Dim)1(List) <1 - 26ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﺕ<
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ (0ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1
)AfaK1(LIST)3(Dim
1(List)bw
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻧﺸﺌﺖ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇ ﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ
.Statistics
uﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
]([OPTN]-[LIST]-[Fill
> )wﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ > ,1(List) <1 - 26ﻗﻴﻤﺔ< ) (K1(LIST)4(Fill
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ 3
) (AK1(LIST)4(Fill
d,1(List)b)w
ﻭﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .1
uﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Seq
>ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ< > ,ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ< > ,ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ< > ,ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ< )K1(LIST)5(Seq
> )wﺓﺩﺎﻳﺯ< ,
• ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ListAns
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،112 ،62 ،12ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ f(x) = X2 .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ 11ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ .5
AK1(LIST)5(Seq)vx,
v,b,bb,f)w
ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟـ 12ﺍﻭ 13ﺍﻭ 14ﺍﻭ 15ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻬﻢ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ .ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ).(16
3-9
uﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻼﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Min
> )wﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)1(Min)6(g)6(g)1(List) <1 - 26
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (36, 16, 58, 46, 56) 1
)AK1(LIST)6(g)1(Min
6(g)6(g)1(List)b)w
uﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Max
)> ,1(Listﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)2(Max)6(g)6(g)1(List) <1 - 26
> )wﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <1 - 26
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﺘﻮ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
• ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ListAns
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (75, 16, 98, 46, 56) 1ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (35, 59, 58, 72, 67) 2
ﲢﺘﻮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
)K1(LIST)6(g)2(Max
6(g)6(g)1(List)b,
1(List)c)w
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Mean
> )wﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)3(Mean)6(g)6(g)1(List) <1 - 26
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (36, 16, 58, 46, 56) 1
)AK1(LIST)6(g)3(Mean
6(g)6(g)1(List)b)w
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Med
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ :ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺣﺪﺍﺙ( ﻛﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ .ﺗﺮﺩﺩ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ 1ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ 1ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺦ.
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
)> ,1(Listﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) 1 - 26ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(< )K1(LIST)6(g)4(Med)6(g)6(g)1(List
> )wﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) 1 - 26ﺗﺮﺩﺩ(<
3-10
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (36, 16, 58, 46, 56) 1ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﺭ
ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (75, 89, 98, 72, 67) 2
)AK1(LIST)6(g)4(Med
6(g)6(g)1(List)b,
1(List)c)w
uﳉﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Augment
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ListAns
)> ,1(Listﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)5(Augment)6(g)6(g)1(List) <1 - 26
> )wﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <1 - 26
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳉﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (–3, –2) 1ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (1, 9, 10) 2
)AK1(LIST)6(g)5(Augment
6(g)6(g)1(List)b,
1(List)c)w
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Sum
> wﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)6(g)1(Sum)6(g)1(List) <1 - 26
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (36, 16, 58, 46, 56) 1
)AK1(LIST)6(g)6(g)1(Sum
6(g)1(List)bw
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﰋ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Prod
> wﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)6(g)2(Prod)6(g)1(List) <1 - 26
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﰋ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (2, 3, 6, 5, 4) 1
)AK1(LIST)6(g)6(g)2(Prod
6(g)1(List)bw
3-11
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Cuml
> wﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)6(g)3(Cuml)6(g)1(List) <1 - 26
• ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ListAns
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1
)(2, 3, 6, 5, 4
)AK1(LIST)6(g)6(g)3(Cuml
6(g)1(List)bw
=1 2+3
=2 2+3+6
=3 2+3+6+5
=4 2+3+6+5+4
4
3
1 2
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[%
> wﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)6(g)4(%)6(g)1(List) <1 - 26
• ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ListAns
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1
)(2, 3, 6, 5, 4
)AK1(LIST)6(g)6(g)4(%
6(g)1(List)bw
5
4
3
3-12
2
1
= 1 2/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100
= 2 3/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100
= 3 6/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100
= 4 5/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100
= 5 4/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[ΔList
> wﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)6(g)5(ΔList) <1 - 26
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ListAns
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (1, 3, 8, 5, 4) 1
)AK1(LIST)6(g)6(g)5(ΔList
bw
=13–1
=28–3
=35–8
=44–5
4
1 2 3
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ListAnsﻣﺜﻼ ،ﲢﺪﻳﺪ " "ΔList 1 → List 2ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ΔList 1
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .2
• ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ΔListﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ.
• ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ΔListﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
.3ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ.
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ListAns
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ListAns
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
=
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ
+
−
×
÷
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ
kﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ
• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ .ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ
ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ )ﻭﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻟﻬﻤﺎ "ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ" ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ(.
• ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻤﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻴﺘﲔ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ.
3-13
kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
• ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
.1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
)AK1(LIST)1(List
• ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ "."List
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ( 26ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻩ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
.1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
)AK1(LIST)1(List
• ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ "."List
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ )” ”(.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ”QTY” :
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ } ،{,ﻭ .,
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ56, 82, 64 :
!*( { )fg,ic,
) } (ge!/
3-14
uﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ aﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (41, 65, 22) 3ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1
K1(LIST)1(List)da1(List)bw
ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ 1(LIST)1(List)dﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ
) } (.!*( { )eb,gf,cc!/
uﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺑﲔ
ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﲔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ sineﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ 3ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2
sK1(LIST)1(List)c!+( [ )d!-( ] )w
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ
ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 25ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ 2ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 3
cfaK1(LIST)1(List)d!+( [ )c!-( ] )w
kﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1
K1(LIST)1(List)bw
• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ListAnsﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ListAnsﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
uﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ListAnsﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ListAnsﺏ 36
K1(LIST)1(List)!-(Ans)*dgw
• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ) K1(LIST)1(List)!-(Ansﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ListAns
• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ListAnsﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
3-15
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻙ .Y1 = List 1Xﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1
ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ،3 ،2 ،1ﻓﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.Y= 3X ،Y=2X ،Y=X :
ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Tableﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻗﻢ ﺍﻭﻻ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Tableﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﻐﺔ ) ،(Y1 = x2 –1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ
ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ Statistics
.1ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ،Tableﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ .Y1 = x2 –1
.2ﺃﻧﺸﺄ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ .Y1
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).K1(LISTMEM
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .bw
.6ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ Y1ﰎ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .1
3-16
kﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻛﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ .ListAns
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (41, 65, 22) 3ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ (List 3) sin
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ.
sK1(LIST)1(List)dw
.4ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 26ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (26ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﻣﻠﻒ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ .(6
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ .ListAns
uﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) !m(SET UPﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ .Statistics
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ "."List File
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(FILEﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ 3
1(FILE)d
w
ﰎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ 3ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ(.
3-17
.5ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ CSV
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ CSVﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ
ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ .CSVﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،CSVﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(g)6(g)1(CSVﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSV
ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(2-42ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(9-4ﺃﻭ
ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ .ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ CSVﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ.
• ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ) ( ,ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻮﻃﺔ ) ; ( ﻛﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻪ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ) ( .ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ) ( ,
ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻪ .ﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻛﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻪ.
• ﻭ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ CRLF, LF, CRﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﳋﻂ.
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ CSVﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ 1ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ )ﺍﻭ ﺧﻂ 1ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ 1
ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ( ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ) " ( ﺍﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ) ' ( ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﻂ 1ﻣﻦ
ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .CSVﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻂ .2
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ 13ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ".
CSV kﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ
uﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻩ.
• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ "CSVﺍﳌﺒﲔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
.2ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(g)6(g)1(CSVﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
.CSV
.3ﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ.
ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ:
ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻒ ﺧﺎﺹ:
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
).1(LOAD)1(LIST
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(LOAD)2(FILE
3-18
.4ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ
ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﺘﺮﺩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ) 1(LOAD)1(LISTﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ،3ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ
ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .CSV
ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﳌﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
List 5
List 4
List 3
List 2
List 1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSV
20
20
20
30
30
30
40
40
40
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ
List 5
List 4
List 3
List 2
List 1
1
20
20
20
1
2
30
30
30
2
3
40
40
40
3
4
4
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ CSVﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺄ.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
) CSVﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ،2ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ (3ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ.
• ﻣﻠﻒ CVSﻣﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ 26ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ 999ﺻﻒ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ "."Invalid Data Size
3-19
uﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ CSVﻭﺍﺣﺪ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(g)6(g)1(CSVﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
.CSV
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).2(SAVE • AS
• ﻳﹸﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ.
.3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .CSV
• ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ "."ROOT
• ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(OPEN
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(SAVE • AS
.5ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﳌﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .CSV
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ،CSVﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ.ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ(2{3{4 → =2+3/4 :
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ :ﹼ'(
ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ3 → 1.732050808 :
-ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ 'ﻭ :πﹼ
kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ CSV
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ CSVﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ
ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ) ( ,ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻮﻃﺔ ) ; (
ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺪﺩ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ) ( .ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ) ( ,ﻛﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ CSV
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(g)6(g)1(CSVﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
.CSV
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).3(SET
• ﻳﹸﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ .CSV
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "CSV Separatorﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1( ,ﺍﻭ
) ; (.2
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "CSV Decimal Symbolﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1( .
ﺍﻭ ) .2( ,
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ) 1( ,ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ،3ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺪﺩ ) 2( ,ﻫﻨﺎ.
.5ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
3-20
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Equation
• }} ... {SIMULﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ 2ﺇﻟﻰ 6ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ{
• }} ... {POLYﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ 2ﺇﻟﻰ {6
• }} ... {SOLVERﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ{
.1ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ.
• ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﲔ:
a1x + b1y = c1
a2x + b2y = c2
• ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ:
a1x + b1y + c1z = d1
a2x + b2y + c2z = d2
…
a3x + b3y + c3z = d3
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Equation
.2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) SIMULﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ( ،ﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻬﻮﻻﺕ )ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ(.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ 2ﺇﻟﻰ 6ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ.
.3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻼﺩﺧﺎﻝ .ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ،ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ:
2 = n) a1 → b1 → c1 → … an → bn → cnﺍﻟﻰ (6
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﻓﻲ ﺍﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ w
ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ .ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ .ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ.
• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ،wﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ .ﺛﻢ
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ.
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(CLEARﺗﻌﺎﺩ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ.
.4ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ.
4-1
4
ﳊﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻝ xﻭ yﻭ z
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
4x +
y – 2z = – 1
x + 6y + 3z = 1
– 5x + 4y + z = – 7
m Equation 1
1(SIMUL) 2
)2(3
ewbw-cw-bw 3
bwgwdwbw
-fwewbw-hw
1(SOLVE) 4
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 15ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ،ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 10ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ
ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻸﺱ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ(،
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺣﻞ ) (z ،y ،xﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ.
d1
d2
d3
–1
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
a3 b3 c3
=
x
y
z
ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ،ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ .ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ،ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺪ
ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﹰ ﺟﺪﺍ ﹰ ﳊﻠﻬﺎ.
• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "No Solutionﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻯ ﺣﻞ .ﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "Ma ERRORﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻞ.
• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "Infinitely Many Solutionsﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺑﻼ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ.
• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ،1(REPEATﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ.
4-2
.2ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳊﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ.
• ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔax2 + bx + c = 0 (a 0) :
• ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﻌﻴﺒﻴﺔax3 + bx2 + cx + d = 0 (a 0) :
…
• ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺔax4 + bx3 + cx2 + dx + e = 0 (a 0) :
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Equation
.2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) POLYﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ( ،ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ 2ﺇﻟﻰ .6
.3ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻼﺩﺧﺎﻝ .ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ،ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ:
…→a→b→c
ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ
ﹼ
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﻓﻲ ﺍﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
wﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ .ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ .ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ.
• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ،wﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ.
ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ.
• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(CLEARﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ.
.4ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺒﺔ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ = (Rad
x3 – 2x2 – x + 2 = 0
m Equation 1
2(POLY) 2
)2(3
bw-cw-bwcw 3
1(SOLVE) 4
ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ(x3 + 3x2 + 3x + 1 = 0 :
4-3
ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ )ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ(x3 + 2x2 + 3x + 2 = 0 :
ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ) Real :ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-35
ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐa + bi :
ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐr∠θ :
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 15ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ،ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 10ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ
ﻟﻸﺱ.
• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﹰ ﻟﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
• ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﲟﻘﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻞ.
• ﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ.
• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ،1(REPEATﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ.
.3ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ Solve Calculationﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ
ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ.
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ (a+(X)) Xﺍﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ (v) xﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ .Xﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ " "Xﻭ " "xﺍﻟﻰ
ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ.
.2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ) SOLVERﺍﳊﻞ( ،ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ،ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻫﻮ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ،ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺻﻔﺮ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ.
• ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ.
4-4
.3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ.
• ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ.
.4ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﻠﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻞ.
ﺗﺸﻴﺮ " "Rgtﻭ " "Lftﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺒﲔ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﻞ*.
1
* 1ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻢ Rgtﻭ Lftﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ،ﻷﻥ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ
ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ .ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ Lftﻭ Rgtﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ،ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﰎ ﺇﻟﻘﺎﺀ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ Vﻭﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ Tﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ .H
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳊﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ Vﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ) H = 14ﻣﺘﺮ() T = 2 ،ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻭ
ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ).G = 9.8 (m/s2
H = VT – 1/2 GT2
m Equation 1
3(SOLVER) 2
)af(H)!.(=)ac(V)a/(T(b/c)a'(G)a/(T)xw
bew(H = 14) 3
)aw(V = 0
)cw(T = 2
)j.iw(G = 9.8
4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ fffﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ،V = 0ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
).6(SOLVE
• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "Retryﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺎ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ.
• ﺳﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻼ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ POLYﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ
)ﻣﺜﻞ .(ax2 + bx + c = 0
4-5
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ.
• … Graphﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ
• … Run-Matrixﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ 5-25ﺍﻟﻰ (5-29
• … Tableﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ 5-30ﺇﻟﻰ (5-35
• … Dyna Graphﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ 5-40ﺍﻟﻰ (5-43
• … Recursionﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ 5-43ﺍﻟﻰ (5-48
• … Conic Graphsﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 5-48ﻭ (5-49
.1ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ
5
kﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ( ﻛﺎﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ
ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
)ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﻥ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﻪ.
→
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
5-1
ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﻪ.
→
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
•
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ
ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-15
kﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ )(1
ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .Graph
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ.
ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ V-Windowﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .5-5
.3ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ y = 3x2
m Graph 1
dvxw 2
)6(DRAW) 3ﺃﻭ (w
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Aﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ) 2ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ( .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ،
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).!6(G⇔T
5-2
kﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ )(2
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ 20ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .Graph
.2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Graphﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ
)) ،(Y=f(xﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ )) ،(X=f(yﻭ
ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ.
)= ... 3(TYPE)1(Yﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ )ﻧﻮﻉ )(Y=f(x
)= ................... 2(rﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ
) ................... 3(Paramﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﻴﺔ
)= ................... 4(Xﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ )ﻧﻮﻉ )(X=f(y
)5(CONVERT
)= 1('Yﺇﻟﻰ )≤5('Y
)= 6(g)1('Xﺇﻟﻰ )≤ ......................... 6(g)5('Xﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
)> 6(g)1(Yﺇﻟﻰ )≤ ................... 6(g)4(Yﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ Yﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ
)> 6(g)6(g)1(Xﺇﻟﻰ )≤ ................... 6(g)6(g)4(Xﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ Xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﺛﻢ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-13
.3ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 4(TOOL)1(STYLEﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
)
( ... 1ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ) ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺃﻭﻟﻲ(
)
( … 2ﺳﻤﻴﻚ ) ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ(
)
( … 3ﻣﺘﻜﺴﺮ ) ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ﻣﺘﻜﺴﺮ(
)
( … 4ﻧﻘﻄﻲ )ﻣﻨﻘﻂ(
)
( … 5ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ) ﺛﻠﺚ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ(
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Ineq Typeﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﲔ
ﺍﳌﻠﻴﺌﲔ.
) .. 1(Intsectﳝﻸ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻔﺎﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ
ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ.
5-3
) ... 2(Unionﳝﻸ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻔﺎﺀ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ .ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ.
• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !f(FORMATﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ
ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﻂ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﻪ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-15
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1
ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ.
Y1 = 2x2 – 3, r2 = 3sin2θ
m Graph 1
3(TYPE)1(Y=)cvx-dw 2
3(TYPE)2(r=)dscvw
6(DRAW) 3
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 2ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ = (Deg
Y1=sin xr
m Graph 1
svK6(g)5(ANGLE)2(r)w 2
6(DRAW) 3
5-4
.2ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﲟﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
kﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ) V-Windowﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ xﻭ ،yﻭﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ.ﻭ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻤﻼﺕ
ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ.
uﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ V-Window
.1ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ,ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .Graph
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !3(V-WINﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .V-Window
ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ
… Xmin/Xmaxﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ /ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﻮﺭx-
… Xscaleﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭx-
… Xdotﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﶈﻮﺭx-
… Ymin/Ymaxﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ /ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﻮﺭy-
… Yscaleﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭy-
ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ
... Tθ min/Tθ maxﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ /ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ،Tﻗﻴﻢ θ
... Tθ ptchﺧﻄﻮﺓ θ ،T
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ،ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ.
• }} … {STANDRD}/{TRIG}/{INITIALﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ{}/ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ{/
}ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺣﺪﺓ{ ﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
• }{V-MEM
• }} … {RECALL}/{STOREﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ{}/ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ{ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
• }{SQUARE
• }} … {X-BASE}/{Y-BASEﺃﺻﻠﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ y-ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ}/{x-ﺃﺻﻠﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-ﻭﻗﻢ
ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ {y-ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-ﻭﺍﶈﻮﺭ y-ﻛﻌﻼﻗﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 1
• } … {BGV-WINﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ.
ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ.
.4ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﺃﻭ ) !J(QUITﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
.V-Window
• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .V-Window
5-5
uﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ V-Window
• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻝ Tθ ptchﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ.
• ﺍﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ )ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ،ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،ﺇﻟﺦ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ Tθ maxﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ،Tθ minﺗﺼﺒﺢ Tθ ptchﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ )ﻣﺜﻞ (2πﻛﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .V-Window
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ.
• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻟﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ.
• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ Xminﺃﻭ Xmaxﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ Xdotﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ Xdotﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ Xmaxﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ )= (rﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ
ﺑﻬﺎ V-Windowﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ Tθ ptchﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
Tθ minﻭ .Tθ maxﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺳﺒﺒﺎ ﻷﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ Tθ ptchﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ Tθ minﻭ .Tθ maxﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ.
• ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .V-Window
–9.999999999E 97ﺇﻟﻰ 9.999999999E 97
V-Window kﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ
ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ.
uﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ V-Window
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .Graph
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !3(V-WINﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .V-Window
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 4(V-MEM)1(STOREﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ.
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ V-Windowﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ bwﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ).V-Window Memory 1 (V-Win1
5-6
uﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !3(V-WINﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.V-Window .
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 4(V-MEM)2(RECALLﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ.
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ V-Windowﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
.wﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ bwﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ).V-Window Memory 1 (V-Win1
kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ،ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ( ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .Graph
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.V-Window .
.3ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ .ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
) ] ( !-ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ,ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ) [ ( ,!+ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
.4ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻝ y = x2 + 3x – 2ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ .– 2 < x < 4
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ V-Windowﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
Xscale = 1
Xmax = 5,
Xmin = –3,
Yscale = 5
Ymax = 30,
Ymin = –10,
m Graph 1
!3(V-WIN)-dwfwbwc 2
-bawdawfwJ
3(TYPE)1(Y=)vx+dv-c, 3
!+( [ )-c,e!-( ] )w
6(DRAW) 4
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﻴﺔ ،ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ.
5-7
kﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
.1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.2ﲢﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ.
) ... !2(ZOOM)1(BOXﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﲤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ.
) .......................... 2(FACTORﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ
ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ xﻭﺍﶈﻮﺭ yﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ.
) .......................... 3(IN)/4(OUTﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ
ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ،ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ
ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ.
) .......................... 5(AUTOﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ y-ﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﳝﻸ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ.y-
) .......................... 6(g)1(ORIGINALﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ
ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺣﺠﻤﻪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ.
) .......................... 6(g)2(SQUAREﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ V-ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ.y-
) .......................... 6(g)3(ROUNDﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ
ﺗﺘﻘﺮﺏ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ.
) .......................... 6(g)4(INTEGERﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ،1ﳑﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
) .......................... 6(g)5(PREVIOUSﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ
ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
ﲢﺪ ﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ
ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ .ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ
ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻫﺎ.
5-8
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ) ،y = (x + 5)(x + 4)(x + 3ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ V-Windowﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
Xscale = 2
Xmax = 8,
Xmin = –8,
Yscale = 1
Ymax = 2,
Ymin = –4,
m Graph 1
!3(V-WIN)-iwiwcwc
-ewcwbwJ
)3(TYPE)1(Y=)(v+f)(v+e
(v+d)w
)6(DRAW
!2(ZOOM)1(BOX) 2
d~dw 3
d~d,f~fw 4
• ﻳﺤﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺘﲔ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ،ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ ﻋﻦ
ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ.
kﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ -ﻭ +ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ
ﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑـ
).!2(ZOOM)2(FACTOR
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﻼﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﻼﺓ ﻻﻧﺘﺰﺍﻉ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺰﺍﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ
ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ .ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﻼﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﻭﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ .ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ،ﻻ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Dual Screenﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﻲ " "G+Gﺍﻭ "."GtoT
5-9
uﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).K2(PAN
• ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍ ) ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻰ
.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ
• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ wﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﹼ
ﺍﻟﻰ .
• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ ،ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﲔ ﻭ .
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ )ﲢﺮﻳﻚ( ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
.4ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
kﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ""Background
ﻳﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ.
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﹼ
• ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﻠﻒ "(g3p
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (5-21
ﻣﺒﲔ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (15-5
• ﻣﻠﻒ ﹼ
uﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) !m(SET UPﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "Backgroundﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) ،2(PICT nﻭ
) ،3(OPENﺃﻭ ).1(None
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Noneﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .6
• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ g3pﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﺪ PICTﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).2(PICT n
• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ g3pﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﺪ PICTﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) .3(OPENﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﺍﺫﺍ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﺪ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭ
ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(OPEN
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
).1(OPEN
5-10
.5ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ "?"V-Window values for specified background will be loaded. OK
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ g3pﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ،Tθ minﻭ ،Tθ maxﻭ Tθ ptchﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ
ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻠﻒ .g3p
.6ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
uﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ
.1ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) !3(V-WINﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(BGV-WIN
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ،Tθ minﻭ ،Tθ maxﻭ Tθ ptchﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﲟﻠﻒ
ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ.
.3ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
uﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).K4(BGV-WIN
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(SAVE
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻳﺔ "?."OK to refresh background V-Window
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ.
uﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).K4(BGV-WIN
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).2(SAVE • AS
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "? ."OK to refresh background V-Windowﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ
ﻭﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(No
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(Yes
.4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ROOTﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺬﻭﺭ.
• ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(OPEN
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(SAVE • AS
5-11
.6ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻃﻮﻻ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺒﻨﺪ " "Backgroundﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
• ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ .ﹼ
ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
kﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻔﺔ )ﺑﻬﺖ (I/Oﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻔﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Backgroundﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻟـ
) 0%ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ( ﺍﻟﻰ ) 100%ﻛﻞ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ( .ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﻒ ،ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟـ 100%ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ
ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ.
→
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ.
• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳋﻔﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟـ 16ﺑﻴﺖ.
• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳋﻔﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ.
uﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻔﺔ )ﺑﻬﺖ (I/Oﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) .K3(FadeI/Oﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).K1(FadeI/O
• ﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻖ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ eﻭ dﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻔﺔ.
ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﻟـ .5%
• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ eﺍﻭ dﹼ
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺎ .ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻔﺔ ﻟـ ،20%ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
.caw
.3ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
5-12
.3ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 20ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ.
.1ﺣﲔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 3(TYPEﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• }= ... {X=}/{Param}/{r=}/{Yﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ }ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ )ﻧﻮﻉ )}/{(Y=f(xﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ{/
}ﻭﺳﻴﻄﻴﻲ{ }/ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ )ﻧﻮﻉ ){(X=f(y
• }≤ ... {Y>}/{Y<}/{Y≥}/{Yﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ }){Y>f (x)}/{Y}/{X<}/{X≥}/{Xﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ }){X>f(y)}/{X}/{'Y<}/{'Y≥}/{'Y≤}/{'X=}/{'X>}/{'X<}/{'X≥}/{'X
} ...ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ{
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻩ.
kﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
uﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ )=(Y
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ Y1: y = 2x2 – 5
)=)3(TYPE)1(Yﲢﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ(.
)cvx-fﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ(.
)wﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ(.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ
ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ .ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
5-13
uﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ Xt3ﻭ:Yt3
x = 3 sinT
y = 3 cosT
)) 3(TYPE)3(Paramﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﻲ(.
)dsvwﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ (.x
)dcvwﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ (.y
uﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ Y1ﻭ Y2ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻝ Y3ﻭY4
Y1 = (x + 1), Y2 = x2 + 3
ﺗﻌﲔ Y1°Y2ﻟـ ،Y3ﺃﻭ Y2°Y1ﻟـ .Y4
))(Y1°Y2 = ((x2 + 3) +1) = (x2 + 4) Y2°Y1 = ( (x + 1))2 + 3 = x + 4 (x > −1
ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ Y3ﻭ .Y4
)3(TYPE)1(Y=)J4(GRAPH
1(Y)b(1(Y)c)w
J4(GRAPH)1(Y)c
(1(Y)b)w
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ.
5-14
uﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ،-1ﻭ ،0ﻭ 1ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ Aﻓﻲ ،Y = AX2ﻭ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
)=3(TYPE)1(Y
av(A)vx-bw
)J4(GRAPH)1(Y)b(av(A
!.(=)-b)w
)J4(GRAPH)1(Y)b(av(A
!.(=)a)w
)J4(GRAPH)1(Y)b(av(A
!.(=)b)w
)ffff1(SELECT
)6(DRAW
ﰎ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ "ﲢﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-52
kﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
uﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) !f(FORMATﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ.
5-15
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ
" "Line Styleﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
.4ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
.5ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ
" "Line Colorﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
.6ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
.7ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
uﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).!f(FORMAT
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ .ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ ﻫﻮ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ،2ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻭ ﺍﺫﻫﺐ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 3ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
.w
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ Line Styleﻭ Line Colorﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ.
• ﳌﺎ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 3ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ".
• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ.
5-16
uﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﻂ
ﺧﻄﻮﻃﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).4(TOOL)1(STYLE
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻣﻦ ،y = 2x2 – 3ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ،Y1ﺍﻟﻰ ""Broken
) () 4(TOOL)1(STYLE)3ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "(."Broken
kﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ
uﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ Y1ﻣﻦ y = 2x2 – 5ﺍﻟﻰ y = 2x2 – 3
) eﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ(.
)ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ(.
eeeeeDdﹼ
)wﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ(.
uﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ *
1
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ cﺃﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻋﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).3(TYPE)5(CONVERT
.3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ Y1ﻣﻦ y = 2x2 – 3ﺍﻟﻰ y < 2x2 – 3
))ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ( ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ "<(."Y
)<3(TYPE)5(CONVERT)3('Y
ﹼ
* 1ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ.
5-17
uﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
.1ﺣﲔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ cﺃﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 2(DELETEﺃﻭ .D
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻴﺊ.
• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ (Xt2ﺳﺘﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ
) ،Yt2ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ .(Xt2
kﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ /ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.1ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(SELECT
• ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ) .1(SELECTﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(DRAW
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ:
Y1 = 2x2 – 5, r2 = 5 sin3θ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ V-Windowﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
،Xmin = –5
،Xmax = 5
Xscale = 1
،Ymin = –5
،Ymax = 5
Yscale = 1
،Tθmin = 0
،Tθmax = π
Tθptch = 2π / 60
) cfﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ(.
)) 1(SELECTﺍﺧﺘﺮ( ) ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ(.
) 6(DRAWﺃﻭ ) wﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(.
kﻋﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
• (Off :Label ،On :Axes) On :Grid
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ Yscaleﺃﻭ Xscaleﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻰ 0ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﲢﺪﻳﺪ " "Onﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ Gridﺳﻴﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
5-18
• (Off :Label ،On :Axes) Line :Grid
ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ xﻭ .y
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ Xscaleﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻰ 0ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ""Line
ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ Gridﺳﻴﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ Yscaleﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻰ 0ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ
ﺑﺈﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ.
• (Off :Grid ،Off :Label) Off :Axes
ﻳﺰﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
• (Off :Grid ،Off :Label) Scale :Axes
ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ xﻭ .y
• (Off :Grid ،On :Axes) On :Label
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-ﻭﺍﶈﻮﺭ ،y-ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ) (Oﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ.
• ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ Gridﻫﻮ " "Onﺃﻭ " ،"Lineﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺟ ﹼﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ.
kﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 20ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻹﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ
ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ.
ﻭﲢﻔﻆ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ (20
• ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ
• ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
• ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ /ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ
• ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ) V-Windowﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(
5-19
uﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 4(TOOL)2(GPH-MEM)1(STOREﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ w
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ bwﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .(G-Mem1) 1
• ﺗﻮﺟﺪ 20ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ G-Mem1ﺣﺘﻰ .G-Mem20
• ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﲡﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺼﻞ ﺧﻄﺄ.
uﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 4(TOOL)2(GPH-MEM)2(RECALLﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
bwﺗﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .(G-Mem1) 1
• ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.4ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻫﻲ g3pﻭﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻓﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﻟﺔ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
• ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
• ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﻴﺔ ﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﲟﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ،ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ،ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ(
ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳋﻔﻴﻒ .ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. ﻭﻻ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ.• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ (Tθ min, Tθ max, Tθ ptch
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺧﺮ ﺍﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺧﺮ.
5-20
kﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﻠﻒ (g3p
ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .g3p
• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 20ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ
PICTﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ Pict01.g3pﺍﻟﻰ .Pict20.g3p
ﻣﻌﻴﻦ
• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﹼ
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻃﻮﻻ.
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺠﺰﺃﺓ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
uﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
).K1(PICTURE)1(STORE)1(1-20
.2ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 20ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ 20ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ Pict 1ﺍﻟﻰ .Pict 20
• ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
uﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﲢﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
).K1(PICTURE)1(STORE)2(SAVE • AS
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﺪ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
• ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺬﻭﺭ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ "."ROOT
5-21
• ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(OPEN
→
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(SAVE • AS
.4ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻃﻮﻻ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
kﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ) (g3pﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﻠﻒ ) (g3pﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ) Pict01.g3pﺍﻟﻰ (Pict20.g3p
• ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
• ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ)ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).!4(SKETCH)1(Cls
uﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).K1(PICTURE)2(RECALL)1(1-20
.2ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 20ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
uﺍﺰﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ g3pﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
).K1(PICTURE)2(RECALL)2(OPEN
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﺪ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ
ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(OPEN
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
).1(OPEN
5-22
.5ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
kﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﻘﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﺰﺋﲔ .ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ
ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ،ﺍﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﺘﻪ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ .ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﺩﺍﺓ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ
ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ "ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ" ،ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ،
ﹼ
ﹼ
"ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ".
uﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ.
uﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ
ﺣﺘﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
uﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Graph
.2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ " "G+Gﻟـ "."Dual Screen
.3ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(RIGHTﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ .ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) 6(LEFTﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
.4ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
.5ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ.
) ... K1(COPYﻳﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ
) ... K2(SWAPﺗﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ
• ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﻎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ.
ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ(
ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎ
ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑـ" " Rﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑـ " " Bﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺎ.
5-23
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) 1(SELECTﺣﲔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺗﻬﺎ ” “ Rﺃﻭ " " Bﻭ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﻛﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻈﻠﻞ ﺑـ " " Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻈﻠﻞ ﺑـ " " Rﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ"
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-15
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ) y = x(x + 1)(x – 1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
)ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ( ،Xmin = –2
،Xmax = 2
Xscale = 0.5
،Ymin = –2
،Ymax = 2
Yscale = 1
،Xmin = –4
،Xmax = 4
Xscale = 1
،Ymin = –3
،Ymax = 3
Yscale = 1
)ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ(
m Graph 1
!m(SET UP)cccc1(G + G)J 2
!3(V-WIN)-cwcwa.fwc 3
-cwcwbw
6(RIGHT)-ewewbwc
-dwdwbwJ
3(TYPE)1(Y=)v(v+b)( 4
v-b)w
)6(DRAW
K1(COPY) 5
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ Aﺣﲔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .4
5-24
.6ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻺﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ
ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix
.2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Input/Outputﺍﻟﻰ "."Linear
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.4ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.5ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻺﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ .ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ .y = 2x2 + 3x – 4
ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
،Xmin = –5
،Xmax = 5
Xscale = 2
،Ymin = –10
،Ymax = 10
Yscale = 5
m Run-Matrix 1
!m(SET UP)2(Line)J 2
!3(V-WIN)-fwfwcwc 3
-bawbawfwJ
!4(SKETCH)1(Cls)w 4
)=5(GRAPH)1(Y
cvx+dv-ew 5
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﻬﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ.
• ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻺﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ
• sin–1 θ
• cosh θ
• tanh–1 θ
• lnθ
'• 3
θ
• tan θ
• sinh θ
• cosh–1 θ
• log θ
• θ–1
• cos θ
• tan–1 θ
• sinh–1 θ
• θ2
• eθ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻺﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ
• sin θ
• cos–1 θ
• tanh θ
'•
θ
• 10θ
• sin–1 x
• cosh x
• tanh–1 x
• lnx
'• 3
x
• tan x
• sinh x
• cosh–1 x
• log x
• x–1
• ∫(x)dx
ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ θﻭﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ xﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ. -ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ،ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ.
5-25
• cos x
• tan–1 x
• sinh–1 x
• x2
• ex
d2
)• dx2 (x
• sin x
• cos–1 x
• tanh x
'•
x
• 10x
d
)• dx (x
kﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Graph
ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ " "Dual Screenﺍﻟﻰ "."Off
.2ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﹼ
.3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.4ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
) ] ( !-ﻗﻴﻤﺔ , ... ,ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ,ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )=( !.ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ) [ ( ,!+ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
.5ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺮﺳﻢ y = Ax2 – 3ﺣﻴﺚ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ Aﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ –1 ،1 ،3
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
،Xmin = –5
،Xmax = 5
Xscale = 1
،Ymin = –10
،Ymax = 10
Yscale = 2
m Graph 1
!m(SET UP)cccc3(Off)J 2
!3(V-WIN)-fwfwbwc 3
-bawbawcwJ
3(TYPE)1(Y=)av(A)vx-d, 4
!+( [ )av(A)!.(=)d,b,-b
!-( ] )w
6(DRAW) 5
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ :ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ،ﻭ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ،ﻭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ،ﻭ ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ،ﻭ ﺍﺳﻮﺩ .ﻭ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ،ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ،ﺳﻴﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ
ﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ.
5-26
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ.
• ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ.T ,θ ,r ,Y ,X :
• ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ،ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
• ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ.
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺒﺪﻟﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،{1,2,3} = 1ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ {4,5,6} = 2
• ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ Y1 = (List 1)X2ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
Y = X2, Y = 2X2, Y = 3X2
• ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ) Y1 = (List 1)X2 − (List 2ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
Y = X2 − 4, Y = 2X2 − 5, Y = 3X2 − 6
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ .ﺳﻴﻘﻊ
Dimension ERRORﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ.
uﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ) ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ (3ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ /ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ.
.2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻏﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ " "Dual Screenﺇﻟﻰ "."Off
.3ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﹼ
.4ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.5ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ /ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
.6ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
5-27
ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ } {3, 1, −1ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ y = (List 1)x2 − 3ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
،Xmin = –5
،Xmax = 5
Xscale = 1
،Ymin = –10
،Ymax = 10
Yscale = 2
m Statistics 1
dwbw-bw
m Graph 2
!m(SET UP)cccc3(Off)J 3
!3(V-WIN)-fwfwbwc-ba 4
wbawcwJ
3(TYPE)1(Y=)!b(List)bvx-dw 5
6(DRAW) 6
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ :ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ،ﻭ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ،ﻭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ،ﻭ ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ،ﻭ ﺍﺳﻮﺩ .ﻭ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ،ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ،ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﶈﻔﻈﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻧﻮﻉ ) 1ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ =(Y
ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ Yﺍﻟﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻛـﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ =.Y
ﻣﺜﻼ :ﻟﻠﺼﻖ Y=Xﻭﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ
• ﲡﺎﻫﻞ ﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻓﻲ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ .Y
ﻧﻮﻉ ) 2ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ(
ﻟﺼﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ =.Y
ﻣﺜﻼ :ﻟﻠﺼﻖ Xﻭﺭﺳﻢ Y=X
• ﲡﺎﻫﻞ ﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ.
5-28
uﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ
.1ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﶈﻔﻈﺔ.
.2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Graph
ﻏﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ " "Dual Screenﺇﻟﻰ "."Off
.3ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﹼ
.4ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.5ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.6ﺍﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻝ y = 2x2 + 3x – 4ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ،ﺍﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ Y=X
ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﻔﻈﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
،Xmin = –5
،Xmax = 5
Xscale = 2
،Ymin = –10
،Ymax = 10
Yscale = 5
m Run-Matrix 1
a-(Y)!.(=)v
)!i(CLIP)ddd1(COPY
mGraph 2
!m(SET UP)cccc3(Off)J 3
!3(V-WIN)-fwfwcwc 4
-bawbawfwJ
3(TYPE)1(Y=)cvx+dv-ew 5
)6(DRAW
!j(PASTE) 6
• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺧﻂ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ
ﻭﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ"
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-15
• ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ " "Offﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ " "Dual Screenﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ.
• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) ،30ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ،20ﺗﻀﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ(.
• ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ
ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ :ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ =.Y
• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﲟﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ
ﻣﺎ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ.
5-29
.7ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Table
kﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ
uﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ y = 3x2 – 2ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ Y1
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .ﺑﻌﺪ
ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ.
uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ
ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﲔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ xﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ.
• ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ،ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ.
• ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ x-ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ.
uﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ xﻣﻦ -3ﺍﻟﻰ ،3ﻟﻠﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ 1
m Table
)5(SET
-dwdwbw
ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲟﻮﺟﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ xﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
............ Startﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ x
............. Endﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ x
............ Stepﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ) xﻓﺎﺻﻞ(
ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
5-30
uﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
.1ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ.
.2ﻇﻠﻞ " "Variableﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(LISTﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ.
.3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ.x-
• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،6ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .gwﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .6
.4ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
uﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻺﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-15
uﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ Y1ﻭ Y3ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(SELECTﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ "=" ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻭ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )1(SELECT
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(TABLEﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎ .ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ x
ﹼ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
.(3 ،2 ،1 ،0 ،–1 ،–2 ،–3) 6
ﻛﻞ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 6ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ،ﲟﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ.
5-31
uﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ " "Derivativeﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ " "Onﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ
ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﺄ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ.
ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ
" "dY/dXﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ،ﳑﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ.
• ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﰎ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﲔ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ.
• ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ )=(Y
• ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ )=(r
• ﻭﺳﻴﻄﻴﺔ )(Param
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(TYPEﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻩ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) .(Table Funcﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺘﻠﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ.
kﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ.
ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ x
• ﹼ
• ﻋ ﹼﺪﻝ )ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺎﻕ( ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ
• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ
• ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺑﻄﺔ
• ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻄﻄﺔ
• }} ... {FORMULAﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{
• }} ... {DELETEﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ{
• }{ROW
• }} ... {ADD}/{INSERT}/{DELETEﺣﺬﻑ{}/ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ{}/ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ{ ﺻﻔﻮﻑ
}ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ {x
• }... {EDIT
ﹼ
• }} ... {GPH-PLT}/{GPH-CONﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ{}/ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻄﻂ{ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺮ( ،ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻭﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ.
• ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍ ﹼﻱ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﻏﻴﺮ (x-ﻟﻠﺠﺪﻭﻝ.
5-32
kﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﲤﻨﺤﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻱ ﺻﻒ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ
uﻧﺴﺦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ xﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
)K1(LISTMEM
ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
bw
• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ.
kﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Table
.2ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.3ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ.
.4ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
.5ﺍﻧﺸﺄ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
.6ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﻤﻪ.
) ... 5(GPH-CONﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ
) ... 6(GPH-PLTﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ
• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !6(G⇔Tﺃﻭ .A
5-33
ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ ،ﻭﺃﻧﺸﺄ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ .ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ
ﻣﻦ -3ﺍﻟﻰ ،3ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ .1
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
Y1 = 3x2 – 2, Y2 = x2
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
،Xmin = 0
،Xmax = 6
Xscale = 1
،Ymin = –2
،Ymax = 10
Yscale = 2
m Table 1
!3(V-WIN)awgwbwc 2
-cwbawcwJ
3(TYPE)1(Y=)dvx-cw 3
vxw
5(SET)-dwdwbwJ 4
6(TABLE) 5
5(GPH-CON) 6
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ.
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-16
kﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺎ
ﲢﺪﻳﺪ T+Gﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Table
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.3ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ " "T+Gﻟـ "."Dual Screen
.4ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
.5ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
.6ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ.
.7ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
) ... 5(GPH-CONﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ
) ... 6(GPH-PLTﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ
5-34
ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ Y1 = 3x2 – 2ﻭﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ.
ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ -3ﺍﻟﻰ ،3ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ .1
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
،Xmin = 0
،Xmax = 6
Xscale = 1
،Ymin = –2
،Ymax = 10
Yscale = 2
m Table 1
!3(V-WIN)awgwbwc 2
-cwbawcwJ
!m(SET UP)ccc1(T+G)J 3
3(TYPE)1(Y=)dvx-cw 4
5(SET) 5
-dwdwbwJ
6(TABLE) 6
5(GPH-CON) 7
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Dual Screenﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Tableﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Recursion
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻔﻌﻼ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Aﺃﻭ ).K1(CHANGE
5-35
.8ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟـ Aﻓﻲ (Y = AX2ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
kﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ .ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 5(MODIFYﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(MODIFY
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.
ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ
ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ .ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ) ﺍﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ.
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ eﻭ dﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ .ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ eﺍﻭ d
ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ.
ﹼ
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ,ﻭﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻓﺎﺓ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ.
• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻧﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ.
5-36
kﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ
uﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Dual Screenﺍﻟﻰ "."Off
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ.
• ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) .4(TOOL)3(BUILT-INﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-40
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 5(MODIFYﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .4
.6ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ) ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ.
.7ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ.
.8ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ eﻭ dﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ.
.9ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ Aﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ = y = x2 − Ax (0ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻟـ ،0.5ﺛﻢ
ﻗﻢ ﲟﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ Aﻣﻦ 0.5ﺍﻟﻰ .2ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
ﻟـ -2ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟـ Aﻭﻗﻢ ﲟﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺍﳌﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ).(INITIAL
m Graph 1
!m(SET UP)cccc3(Off)J 2
!3(V-WIN)1(INITIAL)J 3
3(TYPE)1(Y=)vx-av(A)vw 4
5(MODIFY) 5
ca.fw 6
f 7
eeee 8
5-37
-cw 9
J 0
uﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ X = H + T؛
Y = K + AT2ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ .A=2 ،H=0 ،K=0ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ H
ﺍﻟﻰ -1ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ Kﺍﻟﻰ ،-1ﻭﻗﻢ ﲟﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 3(PARAMﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ X = H + T ; Y = K + AT2ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ.
.4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ .A=2, H=0, K=0
cwawaw
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(MODIFYﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.
.6ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ .cﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ H=0ﻣﻠﻮﻥ
ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .-bw
5-38
.7ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .cﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ K=0ﻣﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻥ
ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .-bw
.8ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
kﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ) ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ( ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻪ ﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).K1(COPY
• ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﻨﺴﺦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺥ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ Jﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ wﻓﻲ
ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 3ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ.
• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ) ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻪ "="( ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ
ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ wﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 3ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " ."Expression in useﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ.
5-39
.9ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ .ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻛﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ
ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Dyna Graph
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ.
) ... 1(Contﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ
) ... 2(Stopﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ 10ﺻﻔﻮﻑ
1
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ*.
.5ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻻﻣﺮ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) !f(FORMATﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
2
.6ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃ ﹼﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ*.
.7ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ،ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ.
.8ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ.
)
3
( ... 3(SPEED)1ﻭﻗﻔﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ )*(Stop&Go
) ( ......................2ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ )(Slow
) ( ......................3ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ )(Normal
) ( ......................4ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ )(Fast
.9ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ.
* 1ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ.
• Y=Ax+B
• Y=A(x−B)2+C
• Y=Ax2+Bx+C
• )Y=Asin(Bx+C
• )Y=Acos(Bx+C
• )Y=Atan(Bx+C
• Y=Ax^3+Bx2+Cx+D
ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(TYPEﻭﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺔ.
* 2ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ.
* 3ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Stop&Goﻛﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ،ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﻭﻗﻒ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ .ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ wﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﲤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) eﺍﻭ (+ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) dﺍﻭ .(-ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "Too Many Functionsﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ.
5-40
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ،y = A (x – 1)2 – 1ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ A
ﻣﻦ 2ﺍﻟﻰ 5ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ .1ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺮﹼﺍﺕ.
m Dyna Graph 1
!3(V-WIN)1(INITIAL)J 2
!m(SET UP)c2(Stop)J 3
5(BUILT-IN)c1(SELECT) 4
!f(FORMAT)b(Black) 5
4(VAR)cwbw-bw 6
2(SET)cwfwbwJ 7
3(SPEED)3( )J 8
6(DYNA) 9
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ .4
1
2
→
←
↑↓
4
3
→
←
kﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.3ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ " "Onﻟـ "."Locus
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ.
.5ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ.
.6ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ،ﻭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ.
.7ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ " "Normalﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ.
.8ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ.
5-41
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ،y = Axﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ Aﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ
4ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ .1ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ 10ﻣﺮﺍﺕ.
m Dyna Graph 1
!3(V-WIN)1(INITIAL)J 2
!m(SET UP)cc1(On)J 3
5(BUILT-IN)1(SELECT) 4
4(VAR)bwaw 5
2(SET)bwewbwJ 6
3(SPEED)3( )J 7
6(DYNA) 8
→····
····←
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ DOT
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ،ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ
ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ "=."Dynamic Func Y
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !m(SET UPﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ cccﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "."Y=Draw Speed
.3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
) … 1(Normﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ) .x-ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ(
) … 2(Highﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ) .x-ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ(
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ
ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ .ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،ﻻﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻭﻗﺎﺕ.
5-42
uﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Aﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) .5(STOREﺭﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
uﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
.1ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ.
.2ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(RECALLﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.10ﺭﺳﻢ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ
kﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ.
• ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ } ،{anﻣﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ an, n
• ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ-ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ an+1, an, n
• ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ-ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ an+2, an+1, an, n
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Recursion
.2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ.
)} ... 3(TYPE)1(anﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ {an
)} ................... 2(an+1ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ-ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻮﺩﻱ{
)} ................... 3(an+2ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ-ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﻮﺩﻱ{
.3ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ.
.4ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟـ .nﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻻﻭﹼﻟﻲ ،ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ
ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﻀﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ.
.5ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ.
5-43
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺃﻧﺸﺄ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺑـ
an+2 = an+1 + anﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ) a1 = 1, a2 = 1ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﻴﺒﻮﻧﺎﺗﺸﻲ( ﻛﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ
nﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ .6
m Recursion 1
3(TYPE)3(an+2) 2
4(n.an ··)3(an+1)+2(an)w 3
5(SET)2(a1)bwgwbwbwJ 4
6(TABLE) 5
* ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺘﲔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺘﲔ ﻟـ
a1 = 1ﻭ .a2 = 1
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(FORMULAﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ.
• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ " "Onﻟـ " "ΣDisplayﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺿﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
kﺭﺳﻢ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻲ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Recursion
.2ﺃﻧﺸﺄ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.3ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ.
.4ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟـ .nﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ .ﺍﻻﻭﹼﻟﻲ ،ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ
ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ.
.5ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.6ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ.
.7ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
) ... 5(GPH-CONﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ
) ... 6(GPH-PLTﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻲ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺃﻧﺸﺄ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﲔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺏ a1 = 1ﻣﻊ
ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻝ ،an+1 = 2an + 1ﻛﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ nﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ .6ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﻢ
ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
،Xmin = 0
،Xmax = 6
Xscale = 1
،Ymin = –15
،Ymax = 65
Yscale = 5
5-44
m Recursion 1
!3(V-WIN)awgwbwc 2
-bfwgfwfwJ
3(TYPE)2(an+1)c2(an)+bw 3
5(SET)2(a1)bwgwbwJ 4
)J 5
(1(SEL+S)f2
6(TABLE) 6
5(GPH-CON) 7
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻭ ﳕﻂ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ"
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-15ﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-16
• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ.
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Aﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).!6(G⇔T
kﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭﻱ ﻻﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﲟﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ .ﻝ )an (an+1, an+2), bn (bn+1, bn+2), cn (cn+1, cn+2
ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﺍﻻﻭﻝ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ.
.2ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮﻫﻤﺎ ﻣﻌﺎ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
.4ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ nﻭﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ.
.5ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ.
.6ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭﻱ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﺻﻴﻎ ﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﲔ bn+1 = bn + 0.1n − 0.2ﻭ
،an+1 = 0.9anﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ a1 = 1ﻭ b1 = 1ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ .ﺃﻧﺸﺄ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ
ﺣﲔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ nﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 10ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭﻱ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
،Xmin = 0
،Xmax = 2
Xscale = 1
،Ymin = 0
،Ymax = 4
Yscale = 1
5-45
m Recursion 1
!3(V-WIN)awcwbwc 2
awewbwJ
3(TYPE)2(an+1)a.j2(an)w 3
4(n.an ··)3(bn)+a.b1(n)-a.cw
5(SET)2(a1)bwbawbwbwJ 4
6(TABLE) 5
3(PHASE) 6
• ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭﻱ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ
anﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ،bnﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ .an
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ RECURﻭﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ،ﻓﺴﻮﻑ
ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭﻱ .ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) 3(PHASEﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
) ... 1(a • bﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) bn (bn+1, bn+2ﻭ ).an (an+1, an+2
) ....2(b • cﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) cn (cn+1, cn+2ﻭ ).bn (bn+1, bn+2
) ....3(a • cﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) cn (cn+1, cn+2ﻭ ).an (an+1, an+2
• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ " "Onﻟـ " "ΣDisplayﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭﻱ ،ﺍﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ
ﻛﻞ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ .ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ) 3(PHASEﻓﻲ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
) ........... 1(anﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
) .........6(Σ anﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
5-46
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "ΣDisplay" "Onﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ) 3(PHASEﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ
ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ.
) .........1(a • bﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ
) bn (bn+1, bn+2ﻭ )an (an+1, an+2
) ......... 2(b • cﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ
) cn (cn+1, cn+2ﻭ )bn (bn+1, bn+2
) ......... 3(a • cﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ
) cn (cn+1, cn+2ﻭ )an (an+1, an+2
) ...... 4(Σ a • bﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ
ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ) bn (bn+1, bn+2ﻭ )an (an+1, an+2
) ...... 5(Σ b • cﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ
ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ) cn (cn+1, cn+2ﻭ )bn (bn+1, bn+2
) ...... 6(Σ a • cﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ
ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ) cn (cn+1, cn+2ﻭ )an (an+1, an+2
kﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ) ﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ ،ﺗﺒﺎﻋﺪ(
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ) y = f(xﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ an+1 = y, an = xﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﲔ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ )an+1 = f(an
ﺍﳌﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ .an+1, anﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ.
.4ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ،ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ nﻭﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻰ ،ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮ.
.5ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ.
.6ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.7ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ،wﻭﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ.
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻜﺒﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻭﺍﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ
ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﻗﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﺮﻯ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ fcﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ.
5-47
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ an+1 = –3(an)2 + 3an, bn+1 = 3bn + 0.2
ﻭ ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪ ,ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ :
،Start = 0ﻭ bnStr = 0.11 ،b0 = 0.11 ،anStr = 0.01 ،a0 = 0.01 ،End = 6
m Recursion 1
!3(V-WIN)awbwbwc 2
awbwbwJ
3(TYPE)2(an+1)-d2(an)x+d2(an)w 3
d3(bn)+a.cw
5(SET)1(a0) 4
awgwa.abwa.bbwc
a.abwa.bbwJ
6(TABLE) 5
4(WEB-GPH) 6
an)w~w 7ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ(
bn)cw~wﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪ(
• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(SEL+Sﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .4
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ) y = f(xﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ .ﻭﻻ ﺗﺼﻠﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻻ ﹼ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻮﻥ ""Connect
ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍ " "Draw Typeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
.11ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ
kﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻭ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ.
ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ .ﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ.
.2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
)} ....1(RECTﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ{
)} ....2(POLﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ{
)} ....3(PARAMﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ{
5-48
.3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﳕﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ.
R
w
.4ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ x = 2y2 + y − 1ﻭﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ r = 4cosθﻭﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ.
m Conic Graphs 1
1(RECT)c(X=AY2+BY+C)w 2
cwbw-bw6(DRAW) 3
JJ 4
2(POL)cccc(R=2Acosθ)w 5
cw6(DRAW) 6
• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) 1(MODIFYﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻟـ ) 6(DRAWﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﲟﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-36
• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) !f(FORMATﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
5-49
.12ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ،ﻭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ(
ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ .ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﳕﺎﻁ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ
ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ.
uﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ،ﻭﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.2ﻛﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
• ... Sketch Lineﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ
• ... Plot/LineColﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ،ﻭﺧﻂ ،ﺍﻭ ﻧﺺ
.4ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.5ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
1
.6ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ*.
) ... !4(SKETCH)1(Clsﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
) ............................. 2(Tangentﺧﻂ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ
) ............................. 3(Normﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ
2
) ............................. 4(Inverseﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ*
)6(g)1(PLOT
} ... {Plot}/{PlotOn}/{PlotOff}/{PlotChgﻧﻘﻄﺔ }{Plot}/{On}/{Off}/{Change
)6(g)2(LINE
}} ... {F-Line}/{Lineﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﺍﻄﻮﻃﺘﲔ ﺏ ) 6(g)1(PLOTﻣﻊ ﺧﻂ{}/ﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺧﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ{
) ............................. 6(g)3(Circleﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ
) ............................. 6(g)4(Verticalﺧﻂ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ
) ............................. 6(g)5(Horzﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ
) ............................. 6(g)6(g)1(PENﻳﺪﻭﻱ
) ............................. 6(g)6(g)2(Textﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ
.7ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) !f(FORMATﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،Horz ،Vertical ،Circle ،F-Line ،Line ،Norm ،Tangent :ﻭ
.PEN
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ،PlotChg ،PlotOn ،Plotﺍﻭ .Text
• ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
5-50
.8ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ *.w
3
* 1ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻭ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ
ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ.
* 2ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ،ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ .ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﳕﻂ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ
ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Sketch Lineﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ " "Plot/LineColﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ.
* 3ﻭﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻰ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳑﺎﺳﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ ) (2, 0ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻝ ).y = x (x + 2)(x – 2
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
m Graph 1
!3(V-WIN)1(INITIAL)J 2
!m(SET UP)cccccccc1(COLOR)b(Black) 3
)J
(c1
3(TYPE)1(Y=)v(v+c)(v 4
-c)w
6(DRAW) 5
!4(SKETCH)2(Tangent) 6
!f(FORMAT)b(Line Style)f(Thin) 7
c(Line Color)d(Red)J
1
*e~ew 8
* 1ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻂ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ
ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
5-51
.13ﲢﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
kﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.2ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
1
.3ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) .!1(TRACEﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ*.
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺔ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ cﻭ fﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ.
• ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ .ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ
ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-ﻭ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ.y-
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .!cﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﺘﻔﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .!f
.5ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ vﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ .x
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ.
ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).!1(TRACE
* 1ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻊ
ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ " "Offﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ " "Coordﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﻲ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ
)≤≥, Y≤, X≥, X
≥(Y
)<(Y>, Y<, X>, X
5-52
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺧﻼﻝ
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ،ﻭ ،G-Solveﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻨﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ .ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ aDﺗﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ﻭ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ.
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻨﺸﺄﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻛـ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻭﻛـ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ) (2,1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ Y=2X
ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ،ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ) (2,1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ Y>2Xﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ .
kﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺔ
ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺣﺪﺩ " "Onﻟـ "."Derivative
.3ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) .!1(TRACEﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
kﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻌﺎ ،ﳑﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺣﺪﺩ " "GtoTﻟـ "."Dual Screen
.3ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.4ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
)ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ(.
.5ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻱ ﻣﻔﻌﻼ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ cﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ
ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭﻩ.
.6ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ .ﺍﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ
ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
.7ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) K1(CHANGEﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ.
5-53
kﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ
ﺗﻘﺮﺏ ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻱ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Graph
.2ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) .!2(ZOOM)6(g)3(ROUNDﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ .Rnd
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) .!1(TRACEﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ
ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ.
kﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (G-SOLVE
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !5(G-SOLVEﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
) ... !5(G-SOLVE)1(ROOTﺟﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
) .............................. 2(MAXﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
) .............................. 3(MINﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
)-y .............................. 4(Y-ICEPTﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
) .............................. 5(INTSECTﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺭﺳﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﲔ
) .............................. 6(g)1(Y-CALﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ y-ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱx-
) .............................. 6(g)2(X-CALﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ x-ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲy-
) .............................. 6(g)3(∫dx)1(∫dxﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ
) .............................. 6(g)3(∫dx)2(ROOTﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
) .............................. 6(g)3(∫dx)3(INTSECTﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﲔ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﲔ
) .............................. 6(g)3(∫dx)4(MIXEDﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ
ﺭﺳﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻲ ﺳﻴﻨﻲx-
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﻷﻱ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﶈﻮﺭx- -ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻘﻼﺏ
5-54
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳉﺬﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).!5(G-SOLVE)1(ROOT
.3ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ
fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻪ.
.4ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .wﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳉﺬﻭﺭ.
Y1 = x3 − 4x
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ eﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .d
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Onﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺟﺬﺭ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ
.1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) .!5(G-SOLVE)5(INTSECTﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻣﺾ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﲔ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ eﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .d
5-55
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻻﺛﻨﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ،ﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﲔ Y1ﻭ.Y2
Y1 = x + 1, Y2 = x2
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻺﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ )ﻧﻮﻉ ) (Y=f(xﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ
)) Y > f(xﺃﻭ ) Y < f(xﺃﻭ ) Y ≥ f(xﺃﻭ ) (Y ≤ f(xﻓﻘﻂ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻱ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﲔ -ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻘﻼﺏ
uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ
.1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ.
) ... !5(G-SOLVE)6(g)1(Y-CALﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ y-ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ x
) .............................. 6(g)2(X-CALﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ x-ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ y
.3ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ،ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ
ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
.4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻰ x-ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻲ.y-
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻲ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ y-ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻲ.x-
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺗﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺣ ﹼﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻲ y-ﻟـ x = 0.5ﻭﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻲ x-ﻟـy = 2.2
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .Y2
)Y1 = x + 1, Y2 = x(x + 2)(x – 2
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻟﻺﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ eﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .d
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ X-CALﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﻴﺔ.
5-56
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻰ
.1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ،!5(G-SOLVE)6(g)3(∫dx)1(∫dxﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ .w
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
.5ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ.
• ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﶈﺴﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ .ﻭﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
.6ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﳌﻸ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺣ ﹼﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ).(–2, 0
)Y1 = x(x + 2)(x – 2
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ.10-
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ.
uﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).!5(G-SOLVE)6(g)3(∫dx)2(ROOT
• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻱ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ" .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .J
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ .w
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " ."Not Foundﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
.J
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ.
5-57
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،Y = sin Xﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ
ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﻭ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎ 21ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺬﻭﺭ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﺬﺭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﹼﺘﲔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ.
uﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﺘﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻻﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ
.1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).!5(G-SOLVE)6(g)3(∫dx)3(INTSECT
• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " ."Not Foundﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ .J
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ dﻭ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ،
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " ."Not Foundﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .J
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ) Y = sin (X − πﻭ Y = sin Xﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
2
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎ 21ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﻤﺎ ،ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ.
5-58
uﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺭﺳﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﲔ
.1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).!5(G-SOLVE)6(g)3(∫dx)e(MIXED
• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺳﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭc
ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺫﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .wﺣﺮﱢﻙ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ dﻭ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ dﻭ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺮﺳﻢ Y1 = X3 + 7X2 + 2X – 15ﻭ ،Y2 = 5X + 20ﻭﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﻭﺟﺬﺭ ،Y2ﻭﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ xﺑﻮﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﹰ
ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ.
kﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ.
.2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
)} ....1(RECTﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ{
)} ....2(POLﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ{
)} ....3(PARAMﻭﺳﻴﻄﻴﺔ{
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻪ.
.4ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺛﻮﺍﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ.
.5ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
5-59
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !5(G-SOLVEﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
uﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺊ
• }} ... {e}/{LENGTH}/{VERTEX}/{FOCUSﺑﺆﺭﺓ{}/ﺭﺃﺱ{}/ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ{}/ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ{
• }} ... {SYMMETRY}/{DIRECTXﺩﻟﻴﻞ{}/ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ{
• }} ... {Y-ICEPT}/{X-ICEPTﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ}/{x-ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ{y-
uﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ
• }} ... {RADIUS}/{CENTERﻣﺮﻛﺰ{}/ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ{
• }} ... {Y-ICEPT}/{X-ICEPTﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ}/{x-ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ{y-
uﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ
• }} ... {e}/{CENTER}/{VERTEX}/{FOCUSﺑﺆﺭﺓ{}/ﺭﺃﺱ{}/ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ{}/ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ{
• }} ... {Y-ICEPT}/{X-ICEPTﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ}/{x-ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ{y-
uﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ
• }} ... {e}/{CENTER}/{VERTEX}/{FOCUSﺑﺆﺭﺓ{}/ﺭﺃﺱ{}/ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ{}/ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ{
• }} ... {ASYMPTﺧﻂ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ{
• }} ... {Y-ICEPT}/{X-ICEPTﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ}/{x-ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ{y-
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ
ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺊ X = (Y – 2)2 + 3
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
Xscale = 1
Xmax = 10,
Xmin = –1,
Yscale = 1
Ymax = 5,
Ymin = –5,
m Conic Graphs
w
)bwcwdw6(DRAW
)!5(G-SOLVE
)1(FOCUS
)ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(.
)!5(G-SOLVE
)5(LENGTH
)ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ(.
5-60
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ eﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ dﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ.
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺭﺃﺳﲔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ eﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ .ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ dﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ.
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ eﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ d
ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ .ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﻱ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ.
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
(X + 2)2 + (Y + 1)2 = 22
m Conic Graphs
ccccw
)-cw-bwcw6(DRAW
)!5(G-SOLVE
)1(CENTER
)ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ(.
5-61
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﻳﺘﻀﻤ ﹼﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ
ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺑﻪ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻷﻥ ،ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ،ﺭﲟﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﺊ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ.
.1ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Statisticsﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ e, c, fﻭ d
ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ
ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ .ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ "ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ
ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ".
kﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ /ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ،ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻭﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ).(GRAPH1, GRAPH2, GRAPH3
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(GRAPHﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• } ... {GRAPH1}/{GRAPH2}/{GRAPH3ﺭﺳﻢ } {1}/{2}/{3ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ*
1
• }} ... {SELECTﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ) (GRAPH1, GRAPH2, GRAPH3ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ{ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ.
• }} ... {SETﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﺎﺕ({
* 1ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ) ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ (3ﻫﻮ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ ،ﻟﻜﻦ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ.
6-1
6
kﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
][GRAPH]-[SET
ﻳﺒﲔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﹼ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ).(GRAPH1, GRAPH2, GRAPH3
• Graph Type
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
• YList ،XList
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ List 1ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﺍﳌﻔﺮﺩ ،ﻭ List 1ﻭ List 2ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ x-ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.y-
• Frequency
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ.
ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ) ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ( .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ "ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ" ،ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ،ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ) ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺩﺙ( ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ .ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ .ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،1ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،2ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ .ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ
ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻫﻮ ،1ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﻮ ) 1ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(.
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ 0ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ .ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ).(Out of Domain
• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ 0ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ.
• Mark Type
ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻄﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• Color Link
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ( ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻛﺎﻟﻮﻥ ) ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ( ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ " ) "Offﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ
ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(.
• Graph Color
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Offﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ .ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﲟﺎ
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ،ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ،
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ.
6-2
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(GRAPH)6(SETﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ
ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ) StatGraphﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ(
• } ... {GRAPH1}/{GRAPH2}/{GRAPH3ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ }{1}/{2}/{3
• ) Graph Typeﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(
• }} ... {Pie}/{NPPlot}/{xyLine}/{Scatterﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ{ xy}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ{}/ﺍﻄﻂ
ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ{} /ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ{
• }} ... {Broken}/{N-Dist}/{Bar}/{MedBox}/{Histﻣﺪﺭﹼﺝ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ{}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ{}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﻲ{}/ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ{}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺴﻮﺭ{
• }} ... {X4}/{X3}/{X2}/{Med}/{Xﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ{}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ-ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ{}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ{}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺒﻲ{}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ{
• }} ... {Logistic}/{Sin}/{Power}/{abx}/{aebx}/{Logﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ{}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ )}/{(aebxﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ) (abxﺍﻷﺳﻲ {}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ{/
}ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳉﻴﺒﻲ{}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ{
• ) XListﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ) YList/(x-ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ(y-
• }} ... {LISTﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ {26
• ) Frequencyﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺕ(
• }} ... {1ﻣﺨﻄﻂ -1ﺍﻟﻰ{1-
• }} ... {LISTﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ {26
• ) Mark Typeﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻄﻄﺔ(
• }{ ... {}/{ }/ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ
• Color Link
ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ:
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ:
Scatter, xyLine
X&Y
ﻓﻲ Yﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ Xﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ Xﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ Yﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﻟﻮﺍﻥ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ
ﺭﺳﻢ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻭ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ Xﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ Yﺍﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻛـ ◎ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ.
OnlyX
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ Xﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
OnlyY
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ Yﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
Off
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
6-3
ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ:
NPPlot, Pie,
Bar
Hist, Broken
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ:
On
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
Off
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
X&Freq
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ Xﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ Xﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﻟﻮﺍﻥ،
ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ Xﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ،
ﻳﺒﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﲤﺜﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻭﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻛﻤﺎ ﹼ
:Histﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻖ.
:Brokenﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻛـ ◎ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻭ
ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ.
OnlyX
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ Xﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
Off
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺒﻌﺜﺮﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "OnlyXﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ
⇒
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
):XListﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ :YList ،1ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (2
OnlyX :Color Link
)ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺒﻌﺜﺮﻱ(
• Graph Color
• } ... {Black}/{Blue}/{Red}/{Magenta}/{Green}/{Cyan}/{Yellowﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺒﻌﺜﺮﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ } {Redﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
6-4
• } ... {Autoﻳﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺃﻭ ﺯﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(:
ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ،ﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ،ﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ،ﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ،ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳋﻤﺴﺔ.
ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ،ﻭﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ،ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻥ
ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ } {Autoﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎ ،ﻭ xyLineﻭ ،NPPlotﺃﻭ
.Broken
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺒﻌﺜﺮﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ } {Autoﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ " "Linkﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ " "Offﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ") "Pieﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ( ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ:
• ) Dataﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(.
• }} ... {LISTﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ {26
• ) Displayﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ(
• } ... {Data}/{%ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ}ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ{}/ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ{
• ) % Sto Memﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(.
• } ... {List}/{Noneﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ}:ﻻ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ{}/ﺣﺪﺩ List1ﺍﻟﻰ 26ﻭﺍﺧﺰﻥ{
• ) Pie Areaﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻣﻼﺀ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ(.
• Area Color
• } ... {Black}/{Blue}/{Red}/{Magenta}/{Green}/{Cyan}/{Yellowﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻣﻼﺀ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• } ... {Autoﻳﺪﻭﺭ ﺇﻣﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ :ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ،ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ،ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ،ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ،
ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺔ.
• Paint Style
• }} ... {Lighter}/{Normalﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ{}/ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﻼﺀ ﺍﻷﺧﻒ{
• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ " "Linkﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺀ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ " "Lighterﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻴﺊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ""Off
ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ.
• ) Pie Borderﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﳊﺪ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ(.
• } ... {Black}/{Blue}/{Red}/{Magenta}/{Green}/{Cyan}/{Yellowﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﳋﻂ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ.
• } ... {Clearﻻ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻂ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﻭﺩ.
6-5
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ") "Histﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ( ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ:
• ) Hist Areaﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻣﻼﺀ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ(.
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ.
• ) Hist Borderﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ(.
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ.
• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ " "Offﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ " "Linkﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻴﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ") "MedBoxﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳌﺮﺑﻊ -ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ( ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ:
• ) Outliersﻗﻴﻤﺔ)ﻗﻴﻢ( ﻣﺘﻄﺮﻓﺔ(
• }} ... {Off}/{Onﻳﻌﺮﺽ{}/ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ{ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻄﺮﻓﺔ ﳌﺮﺑﻊ-ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )ﻗﻴﻢ( ﻣﺘﻄﺮﻓﺔ
maxX
Q3
Med
Q1
minX
• ) Boxﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻀﻢ ﻟـ Q1ﺍﻟﻰ ،Q3ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ(.
• } ... {Black}/{Blue}/{Red}/{Magenta}/{Green}/{Cyan}/{Yellowﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﳋﻂ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ.
• ) Whiskerﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ Wishkerﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ minXﻭ (.maxX
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ.
• ) Outlier Colorﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﺮﻓﺔ(.
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ.
• ) Box Insideﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻣﻼﺀ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻀﻢ ﻟـ Q1ﺍﻟﻰ (.Q3
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ ،ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Autoﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻣﻼﺀ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ Q1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ،ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ
ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻣﻼﺀ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻰ .Q3
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ") "Barﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ( ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ:
• ) Data1ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(
• }} ... {LISTﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ {26
• ) Data2ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ() Data3/ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(
• }} ... {LIST}/{Noneﻻ{}/ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ {26
• ) Stick Styleﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ(
• }} ... {Horz}/{Lengthﻋﺎﻣﻮﺩﻱ{}/ﺃﻓﻘﻲ{
6-6
• ،D1 Areaﻭ ،D2 Areaﻭ) D3 Areaﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﻣﻼﺀ ﻟـ ،Data1ﻭ ،Data2ﻭ Data3ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻳﻂ(.
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ.
• ،D1 Borderﻭ ،D2 Borderﻭ) D3 Borderﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻟـ ،Data1ﻭ ،Data2ﻭ Data3ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻳﻂ(.
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ.
kﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ /ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ
][GRAPH]-[SELECT
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( /ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ )ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ /ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.1ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(GRAPH)4(SELECTﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ StatGraph1ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟـ ) Graph 1ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ StatGraph2 ،(GRAPH1ﻟـ
،Graph2ﻭ StatGraph3ﻟـ .Graph3
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
• }} ... {Off}/{Onﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ({}/ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ({
• }} ... {DRAWﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ{
.3ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
kﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ
ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ،
ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ Stat Windﺍﻟﻰ "."Manual
ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻥ ﹼ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻧﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
)!m(SET UP)2(Manual
)Jﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ(.
ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ
ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻧﻪ ﰎ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻻﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﹼ
ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ Stat Windﺍﻟﻰ "."Manual
Pie, 1-Sample Z Test, 2-Sample Z Test, 1-Prop Z Test, 2-Prop Z Test, 1-Sample t Test,
)ﺗﻬﻤﻞ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-ﻓﻘﻂ( 2-Sample t Test, χ2 GOF Test, χ2 2-way Test, 2-Sample F Test
6-7
.2ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻻﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ،ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ(.
ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ .ﺍﻻﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻹﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ.
ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ
ﹼ
ﹼ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟـ "ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 6-1ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
kﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻄﻂ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ .ﻳﺤﺪﺩ XListﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ
{ /ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻬﺎ.
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ } /
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ J ،Aﺍﻭ ) !J(QUITﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ .ﻭﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻫﻮ .20ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻢ ﺏ A, B, Cﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ،ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻦ 1, 2 , 3ﻣﺎ
ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "%ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Displayﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(6-3ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ.
6-8
kﺭﹼﺝ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ
ﲢﺪﺩ XListﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺪﺩ Freqﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ
1ﻝ Freqﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ.
⇒
)w(Draw
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ-ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ
ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲡﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ
ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ .ﻳﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ) (Q1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ )،(Q3
ﻣﻊ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ) .(Medﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ )ﺍﳌﺴﻤﺎﺓ
(whiskersﺍﳌﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﻫﻲ ﺣﺪ ﺍﺩﻧﻰ ) (minXﻭﺃﻗﺼﻰ
) (maxXﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
maxX
Med Q3
Q1
minX
ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﻻ " "MedBoxﻛﻨﻮﻉ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﺛﻢ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ
ﻭﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﺮﻓﺔ ﻟـ " "Onﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﹼ
• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Q1Q3 Typeﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻣﺎﻛﻦ Q1ﻭ ،Q3ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ-ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
6-9
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﻲ .ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ ] ،[3] ،[2] ،[1ﻭ ﻣﺎ
ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ،ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﳋﻄﻮﻁ 3 ،2 ،1ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃ ﹼﻱ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﻲ.
ﻳﻘﻊ Condition ERRORﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ /ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(6-7ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﻲ ﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ.
ﻭ ﻳﻘﻊ Dimension ERRORﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺛﻨﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
-ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ Data1ﻭ ،Data3ﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ " "Noneﻟـ .Data2
kﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﻳﺤﺪﺩ XListﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺪﺩ Freqﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ .ﻭﲢﺪﺩ 1ﻝ Freqﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ.
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﻜﺴﻮﺭ
ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﺪﺭﹼﺝ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ.
ﻳﺤﺪﺩ XListﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺪﺩ Freqﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ .ﻭﲢﺪﺩ 1ﻝ
Freqﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ.
6-10
⇒
)w(Draw
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
kﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﳝﻜﻦ
ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺈﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ –ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ
ﻣﻌﺎ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
).1 (1-VAR
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﻳﺼﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ.
¯ ................ xﻭﺳﻂ
.............. Q1ﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻭﻝ
.............. Σxﺟﻤﻊ
............ Medﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ
............. Σx2ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ
.............. Q3ﺭﺑﻊ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ
.............. σxﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
.......... maxXﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ
............... sxﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
............ Modﻭﺿﻊ
............... nﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
........ Mod:nﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
........... minXﺣﺪ ﺍﺩﻧﻰ
........ Mod:Fﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(DRAWﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﺎ ﹰ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Q1Q3 Typeﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻣﺎ ") "Stdﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ
") "OnDataﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ( ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ Q1ﻭ .Q3
ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Stdﺃﻭ " ،"OnDataﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻝ "ﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
Stdﻭ " "OnDataﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
6-11
kﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ Stdﻭ OnData
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ Q1ﻭ Q3ﻭ Medﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Q1Q3 Typeﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
Std u
) (1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ
ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ nﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺯﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﻭ
ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ nﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺯﻭﺟﻲ:
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﻮ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ،ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ :ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ .ﻓﺘﺼﺒﺢ Q1ﻭ Q3ﻭ Medﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
n
ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ{
} = Q1ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ
2
n
ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ{
} = Q3ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ
2
n
n
} = Medﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟـ
ﻭ ﺍﻟـ { +1
2
8
2
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ
6
4
2
7
5
ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ
3
1
4+5
=
2
2+3
= Q1
2
6+7
= Q3
2
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ nﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ:
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ،ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ :ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ )ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ( ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ )ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ( .ﺗﺴﺘﺒﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ .ﻓﺘﺼﺒﺢ Q1ﻭ Q3ﻭ Medﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
n–1
ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ{
} = Q1ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ
2
n–1
ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ{
} = Q3ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ
2
n+1
} = Medﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟـ
{
2
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ = Med = Q3 = Q1 ،n = 1ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ.
6-12
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ
9
7
8
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ
5
6
4
3
2
1
ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ
2+3
= Q1
2
7+8
= Q3
2
) (2ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻛﺴﻮﺭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ
ﻗﻴﻢ Q1ﻭ Q3ﻭ Medﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
} = Q1ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 0.25ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ {0.25
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ 0.25ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ Q1ﻫﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
} = Q3ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 0.75ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ {0.75
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ 0.75ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ Q3ﻫﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
} = Medﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 0.5ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ {0.5
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ 0.5ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ Medﻫﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﳌﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ
ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ
1
0.1
0.1
0.1/1.0 = 0.1
2
0.1
0.2
0.2/1.0 = 0.2
3
0.2
0.4
0.4/1.0 = 0.4
4
0.3
0.7
0.7/1.0 = 0.7
5
0.1
0.8
0.8/1.0 = 0.8
6
0.1
0.9
0.9/1.0 = 0.9
7
0.1
1.0
1.0/1.0 = 1.0
• 3ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 0.25ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ،0.25ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ .Q1 = 3
• 5ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 0.75ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ،0.75ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ .Q3 = 5
• 4ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 0.5ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ،0.5ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ .Med = 4
6-13
OnData u
ﻗﻴﻢ Q1ﻭ Q3ﻭ Medﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
} = Q1ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 0.25ﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ {0.25
} = Q3ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 0.75ﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ {0.75
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﳌﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ.
)ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ(10 :
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ
ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ
1
1
1
1/10 = 0.1
2
1
2
2/10 = 0.2
3
2
4
4/10 = 0.4
4
3
7
7/10 = 0.7
5
1
8
8/10 = 0.8
6
1
9
9/10 = 0.9
7
1
10
10/10 = 1.0
• 3ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ 0.25ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ،0.25ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ .Q1 = 3
• 5ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ 0.75ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ،0.75ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ .Q3 = 5
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ )(0.75
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
7
6
5
4
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ )(0.25
0.4
4
4
Q3
3
3
0.2
0.1
2
1
Q1
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Medﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Stdﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "."Q1Q3 Type
• ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﺮﻕ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻀﻢ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻛﺴﻮﺭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
" "OnDataﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "."Q1Q3 Type
6-14
.3ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ )ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ(
kﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ xy
ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ .xy
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
.3ﺣﺪﺩ ) Scatterﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ( ﺍﻭ ) xyLineﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ (xyﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ
ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ J ،Aﺃﻭ ) !J(QUITﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ .ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ،ﺧﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺍﺭ ﺑﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ .xy
)0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2 (xList
)–2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 2.0, 2.4 (yList
m Statistics 1
a.fwb.cwc.ewewf.cwe 2
-c.bwa.dwb.fwcwc.ew
) 3ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻕ( )1(GRAPH)6(SET)c1(Scatter)J1(GRAPH1
) 4ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ 1(GRAPH)6(SET)c2(xyLine)J1(GRAPH1) (xy
)ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻕ(
)ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ (xy
6-15
kﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﺧﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ.
.3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ،ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ.
.4ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻕ ،ﺛﻢ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ،ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ.
)0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2 (xList
)–2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 2.0, 2.4 (yList
m Statistics 1
a.fwb.cwc.ewewf.cwe 2
-c.bwa.dwb.fwcwc.ew
)1(GRAPH)6(SET)c1(Scatter)J1(GRAPH1
1(CALC)6(g)2(Log) 3
6(DRAW) 4
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ .ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﲤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ.
kﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ – ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ.
• }... {Logistic}/{Sin}/{Power}/{abx}/{aebx}/{Log}/{X4}/{X3}/{X2}/{Med}/{a+bx}/{ax+b
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ}ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻄﻲ )ﺷﻜﻞ }/{(ax+bﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻄﻲ )ﺷﻜﻞ }/{(a+bxﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ-
ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺔ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﻲ )ﺷﻜﻞ /{aebx
}ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﻲ )ﺷﻜﻞ }/{abxﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﻮﺓ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺟﻴﺒﻲ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ{
• }} ...{2-VARﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ{
6-16
kﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ(ﻣﺜﻞ bﻭ aﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ y = ax + bﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ
ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ) 1(CALCﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻭ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ.
............. rﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻄﻲ ،ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﻲ ،ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﺳﻲ ،ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ(
............r2ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ – ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ،ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺟﻴﺒﻲ ،ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ(
........ MSeﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ )ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ – ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(
kﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).6(DRAW
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﳝﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ) y-ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ y-ﻋﻨﺪ x = 0ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺮ(.
ﲤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ.
)1(CALC)2(X
) 2(a+bxﺃﻭ )1(ax+b
)6(DRAW
ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ.
y = ax + b
........... aﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ )ﻣﻨﺤﺪﺭ(
........... bﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ(y-
y = a + bx
........... aﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ(y-
........... bﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ )ﺍﳌﻨﺤﺪﺭ(
6-17
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ – ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺸﺘﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﺮﻓﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ،ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﻘﻠﹼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﺮﻓﺔ.
)1(CALC)3(Med
)6(DRAW
ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ -ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ.
y = ax + b
............ aﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ – ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ
............ bﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ–y
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ/ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺒﻲ/ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ
ﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ/ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺒﻲ/ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ .ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺓ
ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﳝﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ
ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ/ﻣﻜﻌﺒﻲ/ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ Ex.
)1(CALC)4(X2
)6(DRAW
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺐ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ
2
3
ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ y = ax + bx + cx + d ..............
ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ y = ax2 + bx + c ..............
......... aﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
.......... aﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
......... bﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
.......... bﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
..........cﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
)ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ(y-
.......... cﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
.......... dﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
)ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ(y-
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ
ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔy = ax4 + bx3 + cx2 + dx + e ..............
.......... aﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺭﺍﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
.......... bﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
.......... cﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
.......... dﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
.......... eﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ(y-
6-18
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ
ﻳﻌ ﹼﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ yﻛﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ﻝ .xﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﻮ ،y = a + b × ln x
ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﻥ ،X = ln xﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ .y = a + bX
)1(CALC)6(g)2(Log
)6(DRAW
ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ
y = a + b·ln x
............ aﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
............ bﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ
ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ yﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ ﻝ .xﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﻲ ،y = a × ebxﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺧﺬﻧﺎ
ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ ﻣﻌﺎ ﻧﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ .y = ln a + bxﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ ،Y = ln yﻭ ،A = ln aﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
ﺍﳋﻄﻲ .Y = A + bx
)1(CALC)6(g)3(EXP
) 2(abxﺃﻭ )1(aebx
)6(DRAW
ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ.
y = a·ebx
............ aﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
............ bﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
y = a·bx
............ aﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
............ bﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
6-19
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ
ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻦ yﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻝ .xﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ،y = a × xbﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺧﺬﻧﺎ
ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ ﻣﻌﺎ ﻧﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ .ln y = ln a + b × ln xﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎﹰ ،ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ ،X = ln xﻭ , Y = ln yﻭ ،A = ln a
ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ .Y = A + bX
)1(CALC)6(g)4(Power
)6(DRAW
ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﳕﻂ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ.
y = a·xb
............ aﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
............ bﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳉﻴﺒﻲ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳉﻴﺒﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺔ.
ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳉﻴﺒﻲ.
y = a·sin(bx + c) + d
)1(CALC)6(g)5(Sin
)6(DRAW
ﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳉﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ) Radﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ(.
ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳉﻴﺒﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻭﻻ
ﹼ
• ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﺐ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻞ.
6-20
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻈﻮﺍﻫﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ.
ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ.
c
1 + ae–bx
=y
)1(CALC)6(g)6(g)1(Logistic
)6(DRAW
• ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﺐ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻞ.
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ– (yﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )" "List 1ﺍﻟﻰ
" ("List 26ﻝ " "Resid Listﻭ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ.
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺍﺭﺓ ﻛﺘﻠﻚ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ.
6-21
kﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ – ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﺎ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
).1(CALC)1(2-VAR
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﻔﺊ ﺯﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
......... oﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ x
....... Σy2ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ y
........ Σxﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ x
........ σyﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ y
....... Σx2ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ x
......... syﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ y
......... σxﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ x
....... Σxyﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻧﺎﰋ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ xﻭ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ y
......... sxﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ x
..... minXﺍﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ x
.... maxXﺍﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ x
.......... nﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
..... minYﺍﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ y
.......... pﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ y
.... maxYﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ y
........ Σyﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ y
kﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(6-17ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )5(COPY
1
• ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ*.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﳊﻔﻆ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﻭ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
* 1ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
6-22
.4ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﰎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )2(CALC)6(SET
ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ.
.......1Var XListﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ) xﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (X
....... 1Var Freqﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ(
.......2Var XListﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ) xﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (X
.......2Var YListﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ) yﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (Y
....... 2Var Freqﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﻳﻦ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ(
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ.
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ" ،ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ).2(CALC)1(1-VAR
ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ cﻭ fﻟﻴﻤﺮﹼﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ
ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ.ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(6-11
6-23
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ" ،ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).2(CALC)2(2-VAR
ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ cﻭ fﻟﻴﻤﺮﹼﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ
ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ.
ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(6-22
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ "ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ" ﺍﻟﻰ "ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ" ،ﰎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻫﻨﺎ ،ﻛﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺔ ﻛﺮﻗﻢ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(CALC)3(REGﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻝ ،ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• }... {Logistic}/{Sin}/{Power}/{abx}/{aebx}/{Log}/{X4}/{X3}/{X2}/{Med}/{a+bx}/{ax+b
ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ }ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻄﻲ )ﺷﻜﻞ }/{(ax+bﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻄﻲ )ﺷﻜﻞ }/{(a+bxﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ -ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ
ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻜﻌﻴﺒﻲ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﻲ )ﺷﻜﻞ }/{(aebxﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﻲ )ﺷﻜﻞ
}/{(abxﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﻮﺓ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺟﻴﺒﻲ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ{
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
)2(CALC)3(REG)1(X)1(ax+b
ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻟـ "ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ" ﺍﻟﻰ "ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ".
6-24
uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ )،(rﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ) (r2ﻭ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ )(MSe
ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ.
ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ )(r
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﻲ ، ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ.
ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )(r2
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻄﻲ ،ﻭﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ،ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻜﻌﻴﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ،ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﻲ ،ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﺳﻲ،
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ.
ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ )(MSe
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ-ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ.
ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ ) (MSeﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
n
1
n–2
• ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ )Σ (y – (ax + b)) ...................... (ax + b
2
i
i
i=1
n
)Σ (y – (a + bx )) ...................... (a + bx
2
i
i
i=1
1
n–2
n
• ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ + bxi + c))2 ..................................
2
Σ (y – (ax
i
= MSe
i
i=1
= MSe
1
= MSe
n–3
n
1
n–4
• ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻌﻴﺒﻴﺔ Σ (y – (ax + bx + cx + d )) .................................
2
i
2
3
i
i
i
i=1
n
• ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺔ + cxi2 + dxi + e))2 ....................................
3
Σ (y – (ax + bx
4
i
i
i
i=1
n
2
i
i=1
n
Σ (ln y – (ln a + bx )) .......................... (a·e
bx
• ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﻴﺔ )
2
i
i
i=1
1
n–2
n
) Σ (ln y – (ln a + (ln b) · x )) .......................... (a·b
x
2
i
i
i=1
6-25
1
n–5
= MSe
1
= MSe
n–2
• ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻴﺔ Σ (y – (a + b ln x )) ..............................
i
= MSe
= MSe
1
n–2
= MSe
n
• ﻗﻮﺓ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔΣ (ln y – (ln a + b ln x )) ........................................
2
i
i
i=1
1
= MSe
n–2
n
• ﻗﻮﺓ ﺟﻴﺒﻴﺔ ..........................................
)) Σ (y – (a sin (bx + c) + d
2
i
i
i=1
2
C
• ﻗﻮﺓ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ .......................................
1 + ae–bxi
n
– yi
Σ
i=1
1
n–2
1
n–2
= MSe
= MSe
uﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ
ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ
ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ Y-CALﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ y-ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔx-
ﹼ
ﹼ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ –ﻭﺍﺣﺪ.
ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .Y-CAL
.1ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !5(G-SOLVE)1(Y-CALﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ.x-
.2ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻝ xﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ xﻭ yﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﻭﻳﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺴﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
• ﻭ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ " "Offﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ " "Coordﻣﻦ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
.3ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ vﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ
ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ.
.4ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .Jﺳﻴﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻﺧﺘﻔﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻲ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
6-26
uﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ
ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ )ﻛﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ( ،ﻟﻮﺿﻊ Statisticsﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ
ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﶈﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ .ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
).6(COPY
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ) ( ,
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ
ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ yﻭ xﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻭ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻝ ŷﻭ ̂ xﻋﻨﺪ yi = 1000ﻭ
xi = 20
xi
yi
10
15
20
25
30
1003
1005
1010
1011
1014
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ.
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ.
.3ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ.
)ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ca(xi
K5(STAT)2(ŷ)w
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻝ ŷﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻝ .xi = 20
)ﻗﻴﻤﺔ baaa(yi
1(ˆx)w
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻝ ̂ xﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻝ .yi = 1000
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ -ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ،ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻜﻌﻴﺒﻲ،ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻜﻌﻴﺒﻲ،ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ،ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺟﻴﺒﻲ ،ﺃﻭﺭﺳﻢ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ.
6-27
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) K6(g)3(PROB)6(gﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• }( ... {P(}/{Q(}/{Rﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ }) {P(t)}/{Q(t)}/{R(tﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
• }(} ... {tﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟـ ){t(x
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ) R(t), P(t), Q(tﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻝ ) t(xﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
)R (t
)Q (t
0 t
)P (t
0 t
0 t
σx
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ 20ﻃﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ
ﻟﻠﻄﻼﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ 160.5ﺳﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ 175.5ﺳﻢ .ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ،ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻊ
ﻃﺎﻟﺐ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ 175.5ﺳﻢ؟
ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ
ﻃﻮﻝ )ﺳﻢ(
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ
ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ
ﻃﻮﻝ )ﺳﻢ(
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ
1
158.5
1
6
173.3
4
2
160.5
1
7
175.5
2
3
163.3
2
8
178.6
2
4
167.5
2
9
180.4
2
5
170.2
3
10
186.7
1
6-28
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ.
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .2
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﹰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ.
)2(CALC)6(SET
1(LIST)bw
)c2(LIST)cw!J(QUIT
)2(CALC)1(1-VAR
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ،mﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،Run-Matrixﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) K6(g)3(PROB)6(gﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
) (PROBﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
3(PROB)6(g)4(t() bga.f)w
)ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ tﻝ 160.5ﺳﻢ(
ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ–1.633855948 :
)( –1.634
4(t() bhf.f)w
)ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ tﻝ 175.5ﺳﻢ(
ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ0.4963343361 :
)( 0.496
)1(P()a.ejg1(P()-b.gde)w
)ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻤﻮﻋﺔ(
ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ0.6389233692 :
)ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻤﻮﻋﺔ (63.9%
3(R()a.ejg)w
)ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ(
ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ0.3099472055 :
)ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ (31.0
6-29
kﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ.
.3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ).P (0.5
m Run-Matrix 1
!m(SET UP)2(Line)J
!4(SKETCH)1(Cls)w 2
)=5(GRAPH)1(Y
K6(g)3(PROB)6(g)1(P()a.f)w 3
kﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﺍﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ Programﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ
ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ) .ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-50
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ } ،{1, 2, 3ﺣﻴﺚ
ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﻮ σ = 1.5ﻭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﻮ .μ = 2
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ.
!m(SET UP)2(Line)J
)K5(STAT)3(DIST)1(NORM
1(Npd)!*( { )b,c,d
!/( } ),b.f,c)w
• ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ"
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-41
6-30
kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ
ﺍﺘﻤﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ
ﺍﺘﻤﻊ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺼﺼﺔ .ﻭ ﲡﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrixﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (26ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ
)]StdDev(List n [,List m
)]StdDev_σ(List n [,List m
)]Variance(List n [,List m
)]Variance_σ2(List n [,List m
...... List nﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺔ
......List mﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻳﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ x-ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،1ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،2ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﺘﻤﻊ
x
60
70
80
90
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ
3
5
4
1
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ.
.3ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ.
K5(STAT)4(StdDev)1(S)JJ
1(LIST)1(List)b,1(List)c)w
J5(STAT)5(Var)1(S2)JJ
1(LIST)1(List)b,1(List)c)w
K5(STAT)4(StdDev)2(σ)JJ
1(LIST)1(List)b,1(List)c)w
K5(STAT)5(Var)2(σ2)JJ
1(LIST)1(List)b,1(List)c)w
6-31
kﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ TEST
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﳌﺎ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،Zﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،tﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(6-33
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ zﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ p-ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻋﻴﻨﺔ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ:
ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) μﺷﺮﻁ( * ،≠ μ0ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺮﺽ ،μ0 = 0ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
،σ = 1ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ،o = 1ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ .n = 2
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
* ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ " μﺷﺮﻁ "≠ μ0ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ 0ﻛﺤﺠﺔ ﺃﻭﻟﻰ ﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ-ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ
"."OneSampleZTest
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
!m(SET UP)2(Line)J
)K5(STAT)6(g)1(TEST)1(Z
1(1-Sample)a,a,b,b
,cw
JJJ
1(LIST)1(List)!-(Ans)w
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ .4
:1ﻋﻼﻣﺔ z
:2ﻗﻴﻤﺔp-
o :3
n :4
• ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺮ TESTﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻣﺮ TESTﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ"
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-45
6-32
.5ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
ﻳﻮﻓﹼﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ .ﲡﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ
ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ )ﻛﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺳﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ( ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ .ﻭ
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻘﻲ ﻭ ﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ،ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺭﺍ.
-1ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ Zﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ.
-2ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻴﻨﺘﻴﻦ Zﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﻻﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ
ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺎ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ.
-1ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ Zﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺠﺎﺡ.
-2ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻴﻦ Zﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ.
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻ ﹰ .ﻭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﺎﺓ ﺑﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻡ ،ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ .ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺇﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻡ .ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ.
-1ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ tﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻ ﹰ.
-2ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻴﻨﺘﻴﻦ tﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻ ﹰ.
LinearRegﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ.
ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،χ2ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ.
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) GOF χ2ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ χ2ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ( ﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﺻﻮﺩ ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﻌﲔ .ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ.
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ χ2ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻳﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﻣﺜﻞ "ﻧﻌﻢ" ﻭ
ﻳﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ.
"ﻻ"( ﻭ ﹼ
-2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Fﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ
ﺍﳌﺴﺮﻃﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺒﻪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻎ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ،ﻭ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺘﺎﻣﻴﻨﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻬﻮﺓ ،ﻭ
ﺍﳋﻤﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺸﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺌﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺦ.
ANOVAﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ،
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ.
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ.
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ.
6-33
ﺗﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ
ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ.
ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(TESTﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ) ... 3(TEST)1(Zﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) Zﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ(
) ................... 2(tﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) tﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-37
) ................... 3(CHIﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) χ2ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-40
) ................... 4(Fﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) 2-Sample Fﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-42
)) ANOVA ................... 5(ANOVAﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-43
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "Executeﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ) ... 1(CALCﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ) ... 6(DRAWﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
kﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻹﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،Z-ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،t-ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،χ2-ﻋﻴﻨﺔ 2-ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،Fﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ.
• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ -1ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،Zﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
).3(TEST)1(Z)1 (1-SAMPLE
.2ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "GphColorﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(COLOR
.3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
kﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Z
uﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Z
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .Z
• ) ... 1(Zﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ .z
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ zﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Zﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(.
ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
• ) ... 2(Pﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ.p-
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ p-ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(Pﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ,ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻗﻴﻢ zﻭ pﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎ Zﻭ Pﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ.
6-34
uﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)3(TEST
)1(Z
)1(1-SAMPLE
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
........ μ≠11.4ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
............... sxﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ :ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
• ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ μﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2
uﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﻴﻦ
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)3(TEST
)1(Z
)2(2-SAMPLE
6-35
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
.......... μ1≠μ2ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
.............. sx1ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ :ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
.............. sx2ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ :ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
• ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ μ1ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2
uﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)3(TEST
)1(Z
)3(1-PROP
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
....... Prop≠0.5ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
• ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ xﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2
6-36
uﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻨﺴﺒﺘﻴﻦ
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻨﺴﺒﺘﲔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)3(TEST
)1(Z
)4(2-PROP
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
.......... p1>p2ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
• ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ p1ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2
kﺇﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ t
uﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ t
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .t
• ) ... 1(Tﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ .t
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ tﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Tﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(.
ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
• ) ... 2(Pﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ.p-
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺔ p-ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(Pﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻗﻴﻢ tﻭ pﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎ Tﻭ Pﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ.
6-37
uﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ
ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺎ ﹰ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ .t
ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
)3(TEST
)2(t
)1(1-SAMPLE
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
........ μ≠11.3ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
• ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ μﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2
uﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﻴﻦ
ﻳﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺎ ﹰ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ t
ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ .t
ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
)3(TEST
)2(t
)2(2-SAMPLE
6-38
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
.......... μ1≠μ2ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
............... spﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ :ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
• ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ μ1ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2
LinearReg uﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ t
ﻳﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ-ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺯﻭﺍﺝ ) (x, yﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ a,
bﺍﻷﻧﺴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ .y = a + bxﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ،tﻭ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ
ﺑﲔ xﻭ .y
ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
)3(TEST
)2(t
)3(REG
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
........ β≠0 & ρ≠0ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
6-39
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(COPYﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ] [Resid Listﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻝ LinearRegﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .t
• ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ β & ρﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑـ ] [Save Resﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ ] [Resid Listﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ] [Resid Listﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
χ2 kﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
• χ2ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ) ... 1(CHIﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ .χ2
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ χ2ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(CHIﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(.
• ) ... 2(Pﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ.p-
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ p-ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(Pﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻗﻴﻢ χ2ﻭ pﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎ Cﻭ Pﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ.
• ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) GOF χ2ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ χ2ﺍﲡﺎﻩ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) χ2 GOFﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ χ2ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ( ﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﻌﲔ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ.
ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
)3(TEST
)3(CHI
)1(GOF
6-40
ﺛﻢ ،ﺣ ﹼﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
..... Observedﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﺻﻮﺩﺓ )ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ(
...... Expectedﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ
........ CNTRBﲢﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (26ﻛﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻫﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺻﻮﺩ ﻧﺎﰋ ﻋﻦ
ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
........ CNTRBﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻫﻤﺔ
• ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ χ2ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ χ2
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ χ2ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻭ ﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ χ2ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻉ )ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻠﺔ ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ /ﻻ(.
ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
)3(TSET
)3(CHI
)2(2WAY
ﺛﻢ ،ﺣ ﹼﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
..... Observedﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ (Zﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺻﻮﺩﺓ )ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ(.
...... Expectedﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ (Zﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
6-41
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺧﻄﲔ ﻭﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻷﻗﻞ .ﻭ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ.
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Matﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ " "Observedﻭ" "Expectedﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ .(Z
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2('MATﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ.
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6('MATﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ
ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﱢﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﱢﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ.
kﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Fﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﻴﻦ
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Fﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔ ﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Fﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ .F
ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
)3(TEST
)4(F
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
.......... σ1≠σ2ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
............... x¯1ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ :ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
............... x¯2ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ :ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
6-42
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ) ... 1(Fﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ .F
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ Fﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Fﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻞ -ﺍﺛﻨﺘﲔ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
• ) ... 2(Pﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ.p-
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ p-ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(Pﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻗﻴﻢ Fﻭ pﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎ Fﻭ Pﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ.
• ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ σ1ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2
ANOVA k
ANOVAﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ.
ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ.
ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻼﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ.
ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
)3(TEST
)5(ANOVA
ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
.....How Manyﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻭ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ(
........ Factor Aﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26
...... Dependntﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26
1
...... Save Resﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ )ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ *(22
.........Executeﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ(
* [Save Res] 1ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻪ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ،ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻻﺣﻖ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ 1ﺍﻟﻰ .22
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ﻓﻘﻂ.
....... Factor Bﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26
..... GphColorﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-34
6-43
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "Executeﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ) ... 1(CALCﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ) ... 6(DRAWﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﻓﻘﻂ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ(.
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ
}List1={1,1,2,2
}List1={1,1,1,1,2,2,2,2
}List2={124,913,120,1001
}List2={1,1,2,2,1,1,2,2
}List3={113,116,139,132,133,131,126,122
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ........ (A) 1ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Aﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،dfﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،SSﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،MSﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،Fﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔp-
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ....(ERR) 2ﺧﻄﺄ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،dfﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،SSﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ .MS
ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ........ (A) 1ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Aﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،dfﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،SSﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،MSﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،Fﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔp-
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ........ (B) 2ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Bﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،dfﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،SSﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،MSﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،Fﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔp-
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ...... (AB) 3ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ × Aﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Bﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،dfﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،SSﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،MSﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،Fﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔp-
* ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 3ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﺻﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ.
6-44
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ....(ERR) 4ﺧﻄﺄ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،dfﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،SSﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ .MS
.................... Fﻗﻴﻤﺔ F
.................... pﻗﻴﻤﺔp-
.................. dfﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ
................... SSﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ
................. MSﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ
ﻣﻊ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ،Bﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ X-ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ .Aﺍﶈﻮﺭ Y-ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ) 1(Traceﺃﻭ ) ... !1(TRACEﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ
ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ eﺍﻭ .dﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ fﻭ .c
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ،ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎ Aﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ Mﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ.
) ANOVA kﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ(
uﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺝ :ﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ) (Aﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ) .(Bﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﳑﺎﺛﻠﺔ.
) Bﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ(
) Aﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(
B1
B2
A1
116
132 113 ,
139 ,
A2
131
122 133 ,
126 ,
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯ ﻣﻦ .5%
: Hoﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ
: Hoﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ.
: Hoﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ.
uﺣﻠﻮﻝ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ.
ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ.
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ{1,1,1,1,2,2,2,2}=1
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ{1,1,2,2,1,1,2,2}=2
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ{113,116,139,132,133,131,126,122}=3
6-45
ﻋﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) 3ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ( ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ .ﻭ ﻋﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) 2ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (3ﻛﻌﺎﻣﻞ Aﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ.
ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ) (Aﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ P = 0.2458019517
ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ ) (p = 0.2458019517ﻫﻮ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ ) ،(0.05ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ.
• ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ) (Bﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ P = 0.04222398836
ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ ) (p = 0.04222398836ﻫﻮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ ) ،(0.05ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ.
• ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ) (A × Bﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﻫﻤﻴﺔ P = 2.78169946e-3
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ) (p = 2.78169946e-3ﻫﻮ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ) ،(0.05ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ.
ﻭ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ.
uﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ
uﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ
6-46
.6ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ
ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ )ﻓﺎﺻﻞ( ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ.
ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ( .ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻴﻖ ،ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻳﺤﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻮﺛﻮﻗﺔ.
ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ 95%ﻭ .99%ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻳﻮﺳﻊ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ،ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻳﻀﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ،ﻟﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺪﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ .ﻣﻊ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ،95%ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ 5%ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ،ﻭ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ،ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ .ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ.
-1ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ Zﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺎ ﹰ.
-2ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺘﲔ Zﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺎ ﹰ.
-1ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ Zﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ.
-2ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﲔ Zﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻌﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ.
-1ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ tﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ.
-2ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺘﲔ tﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ
ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ.
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Statisticsﺍﻻﻭﻟﻰ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 4(INTRﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ) ... 4(INTR)1(Zﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ) Zﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-48
) .................. 2(tﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ) tﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-49
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "Executeﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ) ... 1(CALCﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ.
6-47
uﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ
ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ 0 < C-Level < 1ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ C-Levelﻳﻌ ﹼﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺖ.
ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ 1 < C-Level < 100ﻳﻌ ﹼﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ .100
kﻓﺎﺻﻞ Z
-1 uﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ Z
-1ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ Zﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ.
ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
)4(INTR
)1(Z
)1(1-SAMPLE
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
-2 uﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺘﲔ Z
-2ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺘﲔ Zﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ
ﻣﻦ ﻋﻴﻨﺘﲔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺎ ﹰ.
ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
)4(INTR
)1(Z
)2(2-SAMPLE
6-48
-1 uﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ Z
-1ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ Zﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ .ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
)4(INTR
)1(Z
)3(1-PROP
ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
-2 uﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﲔ Z
-2ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﲔ Zﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ
ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ.
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)4(INTR
)1(Z
)4(2-PROP
kﻓﺎﺻﻞ t
-1 uﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ t
ﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ.
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)4(INTR
)2(t
)1(1-SAMPLE
6-49
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
-2 uﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺘﲔ t
-2ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺘﲔ tﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ
ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ tﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ .t
ﲡﺮﻱ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
)4(INTR
)2(t
)2(2-SAMPLE
.7ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ،ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻬﺮﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ "ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ" ،ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ .ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ
ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ( ،ﻣﻊ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ .ﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﻛﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ.
ﻣﺜﻼ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ،
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﻛﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ .ﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ
ﻫﺪﻑ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ) 80%ﻣﺜﻼ( ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺼﻞ
ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ.
6-50
ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ xﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ.
ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ t-ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ xﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ t-ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ tﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ t-ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ t-ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ
ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ،tﻭ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ )ﺍﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ( ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻝ χ2ﻭ ،Fﻭ
ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ،ﻭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ.
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Statisticsﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 5(DISTﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ) ... 5(DIST)1(NORMﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-52
) .................. 2(tﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺳﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ) t-ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-54
) .................. 3(CHIﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ) χ2ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-55
) .................. 4(Fﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ) Fﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-57
) .................. 5(BINOMIALﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-58
) .................. 6(g)1(POISSONﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-60
) .................. 6(g)2(GEOﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-62
) .................. 6(g)3(HYPRGEOﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-64
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "Executeﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ) ... 1(CALCﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ) ... 6(DRAWﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
kﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ
• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ
ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ(.
ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ:
ﹼ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ.
• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
).5(DIST)1(NORM)1(Npd
.2ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "GphColorﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(COLOR
.3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
6-51
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Stat Windﻳﻜﻮﻥ
" ."Autoﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Stat Windﻳﻜﻮﻥ
"."Manual
• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ P-CALﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ p-ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ xﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ .ﻭﳝﻜﻦ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ P-CALﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ،ﻭ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺳﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ ،t-ﻭ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ،χ
ﺃﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ .F
2
ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ .P-CAL
.1ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !5(G-SOLVE) 1(P-CALﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ
ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ .x
.2ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻝ xﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
• ﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻢ pﻭ xﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻭ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.3ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ vﺍﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ xﺣﻴﺚ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ.
.4ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ،ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﳌﺴﺢ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻗﻴﻢ xﻭ pﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎ Xﻭ ،Pﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ.
kﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ
• ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ
)5(DIST)1(NORM)1(Npd
ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ) (pﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ x-ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
• ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ.
• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ σ = 1ﻭ μ = 0ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔx-
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
6-52
• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ
)5(DIST)1(NORM)2(Ncd
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔx-
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ
)5(DIST)1(NORM)3(InvN
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )ﻗﻴﻢ( ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ :ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ
) < 1ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ < (0
ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ.
f (x)dx = p
Upper
Lower
∫
∞+
f (x)dx = p
Lower
Tail:Central
Tail:Right
ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ
ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ.
ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ
ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ.
∫
f (x)dx = p
Tail:Left
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ
ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ.
• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ∞ = 1E99, –∞ = –1E99 :
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ.
6-53
Upper
∫
∞−
kﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺳﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖt-
• ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖt-
)5(DIST)2(t)1(tpd
ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ t-ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ )(pﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ xﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ
ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖt-
)5(DIST)2(t)2(tcd
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ t-ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖt-
ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺳﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ t-ﻳﻘﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
6-54
• ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖt-
)5(DIST)2(t)3(Invt
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ t-ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ) dfﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ
ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ( ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ.t-
kﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ χ2
• ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ χ2
)5(DIST)3(CHI)1(Cpd
ﲢﺴﺐ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ) (pﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
6-55
• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ χ2
)5(DIST)3(CHI)2(Ccd
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ χ2ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ χ2ﺑﲔ
ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ χ2
)5(DIST)3(CHI)3(InvC
ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ χ2ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ
χ2ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ) dfﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ( ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ χ2
6-56
kﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ F
• ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ F
)5(DIST)4(F)1(Fpd
ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ Fﲢﺴﺐ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ (p) Fﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ
ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ
ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ F
)5(DIST)4(F)2(Fcd
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ Fﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ Fﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺪ
ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
6-57
• ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ F
)5(DIST)4(F)3(InvF
ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ Fﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ Fﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ d:dfﻭ ) n:dfﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺴﻂ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻡ( ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ .F
kﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ
• ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ
)5(DIST)5(BINOMIAL)1(Bpd
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ
ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﲡﺮﺑﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ.
6-58
• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ
)5(DIST)5(BINOMIAL)2(Bcd
ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ )ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ(
ﻫﻮ ،xﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ) ،p(xﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ.
• ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ
)5(DIST)5(BINOMIAL)3(InvB
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﲡﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ.
6-59
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ `( ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ.
ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ) xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ( ﻭ ) `xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ `( .ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xInvﻓﻘﻂ .ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ xInv
ﻭ ،`xInvﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺎ.
ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ .ﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ
ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ .ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ،ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ،ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ.
kﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻰ
• ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ
)5(DIST)6(g)1(POISSON)1(Ppd
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ.
6-60
• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ
)5(DIST)6(g)1(POISSON)2(Pcd
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ )ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ( ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻴﻘﻊ xﻓﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ ) p(xﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ.
• ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ
)5(DIST)6(g)1(POISSON)3(InvP
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ.
6-61
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ `( ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ.
ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ) xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ( ﻭ ) `xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ `( .ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xInvﻓﻘﻂ .ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ xInv
ﻭ ،`xInvﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺎ.
ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ .ﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ
ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ .ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ،ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﲢﺬﻳﺮ ،ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ.
kﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ
• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ
)5(DIST)6(g)2(GEO)1(Gpd
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ x-ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ
ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻰ،
ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ.
6-62
• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ
)5(DIST)6(g)2(GEO)2(Gcd
ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ )ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ( ﻫﻲ ،xﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ) ،p(xﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ
ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ.
• ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ
)5(DIST)6(g)2(GEO)3(InvG
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﲡﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ.
6-63
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ `( ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ.
ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ) xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ( ﻭ ) `xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ `( .ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xInvﻓﻘﻂ .ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ xInv
ﻭ ،`xInvﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺘﲔ ﻣﻌﺎ.
ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ .ﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ
ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ .ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ،ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ.
kﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ
• ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ
)5(DIST)6(g)3(HYPRGEO)1(Hpd
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ x-ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ
ﺍﻭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ.
• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ
)5(DIST)6(g)3(HYPRGEO)2(Hcd
ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ )ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ( ﻫﻲ ،xﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ) p(xﺳﻴﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ.
6-64
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ.
• ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ
)5(DIST)6(g)3(HYPRGEO)3(InvH
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ
ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ.
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ `( ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ.
ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ) xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ( ﻭ ) `xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ `( .ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xInvﻓﻘﻂ .ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ xInv
ﻭ ،`xInvﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺘﲔ ﻣﻌﺎ.
ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ .ﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ
ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ .ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ،ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ،ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ.
6-65
.8ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﻳﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ.
kﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ
.................................. Dataﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
-1) μﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ( .............ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ )" "≠ μ0ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻓﲔ "< μ0" ،ﻳﺤﺪﺩ
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ "> μ0" ،ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ – ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ(.
-2) μ1ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔ( ..........ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ )" "≠ μ2ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻓﲔ "< μ2" ،ﻳﺤﺪﺩ
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1ﺍﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ "> μ2" ،2ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ-
ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ (2
-1) Propﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ( .......ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )" "≠ p0ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻓﲔ "< p0" ،ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ-
ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺩﻧﻰ "> p0" ،ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ(.
-2) p1ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻨﺴﺒﺘﲔ( .........ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )" "≠ p2ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻓﲔ "< p2" ،ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ-
ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ﺍﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ "> p2" ،2ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ
ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ (2
-1) μﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ( ..............ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ )" "≠ μ0ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻓﲔ " "< μ0ﻳﺤﺪﺩ
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺩﻧﻰ "> μ0" ،ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ(
-2) μ1ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ( .............ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )" "≠ μ2ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻓﲔ " "< μ2ﻳﺤﺪﺩ
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ﺍﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ "> μ2" ،2ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
ﻃﺮﻑ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ (2
LinearReg) β & ρﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ..(tﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ "≠ 0") ρ-ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻓﲔ "< 0" ،ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
ﺃﺩﻧﻰ "> 0" ،ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ(
-2) σ1ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Fﻟﻨﺴﺒﺘﲔ( ........ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ )" "≠ σ2ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻓﲔ "< σ2" ،ﻳﺤﺪﺩ
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ﺍﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ "> σ2" ،2ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
ﻃﺮﻑ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ (2
...................................... μ0ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺮﺽ
........................................σﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ )(σ > 0
...................................... σ1ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ (σ1 > 0) 1
...................................... σ2ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ (σ2 > 0) 2
.................................... Listﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26
.................................. List1ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ) 1ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26
..................................List 2ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ) 2ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26
6-66
...................................Freqﺗﺮﺩﺩ ) 1ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26
.................................Freq1ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1) 1ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26
.................................Freq2ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1) 2ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26
............................. Executeﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ
........................................ oﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ
...................................... o1ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1
....................................... o2ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 2
........................................ nﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ(
....................................... n1ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ) 1ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ(
....................................... n2ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ) 2ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ(
....................................... p0ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ )(0 < p0 < 1
....................................... p1ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ
-1) xﺇﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ() .............ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ x 0ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ(
-1) xﻓﺎﺻﻞ Zﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ( .............ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ) 0ﺍﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ(
....................................... x1ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ x1 0) 1ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ(
....................................... x2ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ x2 0) 2ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ(
....................................... sxﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ )(sx > 0
......................................sx1ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ (sx1 > 0) 1
......................................sx2ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ (sx2 > 0) 2
.................................. XListﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ) xﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26
.................................. YListﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ) yﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26
..............................C-Levelﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ )(0 C-Level < 1
...............................Pooledﲡﻤﻴﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻓﻲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ( ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ(
) xﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ..............................ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
) σﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( .............................ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ )(σ > 0
) μﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ..............................ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ
)ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ..............................ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ
) Lowerﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ......................ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ
) Upperﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ......................ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ
) L.Listﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( .......................ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺣﺪ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺇﻟﻰ (26
) U.Listﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ....................ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺇﻟﻰ (26
) dfﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( .............................ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ )(df > 0
) n:dfﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ..........................ﺑﺴﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ(
) d:dfﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ..........................ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ(
) Numtrialﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ..................ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﻻﺕ
) pﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ..............................ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ )(0 p 1
6-67
kﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ
........................................ zﻋﻼﻣﺔ z
........................................ pﻗﻴﻤﺔp-
......................................... tﻋﻼﻣﺔ t
....................................... χ2ﻗﻴﻤﺔ χ2
....................................... Fﻗﻴﻤﺔ F
̂ .........................................pﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ
....................................... p̂1ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1
....................................... p̂2ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ 2
........................................ oﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ
....................................... o1ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1
....................................... o2ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 2
.......................................sxﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ
..................................... sx1ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1
..................................... sx2ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ 2
...................................... spﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻤﻌﺔ
....................................... nﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ
....................................... n1ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1
....................................... n2ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 2
....................................... dfﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ
........................................ aﻋﺪﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ
........................................ bﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ
.......................................seﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
........................................ rﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ
....................................... r2ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ
................................ Lowerﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ
................................ Upperﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ
6-68
.9ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ
kﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
-1ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ
'z = (o – μ0)/(σ/
)n
-2ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔ
)z = (o1 – o2)/ (σ 12/n1) + (σ 22/n2
-1ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ
z = (x/n – p0)/ p0(1 – p0)/n
-2ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻨﺴﺒﺘﲔ
)z = (x1/n1 – x2/n2)/ p̂ (1 – p̂ )(1/n1 + 1/n2
-1ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ
't = (o – μ0)/(sx/
)n
)t = (o1 – o2)/ sp2(1/n1 + 1/n2
-2ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔ )ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ(
)sp = ((n1 – 1)sx12 + (n2 – 1)sx22)/(n1 + n2 – 2
df = n1 + n2 − 2
t = (o1 – o2)/ sx12/n1 + sx22/n2
-2ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ(
))df = 1/(C 2/(n1 – 1) + (1 – C )2/(n2 – 1
)C = (sx12/n1)/(sx12/n1 + sx22/n2
LinearRegﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ t
n
n
i=1
i=1
b = Σ(xi – o)(yi – p)/Σ(xi – o)2
a = p – bo
2
) t = r (n – 2)/(1 – r
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ GOF χ2
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ χ2ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ
-2ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Fﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔ
k
χ2 = Σ ( Oi − Ei)2 /Ei
i
:Eiﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ iﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ
:Oij 2 k Rﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ ،iﻭﻋﻤﻮﺩ j
χ = ΣΣ( Oij − Eij)2 /Eij
ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺻﻮﺩﺓ
i j
R
k
k R
:Eijﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ ،iﻭﻋﻤﻮﺩ j
Eij = Σ Oij • Σ Oij / Σ Σ Oij
i=1
j=1
i=1 j=1
ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ
F = sx12/sx22
MSe = SSe/Edf
MS = SS/Fdf
k
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ANOVA
:Oiﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ iﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺻﻮﺩﺓ
F = MS/MSe
k
SSe = Σ ( ni – 1)sxi2
SS = Σ ni (oi − o)2
)Edf = Σ ( ni – 1
Fdf = k − 1
i=1
k
i=1
6-69
i=1
ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔk
ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ:Lower
ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ:Upper
ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ
Lower, Upper = o + Z (α /2) · σ/'
n
ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔZ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ-1
Lower, Upper = (o1 – o2) + Z(α /2) σ12/n1 + σ22/n2
ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔZ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ-2
Lower, Upper = x/n + Z(α /2) 1/n · (x/n · (1 – x/n))
ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔZ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ-1
Lower, Upper = (x1/n1 – x2/n2)
+ Z(α /2) (x1/n1 · (1 – x1/n1))/n1 + (x2/n2 · (1 – x2/n2))/n2
ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔZ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ-2
Lower, Upper = o + tn−1(α /2) · sx/'
n
ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔt ﻓﺎﺻﻞ-1
Lower, Upper = (o1 – o2) + tn1+n2−2 (α /2) sp2(1/n1 + 1/n2)
( ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔ )ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔt ﻓﺎﺻﻞ-2
sp = ((n1 – 1)sx12 + (n2 – 1)sx22)/(n1 + n2 – 2)
Lower, Upper = (o1 – o2) + tdf (α /2) sx12/n1 + sx22/n2
df = 1/(C 2/(n1 – 1) + (1 – C)2/(n2 – 1))
ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔt ﻓﺎﺻﻞ-2
()ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ
C = (sx12/n1)/(sx12/n1 + sx22/n2)
(0 C-Level < 1) ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ: C-Level 1 − [C-Level] = α ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻫﺎﻡ:α
ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱα/2 ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ:Z(α/2)
df ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﻳﺔt ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊα/2 ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ:tdf (α/2)
6-70
( ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ )ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞk
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ
ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ
–
p(x) = 1 e
2πσ
(x – μμ)2
2σ
(σ > 0)
2
–
x2
df + 1
1+
Γ 2
df
p(x) =
×
π × df
df
Γ 2
p=
∫
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ
df+1
2
t-ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ
Upper
df
p(x)dx
p(x) = 1 × 1
2
df
Γ 2
Lower
ndf + ddf
2
p(x) =
ndf
ddf
Γ
×Γ
2
2
Γ
ndf
ddf
2
df
×x
2
–1
–
×e
x
2
χ2 ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ
(x ⭌ 0)
ndf ndf
–1
2
x
2
– ndf + ddf
2
1 + ndf × x
ddf
F ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ
(x ⭌ 0)
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ
p=
∫
Upper
p(x)dx
p=
Lower
tail = Central
∫
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ
∞
p=
p(x)dx
Lower
tail = Right
∫
Upper
p(x)dx
–∞
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ
tail = Left
t-ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ
p=
∫
∞
p(x)dx
χ2 ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ
Lower
F ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ
6-71
kﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ )ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(
ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ
:nﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ
)(x = 0, 1, ·······, n
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ
:λﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ )( λ > 0
)··· (x = 0, 1, 2,
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ
)··· (x = 1, 2, 3,
× N – MC n – x
NC n
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ
MC x
p(x) = nC x p x(1–p)n – x
e– λ × λ x
!x
= )p(x
p(x) = p(1– p)x – 1
= )p(x
:nﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺮﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ (0 x
:Mﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) Aﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ (0 M
:Nﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ (n N, M N
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ
Upper
X
)p = Σ p(x
x=Lower
)p H Σ p(x
x=0
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ
Upper
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ
)p = Σ p(x
)p = Σ p(x
X
x=Lower
Upper
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ
X
)p H Σ p(x
x=Lower
6-72
x=1
)p H Σ p(x
x=0
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ.
• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺼﻠﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ) (PVﺍﻭ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ) (PRCﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ.
.1ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Financialﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 1ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 2ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ
7
• }} … {SIMPLEﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ{
• }} … {COMPNDﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ{
• }} … {CASHﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ )ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ({
• }} … {AMORTZNﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ{
• }} … {CONVERTﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ{
• }} … {COSTﺍﻟﺘﻜﻔﻠﺔ ،ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ،ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ{
• }} … {DAYSﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ/ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ{
• }} … {DEPRECﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ{
• }} … {BONDﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪ{
7-1
kﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ
Payment u
• } … {END}/{BEGINﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ }ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ{}/ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ{
Date Mode u
• } … {360}/{365ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺔ }ﻳﻮﻡ}/{365-ﻳﻮﻡ{360-
) Periods/YR. uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ(
• }} … {Semi}/{Annualﺳﻨﻮﻱ{}/ﻧﺼﻒ ﺳﻨﻮﻱ{
Graph Color u
• } … {Black}/{Blue}/{Red}/{Magenta}/{Green}/{Cyan}/{Yellowﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﳋﻂ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ.
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻲ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) 6(GRAPHﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !1(TRACEﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ،
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ e
ﻳﻌﺮﺽ SFV, SI, PVﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ dﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !f(FORMATﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ
ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Graph Colorﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻲ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻲ ،Axes :ﻭ ،Gridﻭ
.Dual Screen
• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ،ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ CASHﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ )ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺴﺤﺎﺑﺎﺕ( ﻭ TIMEﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ(.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Backgroundﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻲ .ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
.(5-10ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻻﺣﻆ ﺑﺄﻧﻚ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻲ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻲ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ )ﺑﻬﺖ (I/Oﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (5-12
7-2
.2ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ.
uﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
I%
100
I%
=i
100
ﻭﺿﻊ 365ﻳﻮﻡ
=i
ﻭﺿﻊ 360ﻳﻮﻡ
SI' = n × PV × i
365
SI' = n × PV × i
360
'SI = –SI
) 'SFV = –(PV + SI
: SI
: n
: PV
: I%
: SFV
ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ
ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(SIMPLEﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 1ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ.
)1(SIMPLE
......... nﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ )ﺍﻳﺎﻡ(
....... I%ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ
....... PVﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ.
• }} … {SIﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ{
• }} … {SFVﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ{
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• }} … {REPEATﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ{
• }} … {GRAPHﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{
7-3
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎﹰ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !1(TRACEﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻭ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ eﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ :ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ) ← (PVﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ
ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ) ← (SIﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ) .(SFVﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ dﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ.
.3ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ.
PV, PMT, FV, n u
I%≠0
PV + β × FV
)PV = – (α × PMT + β × FV
PV + α × PMT
β
α
}
– = FV
– = PMT
(1+ iS) × PMT – FV × i
(1+ iS) × PMT + PV × i
{
log
)log (1+ i
=n
I%=0
)PV = − (PMT × n + FV
PV + FV
n
– = PMT
)FV = − (PMT × n + PV
PV + FV
PMT
–=n
1–β
–n
), β = (1 + i
i
I%
)............................... (P/Y = C/Y = 1
100
C/Y
P/Y
I%
(1+
)ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ) –1 .....
] 100 × [C/Y
ﺍﻋﻼﻩ(
{
× )α = (1+ i × S
0 ......... End :Payment
= i
7-4
)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(
1 ......... Begin :Payment
)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(
{
=S
I %u
) iﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ(
) iﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ( ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ.
PV + α × PMT + β × FV = 0
ﺍﻟﻰ I %ﻣﻦ ) iﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ(
)i × 100 ................................. (P/Y = C/Y = 1
}
)ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ( –1 × C/Y × 100...
P/Y
C/Y
) (1+ i
{{
= I%
.......... nﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ
........ FVﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ
........ I%ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺔ
........P/Yﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ
........ PVﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ
....... C/Yﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ
..... PMTﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ
• ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﻟﻺﻳﺪﺍﻉ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ) ،(+ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ).(-
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(COMPNDﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 1ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ.
)2(COMPND
......... nﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ
....... I%ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ
....... PVﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ :ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ(
.... PMTﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ )ﺩﻓﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ،ﺍﻳﺪﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ(
....... FVﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ )ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ،ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ(
...... P/Yﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ
...... C/Yﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ
7-5
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ ) (nﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ) (PVﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ) (FVﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ،
ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ) PVﺍﻭ (FVﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ
ﺑﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ .ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ.
• }} … {nﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ{
• }} … {I%ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ{
• }} … {PVﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ{ )ﻗﺮﺽ :ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ :ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ(
• }} … {PMTﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ{ )ﻗﺮﺽ :ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ ،ﻭﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ :ﺍﻹﻳﺪﺍﻉ(
• }} … {FVﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ{ )ﻗﺮﺽ :ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻉ ،ﻭﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ :ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ(
• }} … {AMORTZNﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ{
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• }} … {REPEATﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ{
• }} … {AMORTZNﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ{
• }} … {GRAPHﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎﹰ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !1(TRACEﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻭ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ.
7-6
.4ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ )ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ(
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﺍﺼﻮﻡ ) (DCFﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﺠﻤﻊ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﲟﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ.
ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ.
• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ )(NPV
• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ )(NFV
• ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ )(IRR
• ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ )(PBP
ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﻛﺎﳌﺒﲔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ.
CF7
CF6
CF5
CF2 CF3 CF4
CF1
CF0
ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﲤﺜﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺑـ .CF0ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑـ ،CF1ﻭ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﻨﺘﲔ ﺑـ ،CF2ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ.
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻻﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﺪﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﺻﻼ ﹰ.
NPV u
I%
100
=i
CF2
CF3
CFn
CF1
+
+
+
…
+
(1+ i) (1+ i)2 (1+ i)3
(1+ i)n
NPV = CF0 +
:nﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ 254
NFV u
NFV = NPV × (1 + i )n
IRR u
CF2
CF3
CFn
CF1
+
+
+
…
+
(1+ i) (1+ i) 2 (1+ i) 3
(1+ i) n
0 = CF0 +
ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ،NPV = 0 ،ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ IRRﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻟـ .i × 100ﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺓ ،ﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺃﻥ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﲤﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺼﻞ NPVﻓﻌﻼ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ .ﻭ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ IRRﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ NPVﺗﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ.
7-7
PBP u
CFk
(1 + i)k
)0 .................................. (CF0 > 0
n
Σ
k
= NPVn
=0
NPVn
)ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ( ...
–n
NPVn+1 – NPVn
{
= PBP
:nﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ NPVn < 0ﺃﻭ NPVn+1 > 0ﺃﻭ 0
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(CASHﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 1ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ.
)3(CASH
....... I%ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ
...... Cshﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 5('LISTﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
• }} … {NPVﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ{
• }} … {IRRﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ{
• }} … {PBPﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ{
• }} … {NFVﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ{
• }} … {'LISTﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ{
• }} … {LISTﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ{
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• }} … {REPEATﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ{
• }} … {GRAPHﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎﹰ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !1(TRACEﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻭ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ.
7-8
.5ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮﻱ ،ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ
ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﳌﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ.
uﺍ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
a
ﺩﻓﻊ 1
c
b
1 ............ PM1 ................... PM2 .......... Last
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺎﺕ
:aﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ (INT) PM1
:bﺍﳊﺼﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ (PRN) PM1
:cﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ (BAL) PM2
e
ﺩﻓﻊ 1
d
1............. PM1................ PM2 ............. Last
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺎﺕ
:dﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ PM1ﻟﻠﺪﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ (ΣPRN) PM2
:eﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ PM1ﻟﻠﺪﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ (ΣINT) PM2
* = a + bﺩﻓﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )(PMT
)a : INTPM1 = I BALPM1–1 × i I × (PMT sign
b : PRNPM1 = PMT + BALPM1–1 × i
c : BALPM2 = BALPM2–1 + PRNPM2
d : Σ PRN = PRNPM1 + PRNPM1+1 + … + PRNPM2
PM2
PM1
e : Σ INT = INTPM1 + INTPM1+1 + … + INTPM2
PM2
PM1
7-9
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Endﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩBAL0 = PV :
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Beginﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ PRN1 = PMT :ﻭ INT1 = 0
uﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻲ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ )ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ I%ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ )'(I%
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ.
}
] [C/Y
{
] [P/Y
I%
I%' = (1+
) –1 × 100
] 100 × [C/Y
ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ
ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ.
i = I%'÷100
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 4(AMORTZNﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 1ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ.
)4(AMORTZN
...... PM1ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ﺍﻻﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ 1ﺇﻟﻰ n
...... PM2ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ 1ﺇﻟﻰ n
......... nﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ
....... I%ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ
....... PVﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ
.... PMTﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺴﻂ
....... FVﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ
...... P/Yﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ
...... C/Yﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ
7-10
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
• }} … {BALﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ {PM2
• }} … {INTﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ {PM1
• }} … {PRNﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ {PM1
• }} … {ΣINTﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ PM1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ {PM2
• }} … {ΣPRNﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ PM1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ {PM2
• }} … {COMPNDﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ{
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• }} … {REPEATﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ{
• }} … {COMPNDﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ{
• }} … {GRAPHﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎﹰ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !1(TRACEﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻭ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻭﻻ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !1(TRACEﻳﻌﺮﺽ INTﻭ PRNﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ .n = 1ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ eﺗﻈﻬﺮ INT
ﻭ PRNﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ،n = 2ﻭ ،n = 3ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ.
7-11
.6ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ
ﺗﺒﲔ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ.
ﹼ
uﺻﻴﻐﺔ
n
APR/100
EFF = 1+
–1 × 100
n
–1 × n ×100
1
n
: APRﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ )(%
: EFFﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ )(%
:ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ
n
EFF
APR = 1+
100
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 5(CONVERTﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 1ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ.
)5(CONVERT
......... nﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ
........ I%ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ.
• }} … {'EFFﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ{
• }} … {'APRﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ{
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• }} … {REPEATﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ{
7-12
.7ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻔﻠﺔ ،ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ،ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ،ﻭﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ.
uﺻﻴﻐﺔ
MRG
100
–CST = SEL 1
CST
MRG
–1
100
CST
×100
–MRG(%) = 1
SEL
= SEL
: CSTﺍﻟﺘﻜﻔﻠﺔ
: SELﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ
: MRGﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(COSTﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 2ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
)6(g)1(COST
....... Cstﺍﻟﺘﻜﻔﻠﺔ
........Selﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ
....... Mrgﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ.
• }} … {COSTﺍﻟﺘﻜﻔﻠﺔ{
• }} … {SELLﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ{
• }} … {MARGINﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ{
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• }} … {REPEATﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ{
7-13
.8ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ/ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﲔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﲔ ،ﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺁﺧﺮ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(DAYSﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 2ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ/ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ.
)6(g)2(DAYS
......... d1ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ 1
......... d2ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ 2
......... Dﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻻ d1ﺍﻭ .d2ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
ﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ
ﻫﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ،ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ.
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
• }} … {PRDﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ d1ﺍﻟﻰ {(d2 – d1) d2
• } d1+D} … {d1+Dﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ){(d1 + D
• } d1-D} … {d1–Dﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ){(d1 – D
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• }} … {REPEATﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ{
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺇﻣﺎ 365 -ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻭ 360 -ﻳﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ/ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ،ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ
ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ 360 -ﻳﻮﻡ .ﺍﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
)ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ) +ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ(
)ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ( – )ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ(
• ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻮ 1ﻳﻨﺎﻳﺮ 1901 ،ﺍﻟﻰ 31ﺩﻳﺴﻤﺒﺮ.2099 ،
7-14
• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ 360 -ﻳﻮﻡ
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ 360ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ d1ﻭ d2ﻫﻤﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺒﺮﺍﻳﺮ )ﻳﻮﻡ 28ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ،ﻭ ﻳﻮﻡ 29ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺴﺔ( ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ
d2ﻛﻴﻮﻡ .30
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ d1ﻫﻮﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺒﺮﺍﻳﺮ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ d1ﻛﻴﻮﻡ .30
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ d2ﻫﻮ ﻳﻮﻡ 31ﻣﻦ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻭ d1ﻫﻮ ﻳﻮﻡ 30ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻡ 31ﻣﻦ ﺷﻬﺮ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ d2ﻛﻴﻮﻡ .30
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ d1ﻫﻮ ﻳﻮﻡ 31ﻣﻦ ﺷﻬﺮ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ d1ﻛﻴﻮﻡ .30
.9ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ
ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﺿﻪ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ )ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ
ﺳﻨﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ.
• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ – ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ) ،(SLﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ – ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ) ،(FPﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ– ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ – ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ) ،(SYDﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ -
ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ )،(DB
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﳌﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ .ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺒﻠﻎ ﻏﻴﺮ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻨﺔ .jth
uﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ – ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ )(SL
: SLj
:
n
: PV
: FV
:
j
: Y−1
}(PV–FV ) {Y–1
u
n
12
) (PV–FV
= SLj
n
}(PV–FV ) 12–{Y–1
u
= SLn+1
n
12
= SL1
ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺔ j
ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﻔﻴﺪﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ(
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﺘﺮﻳﺔ
ﺳﻨﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ.
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ.
)({Y–1}≠12
uﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ – ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ )(FP
: FPjﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺔ j
: RDVjﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ
j
: I%ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ
}I% {Y–1
FP1 = PV × 100 × 12
I%
× ) FPj = (RDVj–1 + FV
100
)FPn+1 = RDVn ({Y–1}≠12
RDV1 = PV – FV – FP1
RDVj = RDVj–1 – FPj
)({Y–1}≠12
RDVn+1 = 0
7-15
uﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ – ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ – ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ )(SYD
}{Y–1
)n (n +1
– n' = n
2
12
)ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ' + 2*nﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ' +1)(nﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ '(n
= 'Z
2
n
}{Y–1
×
) (PV – FV
= SYD1
Z
12
n'– j+2
))(PV – FV – SYD1
( = SYDj
)( j≠1
'Z
n'– (n +1)+2
}12–{Y–1
( = SYDn+1
× ))(PV – FV – SYD1
)({Y–1}≠12
'Z
12
=Z
RDV1 = PV – FV – SYD1
: SYDjﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺔ j
: RDVjﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ j
RDVj = RDVj –1 – SYDj
uﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ -ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ )(DB
I%
Y–1
×
100n
12
: DBjﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺔ j
: RDVjﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ
ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ j
: I%ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ
× DB1 = PV
RDV1 = PV – FV – DB1
I%
100n
× ) DBj = (RDVj–1 + FV
RDVj = RDVj–1 – DBj
)({Y–1}≠12
DBn +1 = RDVn
)({Y–1}≠12
RDVn+1 = 0
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(DEPRECﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 2ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﻴﺔ.
)6(g)3(DEPREC
.......... nﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﻔﻴﺪﺓ
........ I%ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ) ،(FPﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ
ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ )(DB
........ PVﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ(
........ FVﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﺘﺮﻳﺔ
........... jﺳﻨﺔ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ.
...... Y−1ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ.
7-16
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
• }} … {SLﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ jﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ{
• }} .. {FP} ... {FPﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ jﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ{
}} .. {I%ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ{
• }} … {SYDﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ jﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ{
• }} … {DBﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ jﺍﶈﺴﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ{
ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
}{SYD} − {GRAPH
}{SYD
}{SYD} − {TABLE
ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• }} … {REPEATﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ{
• }} … {TABLEﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{
• }} … {GRAPHﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ{
.10ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ
ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ.
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ " "Date Modeﻭ ""Periods/YR.
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(7-2
uﺻﻴﻐﺔ
D
) (d2ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ
B
A
ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ
) (d1ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ
ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ
7-17
: PRCﺳﻌﺮ ﻛﻞ 100ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ
: CPNﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻌﺮ )(%
: YLDﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ )(%
A
:ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺤﻘﺔ
M
:ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ )=1ﺳﻨﻮﻱ،ﻭ =2ﻧﺼﻒ ﺳﻨﻮﻱ(
N
:ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ.
: RDVﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻭ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻟﻜﻞ 100ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ
D
:ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ.
B
:ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ = D − A
: INTﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻘﺔ
: CSTﺳﻌﺮ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ
• ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ.
CPN
)
CPN
M
×
A
D
M
(+
)
RDV +
YLD/100
M
×
B
D
– = PRC
( 1+
• ﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ
CPN
CPN
M
×
A
D
M
+
) (k–1+B/D
)
RDV
–Σ
N
YLD/100
M
k=1
(1+
) (N–1+B/D
CST = PRC + INT
)
YLD/100
M
CPN
M
– = PRC
(1+
×
A
D
– = INT
uﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ )(YLD
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 4(BONDﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 2ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ.
)6(g)4(BOND
7-18
......... d1ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ )ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ(
......... d2ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ )ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ(
..... RDVﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻜﻞ 100ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ
..... CPNﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ
..... PRCﺳﻌﺮ ﻛﻞ 100ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ
......YLDﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ
• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﻮ 1ﻳﻨﺎﻳﺮ , 1902ﺍﻟﻰ 31ﺩﻳﺴﻤﺒﺮ .2097
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
• }} … {PRCﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪ ) ،(PRCﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺤﻘﺔ )،(INTﻭ ﺗﻜﻔﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪ ){(CST
• }} … {YLDﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ{
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
}{PRC} − {MEMO
}{PRC} − {GRAPH
ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• }} … {REPEATﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ{
• }} … {GRAPHﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{
• }} … {MEMOﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ{
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ MEMO
ﻳﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ MEMO
• ﹼ
... PRDﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ d1ﺍﻟﻰ d2
........Nﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ
........ Aﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺤﻘﺔ
........ Bﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )(D−A
....... Dﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ
7-19
}{PRC
• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ MEMOﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ,ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ) (CPDﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ
ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ .ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Date Modeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﻮ "."365
.11ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻉ ﻟﺴﻨﺘﲔ )–730ﻳﻮﻡ( ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺽ 300ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ
ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ .5%ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻝ .365
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ.
*)K6(g)6(g)2(FINANCE
1(SIMPLE)1(SI)hda,f,
daa)w
)2(SFV)hda,f,daa
w
* ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
).K6(g)6(g)6(g)1(FINANCE
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )) (!m(SET UPﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ " ."Date Modeﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ) ،DateMode365ﻭ (DateMode360ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
• ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ "ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-48
7-20
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ.
.1ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
)ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ(
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﺎ.
ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
.2ﹼ
.3ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
.4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ.
• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ :ﻣﻦ Aﺍﻟﻲ 0 , ~, ’, {,}, Zﺍﻟﻰ 9
• ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ 32ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ) (cm2ﻭ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ) (cm3ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
ﻃﻮﻝ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﻫﻮ 7, 10, 15ﺳﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .OCTA
ﻭ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ Sﻭ ﺣﺠﻢ Vﻟﻠﻤﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻪ Aﻣﻌﺮﻑ.
A
'
2
'S = 2
3 A2, V = –––– A3
3
8-1
8
m Program 1
3(NEW)j(O)I(C)/(T)v(A)w 2
!J(PRGM)4(?)aav(A)6(g)5(:) 3
)^(c*!x(')d*av(A)x6(g)6(g)5
!x(')c/d*av(A)Md
JJ
1(EXE) 4ﺃﻭ w
)hwﻗﻴﻤﺔ (A
Sﻋﻨﺪ 7 = A
Vﻋﻨﺪ 7 = A
w
ww
baw
Sﻋﻨﺪ 10 = A
Vﻋﻨﺪ 10 = A
w
ww
bfw
Sﻋﻨﺪ 15 = A
Vﻋﻨﺪ 15 = A
w*1
* 1ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ>" w :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ<" .Prog
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﹼ ﺬ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ /ﻳﻌﺎﺩ
ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺑـ ">ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ<" Prog
.2ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ
u
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ } {LOADﻭ } {NEWﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
• } ... {EDIT}/{EXEﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ }ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ{}/ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ{
• }} ... {NEWﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ{
• } ... {DEL-ALL}/{DELETEﻳﺤﺬﻑ }ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ{}/ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ{
• } ... {RENAME}/{SEARCHﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ }ﺑﺤﺚ{}/ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ{
• } ... {SAVE • ASﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﺺ.
• } ... {LOADﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻳﺤﻔﻈﻪ.
•}
{ ...ﲢﻤﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻭ ﻳﺰﻳﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ.
8-2
uﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
• }} ... {BASE}/{RUNﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ{}/ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ{ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
•}
{ } ...ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ{
• }} ... {SYMBOLﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ{
uﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ——
) … 1(RUNﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ
• }} ... {BOTTOM}/{TOPﺍﻋﻠﻰ{}/ﺍﺳﻔﻞ{ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
• }} ... {SEARCHﺑﺤﺚ{
• }} ... {MENUﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ{
• }{RECURSION}/{TABLE}/{DYNA}/{GRAPH}/{LIST}/{MAT}/{STAT
} ...ﺍﺣﺼﺎﺀ{}/ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ{}/ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ{}/ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ{}/ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ{}/ﺟﺪﻭﻝ{}/ﻋﻮﺩﻳﺔ{ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
}ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ{
• }... {A⇔a
ﹼ
• }} ... {CHARﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﺸﺪﺩﺓ{
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !J(PRGMﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ) (PRGMﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• }} ... {COMMANDﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ{
• }} ... {CONTROLﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ{
• }} ... {JUMPﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﺮ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ{
• }^{ ... {?}/ﺍﻣﺮ }ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ{}/ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ{
• } ... {DISPLAY}/{CLEARﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﺮ}ﻣﺴﺢ{}/ﻋﺮﺽ{
• }} ... {RELATNLﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ{
• }} ... {I/Oﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ /ﲢﻜﻢ {I/O
• }} ... {:ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ–ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ{
• }} ... {STRﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ{
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 8-11ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ.
• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !m(SET UPﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
• {ANGLE}/{COORD}/{GRID}/{AXES}/{LABEL}/{DISPLAY}/{SKT/LIN}/{DRAW}/{DERIV}/
{BACK}/{FUNC}/{SIMUL}/{SGV-WIN}/{LIST}/{LOCUS}/{TBL-VAR}/{ΣDISP}/{RESID}/
{COMPLEX}/{FRAC}/{Y=SPEED}/{DATE}/{PMT}/{PERIODS}/{INEQ}/{SIMP}/{Q1Q3}/
}{P/L-CLR
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 1-34ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ.
• ﺿﻐﻂ ) !f(FORMATﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ/ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﻳﻦ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (8-28ﻭ"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-29
8-3
uﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ —— *)2(BASE
* ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(BASEﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑـ Bﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
• }{TOP}/{BOTTOM}/{SEARCH
• }{MENU
• }} ... {d~oﻋﺸﺮﻱ{}/ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ{}/ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ{}/ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ{ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ
• }} ... {LOGICﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ{
• } ... {DISPLAYﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ }ﻋﺸﺮﻱ{}/ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ{}/ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ{}/ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ{
• }{A⇔a}/{SYMBOL
• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !J(PRGMﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ) (PRGMﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• }} ... {Progﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ{
• }^{{JUMP}/{?}/
• }} ... {RELATNLﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ{
• }} ... {:ﺃﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ-ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ{
• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !m(SET UPﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
• }{Dec}/{Hex}/{Bin}/{Oct
• ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !f(FORMATﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ .ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-28
.3ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
kﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ "ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺱ" ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ" .ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ.
• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺗﻚ.
uﻟﻠﻘﻀﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ،ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ
ﺣﺪﺙ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ .ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ
ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ .ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ "ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺱ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (α-1ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ
ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ.
8-4
• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺎ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ.
uﻟﻠﻘﻀﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺳﻴﺌﺔ
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﻚ .ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ.
).......... 1(TOPﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
).. 2(BOTTOMﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
kﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ " "Aﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻰ ﺏ OCTA
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(SEARCHﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ.
)3(SEARCH
)av(A
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ .ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ*.
1
.4ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(SEARCHﺍﻭ wﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ
2
ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ*.
* 1ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "Not Foundﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
* 2ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ.
8-5
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ )_( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )^( ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ
ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ
ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
• ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﻋﺜﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺨﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Aﳌﺴﺢ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺗﻚ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ.
.4ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﳌﻠﻒ
kﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺧﺎﺹ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).4(DELETE
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻲﺀ.
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).5(DEL-ALL
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻲﺀ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ .ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ 11
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ".
8-6
kﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ
uﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﻭﻝ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ OCTA
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(g)1(SEARCHﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ
ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ.
)6(g)1(SEARCH
)j(O)I(C)/(T
.2ﺍﺻﻐﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ.
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "Not Foundﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﺍﺫﺍ
ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﳌﺴﺢ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
kﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ
ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).6(g)2(RENAME
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﺰﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ
" ."Already Existsﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Aﺃﻭ Jﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ.
kﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺄﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﺺ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ
ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺄﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌ ﹼﺪﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ
ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
8-7
uﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻛﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ
ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ.
ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
__r
__t
__s
__q
__p
__x
__d
__+
__-
r
θ
ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ /ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ
"
ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ /ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ
×
÷
+
−
• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
) 'Program Mode: RUNﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ (RUN
) 'Program Mode: BASEﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ (BASE
• ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ
ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ .ﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻧﺺ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﶈﻮﻝ.
• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﲟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ .ﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ،ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ
ﲟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ
ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ⇔ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-59
uﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
.1ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(g)3(SAVE • AS
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .ﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "! "Completeﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻪ .ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ
ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
• ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ PROGRAMﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﲢﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﺎ
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ،ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ
"ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ" ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
8-8
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻤﻰ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭﻻ
ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (8-10ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ
ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ.
uﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ USBﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ / PROGRAM /@MainMem/Storage Memoryﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (13-5
uﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﲢﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻫﻮ
ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﹰ ﻛﺎﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ،ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ .ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ
"ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-8
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ .ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ
ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ.
.1ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺬﻭﺭ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ 13ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ".
.2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
.3ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(g)4(LOAD
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺬﻭﺭ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
).1(OPEN
8-9
kﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺪﺩ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ.
• ﻻ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
uﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(NEWﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﳌﻠﻒ
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )
( 5ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ .ﺍﻵﻥ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
.4ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !J(QUITﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ
ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ
ﺍﶈﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
uﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ
.1ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )
( 6(g)5ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ.
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
uﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
.1ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻨﻪ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )
( 6(g)5ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
.3ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
8-10
ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭk
. ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀﻩc ﻭf ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ، ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.1
.2(EDIT) ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ.2
. ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞw ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ.3
."• ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺤﻤﻰ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ.5
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮk
8-27 ................................................RclCapt
8-15 ....................................................Break
8-24 .............................................. Receive(
8-24 ................................ CloseComport38k
8-24 ..........................................Receive38k
8-19 .............................................. ClrGraph
8-16 ..................................................Return
8-19 ...................................................ClrList
8-24 ...................................................Send(
8-20 .................................................. ClrMat
8-24 .............................................. Send38k
8-20 ................................................. ClrText
8-17 ..................................................... Stop
8-20 ................................................... ClrVct
8-25 ............................................... StrCmp(
8-20 ........................... DispF-TbI, DispR-TbI
8-26 ..................................................StrInv(
8-14 ......................................... Do~LpWhile
8-26 ................................................ StrJoin(
8-20 ............................................ DrawDyna
8-26 .................................................StrLeft(
8-20 ..............DrawFTG-Con, DrawFTG-Plt
8-26 .................................................StrLen(
8-21 ....................................... DrawGraph
8-26 .................................................StrLwr(
8-21 ........................DrawR-Con, DrawR-Plt
8-26 .................................................StrMid(
8-21 ................... DrawRΣ-Con, DrawRΣ-Plt
8-26 .............................................. StrRight(
8-21 .............................................. DrawStat
8-27 ............................................ StrRotate(
8-21 ............................................. DrawWeb
8-27 ............................................... StrShift(
8-17 ....................................... ( )ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪDsz
8-27 ................................................. StrSrc(
8-25 ......................................................Exp(
8-27 .................................................StrUpr(
8-25 ..............................................Exp'Str(
8-15 ..................................While~WhileEnd
8-14 ............................For~To~(Step~)Next
8-12 .......................................(? )ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
8-22 ..................................................Getkey
8-12 ....................................... (^ )ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ
8-17 .............................................. Goto~Lbl
8-13 ................................. ( )ﺃﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ – ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ:
8-13 ...........................If~Then~(Else~)IfEnd
8-13 ..................................... (_ )ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ
8-18 ......................................... ( )ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪIsz
8-13 .............................. (’ )ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ
8-23 .................................................. Locate
8-18 ......................................... ( )ﺭﻣﺰ ﲡﺎﻭﺯS
8-19 .................................................... Menu
8-24 .......... (= )ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ, ≠, >, <, ≥, ≤
8-24 .................................OpenComport38k
8-27 ...................................( )ﻳﻨﻀﻢ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ+
8-16 ..................................................... Prog
8-22 .............................................PlotPhase
8-11
ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ.
ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ
ﹼ
}ﺍﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﺠﻌﺪﺓ{ ................ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻌﺪﺓ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ،ﻭ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ .ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﻮﺍﺱ
ﺍﻌﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ.
]ﺍﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ[ ..................ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ .ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺃﻣﺮ.
ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ..................ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﻙ (A,10, 10 + 20ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺛﻮﺍﺑﺖ ،ﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﺛﻮﺍﺑﺖ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ
ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ.
ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ........................ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺣﺮﻓﻴﺔ )ﻙ .(AB
kﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ
? )ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ> :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ< → ? ">ﻃﻠﺐ<" >,ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ< → ?
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ? → A :
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻳﻌﻄﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﻭﻳﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻟﺐ،
ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ "?" ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺎ ﹼ
ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ .ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻟﺐ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ
"?>ﻃﻠﺐ<" ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺺ ﺣﺘﻰ 255ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻠﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ.
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ،ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ – ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﻭﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ،ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) .(fnﻭﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ
) .(Ynﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻛﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ.
^ )ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ(
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻳﻌﻄﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ.
• ﻭ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﺘﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ wﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ.
8-12
) :ﺃﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ-ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ(
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﲔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﺧﻼﻓﺎ ﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ )^( ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺄﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻦ.
• ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﺑـ _ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ.
_ )ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ(
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺧﻂ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ.
’ )ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ(
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﺎ )’( ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ-
ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ) (:ﺃﻭ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ )_( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ )^( ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻨﺺ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲡﺎﻫﻠﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ.
kﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )(COMMAND
If~Then~(Else~)IfEnd
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ Then-ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ If-ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ( .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ Else-ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ If-ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ) .(0ﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﹼ ﺬ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ IfEnd-ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻥ Then-ﺃﻭ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻥ.Else-
ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ:
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<
IfEnd
_
:
^
_
:
^
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ< Then
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<
_
:
^
_
:
^
8-13
>ﺣﺎﻟﺔ<
If
ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ< Else
_
:
^
ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
)If ~ Then ~ IfEnd (1
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ Then-ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .IfEnd
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ،ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .IfEnd
)If ~ Then ~ Else ~ IfEnd (2
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ Then-ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .IfEnd
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ،ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ Else-ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .IfEnd
For~To~(Step~)Next
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺑﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ For-ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ .Next-ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻊ
ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ،ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ .ﻳﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ> :ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ< > Toﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ< → >ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ< For
_
> : Nextﺑﻴﺎﻥ< >ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ< Step
^
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ:
• ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ A :ﺍﻟﻰ θ ،r ،Z
• ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ :ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ) ،sin x ،Aﺍﻟﺦ(.
• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ :ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ) ،sin x ،Aﺍﻟﺦ(.
• ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ :ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ(1 :
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ .1
• ﺟﻌﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ
ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ .ﻭ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﻘﺎﺹ
ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ.
Do~LpWhile
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ(.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
>ﺣﺎﻟﺔ<
ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ
LpWhile
_
:
^
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<
_
:
^
8-14
Do
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ( .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ) ،(0ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ
ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻥ.LpWhile-
• ﲟﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ،LpWhile-ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ )ﺍﳌﻔﺤﻮﺻﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ.
While~WhileEnd
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ(.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
WhileEnd
_
:
^
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<
_
:
^
>ﺣﺎﻟﺔ<
While
ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ( .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ) ،(0ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ
ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻥ.WhileEnd-
• ﲟﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ– ،Whileﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ )ﺍﳌﻔﺤﻮﺻﺔ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ.
kﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )(CONTROL
Break
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻘﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐBreak :
ﻳﻮﻗﻒ:
• ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻘﺔ.
• ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ،For-ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ،Do-ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ.While-
8-15
Prog
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻛﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ .ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،RUN-MATﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ" :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ" Prog
ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝProg "ABC" :
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ،ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﻭ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ
ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
• ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ،ﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺅﻩ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ.
ﺭﻭﺗﲔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ
ﺭﻭﺗﲔ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ
D
A
"Prog "D
I
J
"Prog "J
E
C
"Prog "I
"Prog "E
"Prog "C
ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ 4ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ 3ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ 2ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ 1
• ﻭ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ .ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ،ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ .Prog
• ﺍﻷﻣﺮ Goto~Lblﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﺎﳊﺎ ﹰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ .ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ Progﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ،ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ،RUN-Matrixﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ Progﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺗﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ.
Return
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻭﺗﲔ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐReturn :
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻣﺮ Returnﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻣﺮ Returnﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻭ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ.
8-16
Stop
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐStop :
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻱ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻧﺎﺷﻰﺀ.
kﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ )(JUMP
) Dszﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ(
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻫﻮ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻧﻘﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑـ ،1ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺮﺍ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<
_
:
^
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ≠ 0
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<
> :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ< Dsz
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ = 0
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ A :ﺍﻟﻰ θ ،r ،Z
]ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ[ : Dsz Bﻳﻨﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ Bﺑـ .1
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺎﻧﻘﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑـ ،1ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮﻫﺎ )ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ( .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ،ﻳﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ،ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻷﻣﺮ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ) ،(:ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﺮﺝ )^( ،ﺍﻭ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ )_(.
Goto~Lbl
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ> :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ< > ~ Lblﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ< Goto
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ :ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ) 0ﺍﻟﻰ ،(9ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ (θ ،r ،Z
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ( ﻭ ) Lbl nﺣﻴﺚ nﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ
•
ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺟﺰﺋﲔ) Goto n :ﺣﻴﺚ nﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﹼ
ﹼ
ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ .(Goto nﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ Lbl-ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ nﳌﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻥ-
.Goto
• ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻃﺔ ﻭ ﲡﺎﻭﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ Lbl-ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﳌﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻥ ،Goto-ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
8-17
) Iszﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ(
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻫﻮ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑـ ،1ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺮﺍ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<
_
:
^
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ≠ 0
> :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ< Isz
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ = 0
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ A :ﺍﻟﻰ θ ،r ،Z
]ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ[ : lsz Aﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ Aﺑـ .1
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑـ ،1ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮﻫﺎ )ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ( .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ
ﺻﻔﺮ ،ﻳﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺻﻔﺮﺍﹰ ،ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ
) ،(:ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )^( ،ﺍﻭ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ )_(.
⇒ )ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ(
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻁ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<
_
:
^
ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ< ⇒ >ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ< >ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ< >ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ<
ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ:
• ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ /ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ :ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ (θ ،r ،Zﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ )ﻣﺜﻞ(A × 2 :
• ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ) =, ≠, >, <, ≥, ≤ :ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (8-24
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻳﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺗﲔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﻳﻦ ،ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﻳﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻸﻣﺮ ⇒ .ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ
ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ،ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ) ،(:ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ)^( ،ﺃﻭ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ )_(.
8-18
Menu
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>, :ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ >", <1ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ( >", "<1ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(<" Menu
>ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ >", , ... , "", <2ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ( "<2
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ) 0ﺍﻟﻰ ،(9ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ (θ ،r ،Z
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ >ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ >", ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ >", :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ< ClrList
ClrList
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1 :ﺍﻟﻰ Ans ،26
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑـ"ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ" .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ
ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺷﻴﺊ ﻟـ"ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ".
8-19
ClrMat
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ> :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ< ClrMat
ClrMat
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ A :ﺍﻟﻰ Ans ،Z
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑـ"ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ" .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺷﻴﺊ ﻟـ"ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ".
ClrText
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﲟﺴﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐClrText :
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﲟﺴﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ClrVct
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ> :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ< ClrVct
ClrVct
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ :ﻣﻦ Aﺇﻟﻰ Ans ،Z
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑـ "ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ" .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻓﻲ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻟـ "ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ".
kﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )(DISPLAY
ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ
DispF-Tbl, DispR-Tbl
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﺗﻨﺸﺊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• DispF-Tblﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ DispR-Tblﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ.
ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ
DrawDyna
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ
DrawFTG-Con, DrawFTG-Plt
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• DrawFTG-Conﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺘﺼﻼﹰ،ﻋﻨﺪ DrawFTG-Pltﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻧﻘﻄﻴﺎ ﹰ.
8-20
ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ
DrawGraph
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ
DrawR-Con, DrawR-Plt
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ،ﻣﻊ bn) anﺃﻭ (cnﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ nﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ,ﻣﻊ bn) anﺃﻭ (cnﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ n
ﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ.
• DrawR-Conﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻋﻨﺪ DrawR-Pltﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ
DrawRΣ-Con, DrawRΣ-Plt
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ،ﻣﻊ Σbn) Σanﺃﻭ (Σcnﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ nﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ,ﻣﻊ Σbn) Σanﺃﻭ (Σcnﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ
nﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ.
• DrawRΣ-Conﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ
ﹰ
ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ،ﻋﻨﺪ DrawRΣ-Pltﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
DrawStat
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ :ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ" ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .8-35
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
DrawWeb
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ /ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>] :ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ< >[,ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ< DrawWeb
ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ cn+1), 5 :ﺃﻭ DrawWeb an+1 (bn+1
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ /ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(.
• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑـ .30
8-21
PlotPhase
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-ﻭ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ.y-
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ> :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ>, :ﻗﻴﻤﺔ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ< Locate
>ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ< Locate
">ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<" >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ< Locate
]ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ[ "Locate 1, 1, "AB
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ:
• ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ :ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 7
• ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ :ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 21
• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ
• ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ :ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ )ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ( ﺍﻭ ﻧﺼﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ
ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ،7ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ .21
)← (21, 1
→ )(1, 1
)← (21, 7
→ )(1, 7
ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝCls_ :
"Blue Locate 7, 1, "CASIO FX
ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ " "CASIO FXﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ،ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ،ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ClrTextﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
8-23
(Receive( / Send
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻳﺮﺳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>) :ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ<(>) / Sendﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ<(Receive
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻳﺮﺳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ( ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ -ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ(
OpenComport38k / CloseComport38k
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﳌﻨﻔﺬ ) 3-pin COMﺍﳌﺴﻠﺴﻞ(.
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻣﺮ Receive38k/Send38kﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
Receive38k / Send38k
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ 38ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ> :ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ< Send38k
>ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ<
>ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ<
Receive38k
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ OpenComport38kﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ.
• ﻳﺠﻞ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ CloseComport38kﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﹰ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ.
kﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻁ )(RELATNL
≤ =, ≠, >, <, ≥,
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻁ
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ> :ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ< >ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ< >ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ<
ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ:
• ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ /ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ :ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ (θ ،r ،Zﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ )ﻣﺜﻞ(A × 2 :
• ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ=, ≠, >, <, ≥, ≤ :
8-24
kﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ
ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺺ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ )ﻛـ " ("123ﺍﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ )ﻛـ " ("x-1ﻛﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ) Locateﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-23
• ﻟﺘﻀﻤﲔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ )"( ﺃﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ (\) .ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ،ﺿﻊ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺎﺋﻼ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ )\(ﻗﺒﻞ
ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ)"( ﺃﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ)\(
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1ﻟﺘﻀﻤﲔ " Japan: "Tokyoﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
""\"Japan:\"Tokyo
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :2ﻟﺘﻀﻤﲔ main\abcﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
""main\\abc
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(CHAR)2(SYMBOLﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).!e(CATALOG
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ) Str 1ﺍﻟﻰ .(Str 20ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(2-8
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ") "+ﺻﺤﻔﺔ (8-27ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ )( ،StrCmp( ،Expﺍﻟﺦ( ﻛﺤﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ،ﻳﺘﻢ
ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ " "sinﻛﺤﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ.
(Exp
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ،ﻭ ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>"[)] :ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<"(Exp
(Exp'Str
ﻳﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ.
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻭ ﹼ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>[)] :ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ< >,ﺻﻴﻐﺔ<(Exp'Str
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )(Yn, r, Xt, Yt, X
ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ) (an, an+1, an+2, bn, bn+1, bn+2, cn, cn+1, cn+2ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) (fnﻛﺤﺠﺔ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ )>ﺻﻴﻐﺔ<(.
(StrCmp
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﺎﺭﻥ ">ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ "<1ﻭ ">ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ) "<2ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ(.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>"[)] :ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ >", "<2ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ StrCmp("<1
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﻭ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ 0ﻋﻨﺪ ">ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ >" = "<1ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ."<2
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ 1ﻋﻨﺪ ">ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ >" < "<1ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ."<2
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ -1ﻋﻨﺪ ">ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ >" > "<1ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ."<2
8-25
(StrInv
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>"[)] :ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<"(StrInv
(StrJoin
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻨﻀﻢ ">ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ "<1ﻭ ">ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ."<2
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>"[)] :ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ >", "<2ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ StrJoin("<1
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ") "+ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-27
(StrLeft
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻨﺴﺞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ nﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>", n[)] :ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<"(StrLeft
) n ،0 < n < 9999ﻫﻮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(
(StrLen
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎ(.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ>"[)] :ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<"(StrLen
(StrLwr
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ>"[)] :ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<"(StrLwr
(StrMid
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻝ n-ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻝ m-ﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>", n [,m)] :ﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<"( n ،0 < m < 9999 ،1 < n < 9999) StrMidﻭ mﻫﻤﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﺎﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﻥ(
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﺣﺬﻑ " "mﺳﻴﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻝ nﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ.
(StrRight
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻨﺴﺞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ nﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>", n[)] :ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<"( n ،0 < n < 9999) StrRightﻫﻮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(
8-26
(StrRotate
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻝ.n
) n ،–9999 < n < 9999ﻫﻮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>", [,n)] :ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<"(StrRotate
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ " "nﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ " "nﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻟﺐ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺬﻑ
" "nﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻝ.+1
ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ........ StrRotate("abcde", 2) :ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ""cdeab
(StrShift
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﳝﻴﻨﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ .n
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>", [,n)] :ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<"(StrShift
) n ،–9999 < n < 9999ﻫﻮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ " "nﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ " "nﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺬﻑ
" "nﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻝ.+1
ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ........ StrShift("abcde", 2) :ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ""cde
(StrSrc
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ">ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ "<1ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ )ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻝ nﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑـ ">ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ."<2ﻭﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻝ ">ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
،"<2ﻣﺒﺘﺪﺋﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻝ ">ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ."<1
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>"[,n)] :ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ >", "<2ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ StrSrc("<1
) n ،1 < n < 9999ﻫﻮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻝ ">ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ."<1
(StrUpr
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>"[)] :ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<"(StrUpr
) +ﻳﻨﻀﻢ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ(
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻨﻀﻢ ">ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ "<1ﻭ ">ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ."<2
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>" :ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ >"+"<2ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ "<1
ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ .............. "abc"+"de"→Str 1 :ﺗﻌﲔ " "abcdeﻝ.Str 1
kﺁﺧﺮ
RclCapt
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ> :ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ< RclCapt
)ﺭﻗﻢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ 1 :ﺍﻟﻰ (20
8-27
.6ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ
ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻭ ﻧﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ :RUN
Black, Blue, Red, Magenta, Green, Cyan, Yellow, ColorAuto, ColorClr
ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Black, Blue, Red, Magenta, Green, Cyan, Yellow :BASE
• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ
) !f(FORMAT)) !f(FORMAT)b(Color Commandﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .(BASE
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ.
ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ :RUN
)!f(FORMAT)b(Color Command)c(Blue
ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ !f(FORMAT)c(Blue) :BASE
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ColorClrﻭ ColorAutoﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (5-25ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ "= "Graph Yﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺚ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ).!4(SKETCH)5(GRAPH
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝRed Graph Y = X2 − 1 :
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻄﻂﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
Tangent, Normal, Inverse, PlotOn, PlotChg, F-Line, Line, Circle, Vertical, Horizontal, Text,
PxlOn, PxlChg, SketchNormal, SketchThick, SketchBroken, SketchDot, SketchThin
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝGreen SketchThin Circle 2, 1, 2 :
ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
> List nﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ< ) 1 = nﺍﻟﻰ (26
"ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ" > Listﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ<
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
]>ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ<[ > List nﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ< ) 1 = nﺍﻟﻰ (26
]>ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ<[ "ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ" > Listﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ<
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝBlue List 1 :
]Red List 1 [3
8-28
-
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎ ﹲ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ.
">ﻧﺺ<" )"ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ" ،ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ) Locate ،(8-30ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ) SetG-Color ،(8-23ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(8-32
) Plot/Line-Colorﺻﻔﺤﺔ (8-32
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ
ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ")ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (8-32ﻭ
"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-35
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﺗﻮﻓﹼﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ .ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ.
ColorNormal, ColorLighter
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
).!f(FORMAT)c(Paint Command
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ .ColorLighter
)!f(FORMAT)c(Paint Command)c(Lighter
• ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-35
8-29
kﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﻧﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺭﻓﺎﻗﻪ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ .ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ.
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﻋﺮﺽ
""CASIO
CASIO
?→X
?
"X =" ? → X
?=X
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
"Blue "CASIO
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ )^( ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ 21ﺣﺮﻓﺎ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﻼﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ 255ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ.
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ Programﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
uﳌﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﲔ )(Swap
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 1
ﳌﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﺼﻒ 2ﻭﺻﻒ 3ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = A
2
1
4
3
6
5
ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
_Swap A, 2, 3,
ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺪﻟﺔ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
Mat A
8-30
ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
uﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ )(`Row
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 2
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 4
ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
_ `Row 4, A, 2
ﺻﻒ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﻣﻀﺮﻭﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ
Mat A
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ )(`Row+
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 3
ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ،4ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺻﻒ 3
ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
_`Row+ 4, A, 2, 3
ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﻣﻀﺎﻓﺔ
ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﻣﻀﺮﻭﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ
Mat A
uﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻔﲔ )(Row+
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 4
ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻒ 2ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻒ 3ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1
ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
_Row+ A, 2, 3
ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
Mat A
8-31
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺱ
ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ .ﻭﻳﹸﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻋﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• V-Window
_View Window –5, 5, 1, –5, 5, 1
• ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
_ .................... Y = Typeﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
_"X2 – 3" → Y1*1
• ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
_SetG-Color Green, 1
• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
DrawGraph
* 1ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ Y1ﻣﻊ ) J4(GRAPH)1(Y)bﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻛـ
" "Yﻣﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
( ﺳﻴﺤﺪﺙ Syntax ERRORﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺖ
uﺗﺮﺍﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ
• V-Window
View Window , , , , , ,
>, , ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻝ ............ StoV-Win ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻝ ............RclV-Win ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< >,ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ< ..... SetG-Colorﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ 1 :ﺇﻟﻰ 20
>ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ< >,ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ< ..... SetG-Colorﻋﻨﺼﺮ ،bn+1 ،an+1ﺍﻟﺦ.
• Zoom
>ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ >, ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ< ................... StoPictﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ 1 :ﺍﻟﻰ 20
"ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻠﺪ\ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ" StoPict
>ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ< ................... RclPictﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ 1 :ﺍﻟﻰ 20
"ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻠﺪ\ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ" RclPict
• Sketch
>ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ< Plot/Line-Color
>ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ>, ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ>, ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ>, ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ>, ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< PxlOn
>ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< PxlOff
>ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< PxlChg
])[>ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ<(PxlTest
">ﻧﺺ<" >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< Text
>ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< Text
..............ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ 1 :ﺍﻟﻰ ،187ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ 1 :ﺍﻟﻰ 379
8-32
>ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< SketchThick
>ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< SketchBroken
>ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< SketchDot
>ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< SketchNormal
>ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< SketchThin
>ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ>, ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ>, ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ< Inverse
.................. Lineﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ
>ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ>, <2 Y-ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ>, <2 X-ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ>, <1 Y-ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔF-Line <1 X-
>ﻗﻴﻤﺔ Rﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ< >,ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ Y-ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ< >,ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ X-ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ< Circle
>ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔVertical ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔHorizontal [,aﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ< ..... BG-Pictﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ 1 :ﺍﻟﻰ 20
]" [,aﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ \ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ" BG-Pict
ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ " "aﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ.
• ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ )ﺍﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ(
BG-None
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
• ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
_ ... Y = Typeﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
_1 → D Start
_"AX2 − 3" → Y1*1
_5 → D End
_1 → D pitch
• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
_D Var A
DrawGraph
* 1ﺃﺩﺧﻞ Y1ﻣﻊ ) J4(GRAPH)1(Y)bﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻛـ
ﻣﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
8-33
( ﺳﻴﺤﺪﺙ Syntax ERRORﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺖ ""Y
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻋﺎ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
_1 → F Start
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂDrawFTG-Con :
_5 → F End
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂDrawFTG-Plt :
_1 → F pitch
• ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ
DispF-Tbl
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺪﻣﺞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .ﻭ
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻋﺎ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ
_ .... an+1 Typeﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ.
_"3an + 2" → an+1
_"4bn + 6" → bn+1
• ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
• ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ
_1 → R Start
_5 → R End
DispR-Tbl
• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
_1 → a0
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂDrawRΣ-Con ،DrawR-Con :
_2 → b0
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂDrawRΣ-Plt ،DrawR-Plt :
_1 → an Start
_3 → bn Start
• ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ /ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ
)ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻳﺐ(
DrawWeb an+1, 10
8-34
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ.
• ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ
)SortA (List 1, List 2, List 3
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺯﺓ )ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ(
• ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ
)SortD (List 1, List 2, List 3
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺯﺓ )ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ(
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ.
uﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ
ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ "S-Gph2", "S-Gph1") StatGraphﺍﻭ " ،("S-Gph3ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ:
• ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ /ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )(DrawOn/DrawOff
• Graph Type
• ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﶈﻮﺭ) x-ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(
• ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﶈﻮﺭ) y-ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(
• ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ) 1ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(
• Mark Type
• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،X&Y) ColorLinkﻭ ،OnlyXﻭ ،On ،OnlyYﻭ (X&Freq ،Off
• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ) Graph Colorﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ* ﺃﻭ (ColorAuto
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ " "Pieﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ:
• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ) %ﺍﻭ (Data
• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ " "Pieﺃﻭ " "Histﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ:
• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ )ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ* ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ (ColorAuto
• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )(ColorNormal, ColorLighter
• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ )ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ* ﺃﻭ (ColorClr
8-35
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ " "MedBoxﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ:
• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ /ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ
• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ )ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ*(
• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ) Whiskerﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ*(
• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺮﻓﺎﺕ )ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ*(
• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ )ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ* ﺃﻭ (ColorAuto
• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ )(ColorNormal, ColorLighter
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ " "Barﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ:
• ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻭﹼﻝ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(
• ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(
• ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ) Lengthﺃﻭ (Horizontal
• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ* ﺃﻭ (ColorAuto
• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )(ColorNormal, ColorLighter
• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ* ﺃﻭ (ColorClr
* ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ،ﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ،ﻭ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ،ﻭ ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ،ﻭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ،ﻭﺳﻤﺎﻭﻱ ،ﻭ ﺃﺻﻔﺮ
ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(6-2
• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻂ.xy
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Scatter, List 1, List 2, 1, Square, ColorLinkOff, ColorAuto
ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳋﻂ ،xyﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ " "Scatterﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑـ"."xyLine
• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, NPPlot, List 1, Square, ColorLinkOff, Blue
• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Hist, List 1, List 2, ColorLinkOff, Blue ColorLighter
• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﻜﺴﺮ.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Broken, List 1, List 2, ColorLinkOff, Blue
• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, N-Dist, List 1, List 2, Blue
• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, MedBox, List 1, 1, 1, Yellow, Green, Blue, Red
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ /ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ):1ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ :0 ،ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(
ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ
ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ
ﻟﻮﻥ Whisker
ﻟﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ
8-36
• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Linear, List 1, List 2, List 3, Blue
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻟﻸﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ " "Linearﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ
ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻖ.
ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻄﻲ Linear .................................
ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﻲ Log ...............................
ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ-ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂMed-Med .........................
ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﺳﻲ ExpReg(a·eˆbx) ..........................................
)ExpReg(a·bˆx
ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ Quad ...............................
ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻜﻌﻴﺒﻲ Cubic .............................
ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ Power .........................................
ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ Quart ..................................
• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳉﻴﺒﻲ.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Sinusoidal, List 1, List 2, Blue
• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Logistic, List 1, List 2, Blue
• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Pie, List 1, %, None, ColorLinkOff, ColorAuto ColorLighter, ColorClr
• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻁ.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Bar, List 1, None, None, StickLength, ColorLinkOff, Blue ColorLighter,
Black, Red ColorLighter, Black, Green ColorLighter, Black
ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ " "DrawStatﻋﻘﺐ ﺧﻂ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
_ ClrGraph
_ S-Wind Auto
_ {1, 2, 3} → List 1
_ {1, 2, 3} → List 2
_ S-Gph1 DrawOn, Scatter, List 1, List 2, 1, Square, ColorLinkOff, ColorAuto
DrawStat
8-37
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ
]DrawDistNorm , [,σ, μ
1
ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ*
ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ*
ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
* 1ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ .ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ μ = 0ﻭ .σ = 1
1
Upper – μ
σ
= ZUp
Lower – μ
σ
(x – μμ)2
= ZLow
2
dx
2σ
Upper
–
e
Lower
∫
p= 1
2πσ
• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ DrawDistNormﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ
ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻞﺀ
ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ZLow < x < ZUpﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ
• ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،pﻭ ،ZLowﻭ ZUpﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ،pﻭ ،ZLowﻭ
،ZUpﻭ pﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ .Ans
• ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖt-
>DrawDistT , , DrawDistChi , , DrawDistF , , , μ0ﻋﻨﺪ 1ﺃﻭ ">"
ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻝ " "ρ conditionﻭ "."β & ρ condition
• ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳊﺠﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻐﻂ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-33ﻭ "ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭ
ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ،ﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(6-66
• ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(6-69
• ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Z
:OneSampleZTestﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
OneSampleZTest "μ condition", μ0, σ, o, n
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ z, p, o, nﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ z, p, o, nﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAnsﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ .4
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
]OneSampleZTest "μ condition", μ0, σ, List[, Freq
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ z, p, o, sx, nﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ z, p, o, sx, nﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAnsﻣﻦ 1
ﺇﻟﻰ .5
8-45
:TwoSampleZTestﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ -2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ -Zﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
TwoSampleZTest "μ1 condition", σ1, σ2, o1, n1, o2, n2
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ z, p, o1, o2, n1, n2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ z, p, o1, o2, n1, n2ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ
ListAnsﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ .6
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
]]TwoSampleZTest "μ1 condition", σ1, σ2, List1, List2[, Freq1 [, Freq2
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ z, p, o1, o2, sx1, sx2, n1, n2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ z, p, o1, o2, sx1, sx2, n1,
n2ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAnsﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ .8
:OnePropZTest
ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Z-ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
OnePropZTest "p condition", p0, x, n
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ z, p, p̂, nﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ z, p, p̂, nﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAnsﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ .4
ﺟﺰﺀﺍﻥ :Z
ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Z-ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺘﲔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
TwoPropZTest "p1 condition", x1, n1, x2, n2
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ z, p, p̂ 1, p̂ 2, p̂, n1, n2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ z, p, p̂ 1, p̂ 2, p̂, n1, n2 ,ﻭ
ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAnsﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ .7
• ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ t
:OneSampleTTestﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ 1-ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.t-
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
OneSampleTTest "μ condition", μ0, o, sx, n
]OneSampleTTest "μ condition", μ0, List[, Freq
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ t, p, o, sx, nﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAnsﻣﻦ 1
ﺇﻟﻰ .5
:TwoSampleTTestﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ t-ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
]TwoSampleTTest "μ1 condition", o1, sx1, n1, o2, sx2, n2[,Pooled condition
TwoSampleTTest "μ1 condition", List1, List2, [, Freq1[, Freq2[,
]]] Pooled condition
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻤﻌﺔ = t, p, df, o1, o2, sx1, sx2, n1, n2 ،0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ
ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAnsﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ .9
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻤﻌﺔ = t, p, df, o1, o2, sx1, sx2, sp, n1, n2 ،1ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAnsﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ .10
ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ:
ﻳﺤﺪﺩ 0ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻤﻌﺔ ﻭ 1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ .ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ
ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻤﻌﺔ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ.
:LinRegTTest
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ t-ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
]LinRegTTest "β&ρ condition", XList, YList[, Freq
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ t, p, df, a, b, s, r, r2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ
ListAnsﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ .8
8-46
• ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ χ2
:ChiGOFTest
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ chi-Square goodnessﻟﻼﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
ChiGOFTest List 1, List 2, df, List 3
)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺻﻮﺩﺓ ،ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ،ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 3ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
(CNTRB
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ χ2, p, dfﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAnsﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ
.3ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ CNTRBﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .3
:ChiTest
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .Chi-Square
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
ChiTest MatA, MatB
) MatAﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺻﻮﺩﺓ ﻭ MatBﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ(.
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ χ2, p, dfﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAnsﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ
.3ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .MatB
• ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ F
:TwoSampleFTestﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ F-ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
TwoSampleFTest "σ1 condition", sx1, n1, sx2, n2
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ F, p, sx1, sx2, n1, n2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ
ListAnsﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ .6
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
]]TwoSampleFTest "σ1 condition", List1, List2, [, Freq1 [, Freq2
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ F, p, o1, o2, sx1, sx2, n1, n2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ
ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAnsﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ .8
• ANOVA
:OneWayANOVA
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ANOVAﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
OneWayANOVA List1, List2
)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ) (Aﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(.
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
Adf, Ass, Ams, AF, Ap, ERRdf, ERRss, ERRmsﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ
.Adf, SSa, MSa, Fa, pa, Edf, SSe, MSe
ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻝ MatAnsﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ.
AF Ap
0
0
Ams
Ass
Adf
ERRdf ERRss ERRms
= MatAns
:TwoWayANOVA
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ANOVAﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
TwoWayANOVA List1, List2, List3
)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ) (Aﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ )،(Bﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 3ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(.
8-47
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
Adf, Ass, Ams, AF, Ap, Bdf, Bss, Bms, BF, Bp, ABdf, ABss, ABms, ABF,
ABp, ERRdf, ERRss, ERRmsﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ Adf, SSa, MSa,
Fa, pa, Bdf, SSb, MSb, Fb, pb, ABdf, SSab, MSab, Fab, pab, Edf, SSe,
.MSe
ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻝ MatAnsﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
Ap
AF
Ams
Ass
Adf
Bp
BF
Bms
Bss
Bdf
ABss
ABdf
ABms ABF ABp
0
0
= MatAns
ERRdf ERRss ERRms
kﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
• ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ
365 ...... DateMode365ﻳﻮﻣﺎ
360 ...... DateMode360ﻳﻮﻣﺎ
• ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ
...............PmtBgnﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ
...............PmtEndﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ
• ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ
...... PeriodsAnnualﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ
......... PeriodsSemiﻧﺼﻒ ﺳﻨﻮﻱ
• ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﳌﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺠﺔ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ".
• ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ
:Smpl_SI
ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Smpl_SI(n, I%, PV
:Smpl_SFVﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Smpl_SFV(n, I%, PV
8-48
• ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ:
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ P/Yﻭ C/Yﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ،ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
P/Y=12ﻭ .C/Y=12
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ )(Cmpd_n(, Cmpd_I%
,(Cmpd_PV(, Cmpd_PMT(, Cmpd_FV(,ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ )ﺍﳊﺠﺞ( ﻭ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ) , n, I% ,PVﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(.ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ﻭ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ.
:Cmpd_n
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Cmpd_n(I%, PV, PMT, FV, P/Y, C/Y
:Cmpd_I%
ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Cmpd_I%(n, PV, PMT, FV, P/Y, C/Y
:Cmpd_PV
ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ)ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﻟﺪﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ(.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Cmpd_PV(n, I%, PMT, FV, P/Y, C/Y
:Cmpd_PMTﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﻘﺔ )ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﻟﺪﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ،ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ( ﳌﺪﺓ
ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Cmpd_PMT(n, I%, PV, FV, P/Y, C/Y
:Cmpd_FV
ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Cmpd_FV(n, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y
• ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻝ )ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ(
:Cash_NPVﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Cash_NPV(I%, Csh
:Cash_IRR
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Cash_IRR(Csh
:Cash_PBPﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Cash_PBP(I%, Csh
:Cash_NFVﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Cash_NFV(I%, Csh
• ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ
:Amt_BAL
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ .PM2
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Amt_BAL(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y
:Amt_INT
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻓﻌﺔ .PM1
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Amt_INT(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y
:Amt_PRN
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻓﻌﺔ .PM1
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Amt_PRN(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y
8-49
:Amt_ΣINT
ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ PM1ﺍﻟﻰ .PM2
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Amt_ΣINT(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y
:Amt_ΣPRNﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ PM1ﺍﻟﻰ .PM2
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Amt_ΣPRN(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y
• ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ
:Cnvt_EFF
ﺍﶈﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ.
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﹼ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Cnvt_EFF(n, I%
ﺍﶈﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻠﻴﺔ.
:Cnvt_APRﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﹼ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Cnvt_APR(n, I%
• ﺗﻜﻔﻠﺔ ،ﻭ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ،ﻭﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
:Cost
ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻔﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Cost(Sell, Margin
:Sell
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻔﻠﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Sell(Cost, Margin
:Margin
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻔﻠﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Margin(Cost, Sell
• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ /ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ
:Days_Prd
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ d1ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ d2ﻣﺤﺪﺩ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Days_Prd(MM1, DD1, YYYY1, MM2, DD2, YYYY2
• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪ
:Bond_PRCﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
= )Bond_PRC(MM1, DD1, YYYY1, MM2, DD2, YYYY2, RDV, CPN, YLD
}{PRC, INT, CST
:Bond_YLDﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Bond_YLD(MM1, DD1, YYYY1, MM2, DD2, YYYY2, RDV, CPN, PRC
8-50
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ.7
RUN ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
STAT
4(MENU) ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ
2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
DRAW
GRAPH
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
DrawOn
On
DrawOff
Off
S-Gph1_
S-Gph1
S-Gph2_
S-Gph2
S-Gph3_
S-Gph3
Scatter
Scatter
xyLine
xyLine
Hist
Hist
MedBox
Box
Bar
Bar
N-Dist
N-Dist
Broken
Broken
Linear
X
Med-Med
Med
Quad
X2
3
Cubic
X
4
Quart
X
Log
Log
*1 (8-57 )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
Power
Sinusoidal
NPPlot
Logistic
Pie
List_
*2 (8-57 )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
Power
Sin
NPPlot
Logistic
Pie
List
TYPE
DIST
CALC
MAT
LIST
GRAPH
Swap
½Row
½Row+
Row+
SortA
SortD
SEL
TYPE
DrawDistNorm_
DrawN
DrawDistT_
DrawT
DrawDistChi_
DrawC
DrawDistF_
DrawF
1-Variable_
1-VAR
2-Variable_
2-VAR
*3 (8-57 )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
STYLE
Y>
Y<
Y≥
Y≤
X>
X<
X≥
X≤
—
—
·····
······
—
GPH-MEM
DYNA
TABLE
GRHCLR
On
Off
Var
TYPE
GRHCLR
On
Off
TYPE
STYLE
Store
Recall
Y=
r=
Param
Y=
r=
Param
—
—
·····
······
—
RECURSION
Med-MedLine_
Med
QuadReg_
X2
CubicReg_
X3
QuartReg_
X4
LogReg_
Log
*4 (8-57 )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
PowerReg_
Power
SinReg_
Sin
LogisticReg_
Logistic
Swap_
`Row_
`Row+_
Row+_
SortA(
SortD(
G_SelOn_
On
G_SelOff_
Off
Y=Type
Y=
r=Type
r=
ParamType
Param
X=Type
X=
GRHCLR
SEL+S
On
Off
—
—
·····
······
—
TYPE
n.an..
8-51
an
an+1
an+2
n
an
an+1
an+2
bn
bn+1
bn+2
cn
cn+1
cn+2
Σan
Σan+1
Y>Type
YType
X
<
≥
≤
Locate
Getkey
Send
Receive
S38k
R38k
Open
Close
Join
Len
Cmp
Src
Left
Right
Mid
E→S
Exp
Upr
Lwr
Inverse
Shift
Rotate
DispF-Tbl
DrawFTG-Con
DrawFTG-Plt
DispR-Tbl
PlotPhase
DrawWeb_
DrawR-Con
DrawR Σ-Con
DrawR-Plt
DrawR Σ-Plt
=
≠
>
<
≥
≤
Locate_
Getkey
Send(
Receive(
Send38k_
Receive38k_
OpenComport38k
CloseComport38k
:
StrJoin(
StrLen(
StrCmp(
StrSrc(
StrLeft(
StrRight(
StrMid(
Exp'Str(
Exp(
StrUpr(
StrLwr(
StrInv(
StrShift(
StrRotate(
!m(SET UP) ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ
1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
ANGLE
COORD
GRID
AXES
LABEL
DISPLAY
8-55
2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
Deg
Rad
Gra
On
Off
On
Off
Line
On
Off
Scale
On
Off
Fix
Sci
Norm
3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
Deg
Rad
Gra
CoordOn
CoordOff
GridOn
GridOff
GridLine
AxesOn
AxesOff
AxesScale
LabelOn
LabelOff
Fix_
Sci_
Norm_
ENG
SKT/LIN
On
Off
Eng
—
—
·····
······
—
DRAW
DERIV
BACK
FUNC
SIMUL
SGV-WIN
LIST
LOCUS
TBL-VAR
ΣDISP
RESID
COMPLEX
FRAC
Y=SPEED
DATE
PMT
PERIODS
INEQ
SIMP
Q1Q3
Connect
Plot
On
Off
None
Pict
OPEN
On
Off
On
Off
Auto
Manual
File
On
Off
Range
List
On
Off
None
List
Real
a+bi
r∠θ
d/c
ab/c
Norm
High
365
360
Begin
End
Annual
Semi
Intsect
Union
Auto
Manual
Std
OnData
P/L-CLR
EngOn
EngOff
Eng
S-L-Normal
S-L-Thick
S-L-Broken
S-L-Dot
S-L-Thin
G-Connect
G-Plot
DerivOn
DerivOff
BG-None
BG-Pict_
*8 (8-58 )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
FuncOn
FuncOff
SimulOn
SimulOff
S-WindAuto
S-WindMan
File_
LocusOn
LocusOff
VarRange
VarList_
ΣdispOn
ΣdispOff
Resid-None
Resid-List_
Real
a+bi
r∠θ
d/c
ab/c
Y=DrawSpeedNorm
Y=DrawSpeedHigh
DateMode365
DateMode360
PmtBgn
PmtEnd
PeriodsAnnual
PeriodsSemi
IneqTypeIntsect
IneqTypeUnion
SimplfyAuto
SimplfyMan
Q1Q3TypeStd
Q1Q3TypeOnData
Plot/Line-Color_
SKETCH
PLOT
LINE
Circle
Vertical
Horz
Text
PIXEL
Test
STYLE
1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
ZOOM
V-WIN
Factor
Auto
V-Win
Store
Recall
Y=
r=
Param
x=c
G·∫ dX
Y>
Y<
Y≥
Y≤
X>
X<
X≥
X≤
Plot
PlotOn
PlotOff
PlotChg
Line
F-Line
On
Off
Pxlchg
—
—
·····
······
—
1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
1:Color
Command
2:Paint
Command
! ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ
2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
Cls
Tangent
Norm
Inverse
GRAPH
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
Factor_
ZoomAuto
ViewWindow_
StoV-Win_
RclV-Win_
8-56
Cls
Tangent_
Normal_
Inverse_
Graph_Y=
Graph_r=
Graph(X,Y)=(
Graph_X=
Graph_ ∫
Graph_Y>
Graph_Y<
Graph_Y≥
Graph_Y≤
Graph_X>
Graph_X<
Graph_X≥
Graph_X≤
Plot_
PlotOn_
PlotOff_
PlotChg_
Line
F-Line_
Circle_
Vertical_
Horizontal_
Text_
PxlOn_
PxlOff_
PxlChg_
PxlTest(
SketchNormal_
SketchThick_
SketchBroken_
SketchDot_
SketchThin_
!f(FORMAT) ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ
2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
1:Black
2:Blue
3:Red
4:Magenta
5:Green
6:Cyan
7:Yellow
9:Auto
A:Clear
1:Normal
2:Lighter
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
Black_
Blue_
Red_
Magenta_
Green_
Cyan_
Yellow_
ColorAuto_
ColorClr_
ColorNormal_
ColorLighter_
BASE ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
4(MENU) ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ
2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
d~o
LOGIC
DISPLAY
d
h
b
o
Neg
Not
and
or
xor
xnor
'Dec
'Hex
'Bin
'Oct
?
^
RELATNL
:
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
d
h
b
o
Neg_
Not_
and
or
xor
xnor
'Dec
'Hex
'Bin
'Oct
!J(PRGM) ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ
2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
Prog
JUMP
3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
Lbl
Goto
⇒
Isz
Dsz
Menu
=
≠
>
<
≥
≤
*1
Exp
*2
MARK
STICK
%DATA
None
COLOR LINK
*3
X
*4
EXP
*5
NORM
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
Prog_
Lbl_
Goto_
⇒
Isz_
Dsz_
Menu_
?
^
=
≠
>
<
≥
≤
:
t
CHI
F
BINOMIAL
POISSON
GEO
1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
Dec
Hex
Bin
Oct
!m(SET UP) ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ
2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
HYPRGEO
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
Dec
Hex
Bin
Oct
*6
Z
t
1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
1:Black
2:Blue
3:Red
4:Magenta
5:Green
6:Cyan
7:Yellow
!f(FORMAT) ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ
2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
CHI
Black_
Blue_
Red_
Magenta_
Green_
Cyan_
Yellow_
F
ANOVA
8-57
4 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
aebx
abx
Length
Horz
%
Data
BothXY
X&Freq
OnlyX
OnlyY
On
Off
ax+b
a+bx
aebx
abx
Npd
Ncd
InvN
tpd
tcd
Invt
Cpd
Ccd
InvC
Fpd
Fcd
InvF
Bpd
Bcd
InvB
Ppd
Pcd
InvP
Gpd
Gcd
InvG
Hpd
Hcd
InvH
1-Sample
2-Sample
1-Prop
2-Prop
1-Sample
2-Sample
REG
GOF
2WAY
1WAYANO
2WAYANO
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
Exp(ae^bx)
Exp(ab^x)
Square
Cross
Dot
StickLength
StickHoriz
%
Data
None
ColorLinkX&Y
ColorLinkX&Freq
ColorLinkOnlyX
ColorLinkOnlyY
ColorLinkOn
ColorLinkOff
LinearReg(ax+b)
LinearReg(a+bx)
ExpReg(a•e^bx)
ExpReg(a•b^x)
NormPD(
NormCD(
InvNormCD(
tPD(
tCD(
InvTCD(
ChiPD(
ChiCD(
InvChiCD(
FPD(
FCD(
InvFCD(
BinomialPD(
BinomialCD(
InvBinomialCD(
PoissonPD(
PoissonCD(
InvPoissonCD(
GeoPD(
GeoCD(
InvGeoCD(
HypergeoPD(
HypergeoCD(
InvHyperGeoCD(
OneSampleZTest_
TwoSampleZTest_
OnePropZTest_
TwoPropZTest_
OneSampleTTest_
TwoSampleTTest_
LinRegTTest_
ChiGOFTest_
ChiTest_
TwoSampleFTest_
OneWayANOVA_
TwoWayANOVA_
ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ7*
( ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢK6(g)1(CONVERT)
.ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
" ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒOPEN" ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ8*
ﻠﹼﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍ.ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
: ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ.ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ
."Pict\Pict01.g3p"
3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
*9
TEST
INTR
DIST
4 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
p
z
t
p
z
t
Chi
χ2
F
p̂
p̂ 1
p̂ 2
df
se
r
r2
pa
Fa
Adf
SSa
MSa
pb
Fb
Bdf
SSb
MSb
pab
Fab
ABdf
SSab
MSab
Edf
SSe
MSe
Lower
Upper
p̂
p̂ 1
p̂ 2
df
p
xInv
x1Inv
x2Inv
zLow
zUp
tLow
tUp
F
p̂
p̂ 1
p̂ 2
df
se
r
r2
pa
Fa
Adf
SSa
MSa
pb
Fb
Bdf
SSb
MSb
pab
Fab
ABdf
SSab
MSab
Edf
SSe
MSe
Lower
Upper
p̂
p̂ 1
p̂ 2
df
p
xInv
x1Inv
x2Inv
zLow
zUp
tLow
tUp
8-58
.8ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ⇔ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ
ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-7
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻲ )_( ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ )" "( ﺃﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ )'(ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ )" "( ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﺮﺝ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ:
ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ )ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ(:
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ:
" "θ
"Theta"*1
"Tθ max"*2
"TThetamax"*1
"or"*3
"or"*1
˝ _˝ _Theta
˝ ˝ Theta
˝ _˝ _TThetamax
˝ ˝ TThetamax
˝ _˝ _or
˝ ˝ or
* 1ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ
* 2ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ Tθ max
* 3ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ or
ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ
ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) 6(CHARﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ:
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ:
λ
1
β
`
⇔
ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ )ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ(:
#E54A
#E5A5
#E5F0
#E641
#E69C
#E6D6
ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ 8-60ﺍﻟﻰ .8-65
8-59
ﺃﻣﺮ
ﻧﺺ
ﺃﻣﺮ
.* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ " " ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ
ﺃﻣﺮ
ﻧﺺ
ﻧﺺ
f
femto
7
7
m
m
p
pico
8
8
n
n
n
nano
9
9
o
o
μ
micro
:
:
p
p
m
milli
;
;
q
q
k
kilo
<
<
r
r
M
Mega
=
=
s
s
G
Giga
>
>
t
t
T
Tera
?
?
u
u
P
Peta
@
@
v
v
E
Exa
A
A
w
w
^
Disps
B
B
x
x
↵
(CR)
C
C
y
y
→
->
D
D
z
z
E
Exp
E
E
{
{
≤
<=
F
F
|
|
G
}
}
<>
G
≥
>=
H
H
~
˜
⇒
=>
I
I
Pol(
Pol(
f1
f1
J
J
sin
sin
f2
f2
K
K
cos
cos
f3
f3
L
L
tan
f4
f4
M
M
f5
f5
N
N
f6
f6
O
O
a
&HA
P
P
-
(-)
b
&HB
Q
Q
P
nPr
c
&HC
R
R
+
+
&HD
S
S
xnor
xnor
e
&HE
T
T
2
^<2>
f
&HF
U
U
V
V
∫(
Char!
W
W
Mod
Mod
"
˝
X
X
Σx2
Sigmax^2
#
#
Y
Y
$
$
Z
Z
sin−1
sin^-1
%
%
[
[
cos−1
cos^-1
&
\
¥
tan−1
'
’
]
]
(
(
^
^^
)
)
_
_
½
½½
'
`
+
++
a
a
c
nCr
,
,
b
b
−
−
-
Char-
c
c
xor
xor
.
.
d
d
−1
^<-1>
/
//
e
e
°
deg
0
0
f
f
Med
Med
1
1
g
g
Sigmax
2
2
h
Σx
h
Rec(
3
3
i
i
sinh
4
4
j
sinh
j
cosh
cosh
5
5
k
k
6
l
tanh
6
l
d
!
&
8-60
tan
h
ln
&h
ln
'
Sqrt
dms
Integral(
x
tan^-1
d
log
3
X
&d
log
'
Abs
Cbrt
Abs
Rec(
tanh
o
&o
ﺃﻣﺮ
ﻧﺺ
e^
ﺃﻣﺮ
e^
ﻧﺺ
Intg
∑xy
Int
Int
Not
Not
ﺃﻣﺮ
Intg
Plot
Sigmaxy
Plot
ﻧﺺ
Det
Det
Arg
Arg
Conjg
Conjg
ReP
ReP
ImP
ImP
^
^
×
½
Lbl
Lbl
or
or
Fix
Fix
d/dx(
d/dx(
!
!
Sci
Sci
d /dx (
d^2/dx^2(
r
rad
Dsz
Dsz
Solve(
Solve(
minY
minY
Isz
Isz
Σ(
Sigma(
minX
minX
Factor
Factor
FMin(
FMin(
n
Statn
ViewWindow
ViewWindow
FMax(
FMax(
Line
Line
2
2
sinh−1
sinh^−1
Goto
Goto
Seq(
Seq(
cosh
−1
cosh^−1
Prog
Prog
Min(
Min(
tanh−1
tanh^−1
b
Graph Y=
Graph Y=
Mean(
Mean(
&b
Graph ∫
Graph Integral
Median(
Median(
(10)
SolveN(
SolveN(
Graph Y>
Graph Y>
Frac
Frac
Graph Y<
Graph Y<
Red
Red
Neg
Neg
Graph Y≥
Graph Y>=
Blue
Blue
Graph Y≤
Graph Y<=
Green
Green
10
x
'
Xrt
÷
/
Graph r=
Graph r=
MOD(
MOD(
and
and
Graph(X,Y)=(
Graph(X,Y)=(
MOD_Exp(
MOD_Exp(
{
frac
,
Para,
GCD(
GCD(
g
gra
P(
ProbP(
LCM(
LCM(
maxY
maxY
Q(
ProbQ(
StdDev(
StdDev(
maxX
maxX
R(
ProbR(
Variance(
Variance(
∑y2
Sigmay2
t(
Probt(
Mat
Ans
Ans
Xmin
Xmin
Trn
Trn
Ran#
Xmax
Xmax
½Row
½Row
x̄
x-bar
Xscl
Xscl
½Row+
½Row+
ȳ
y-bar
Ymin
Ymin
Row+
Row+
σx
sigmax
Ymax
Ymax
Swap
Swap
sx
Sx
Yscl
Yscl
Dim
Dim
σx
sigmay
Tθ min
TThetamin
sy
Sy
Tθ max
TThetamax
a
Regression_a
Tθ ptch
TThetaptch
Augment(
Augment(
b
Regression_b
Xfct
Xfct
List→Mat(
List->Mat(
r
^
x
Regression_r
Yfct
Yfct
Mat→List(
Mat->List(
x-hat
D Start
D Start
^
y
y-hat
D End
D End
Prod
Prod
r
D pitch
D pitch
Percent
Percent
θ
Theta
RightXmin
RightXmin
Cuml
Cuml
∑y
Sigmay
RightXmax
RightXmax
π
pi
RightXscl
RightXscl
List
Cls
Cls
RightYmin
RightYmin
Rnd
RightYmax
ΔList
Rnd
RightYmax
Infinity
Dec
&D
RightYscl
∞
RightYscl
Angle
&H
RightTθ min
∠
Hex
RightTThetamin
Ref
&B
RightTθ max
Ref
Bin
RightTThetamax
Rref
Oct
&O
RightTθ ptch
Rref
RightTThetaptch
'
Conv
@D8
StdDev_σ(
StdDev_sigma(
Sim Coef
Variance_σ2(
Sim Coef
Variance_sigma^2(
Ran#
Norm
Norm
Mat
Fill(
Identity
Fill(
Identity
Sum
Sum
i
Imaginary
List
Dlist
Ply Coef
Deg
c
Ply Coef
Deg
Regression_c
Sim Result
Rad
d
Sim Result
Rad
Regression_d
Ply Result
Gra
Gra
e
Ply Result
Regression_e
Financial n
Eng
Eng
Max(
n
Max(
I%
Financial I%
8-61
ﺃﻣﺮ
ﻧﺺ
ﺃﻣﺮ
ﻧﺺ
ﺃﻣﺮ
ﻧﺺ
PV
Financial PV
Or
Or
r
Graphr
PMT
Financial PMT
Not
Not
Xt
GraphXt
FV
Financial FV
Xor
Xor
Yt
GraphYt
X
GraphX
List1
Σan+
Sigmaan+1
List2
List2
Σbn+
1
Sigmabn+1
SSb
SSb
List3
List3
Σcn+1
Sigmacn+1
SSab
SSab
List4
List4
Σan+2
Sigmaan+2
MSb
MSb
List5
List5
Σbn+
Sigmabn+2
MSab
MSab
List6
List6
Σcn+
Sigmacn+2
[ns]
[ns]
List1
1
2
2
Q1
Q1
Int÷
Int/
[μs]
[micros]
Q3
Q3
Rmdr
Rmdr
[ms]
[ms]
x1
x1
Fa
Fa
[s]
[s]
y1
y1
n1
n1
[min]
[min]
x2
x2
n2
n2
[h]
[h]
y2
y2
x̄1
x-bar1
[day]
[day]
x3
x3
x̄2
x-bar2
[week]
[week]
y3
y3
sx1
sx1
[yr]
[yr]
[s-yr]
Vct
Vct
sx2
sx2
[s-yr]
logab(
logab(
sp
Sxp
[t-yr]
[t-yr]
RndFix(
RndFix(
p̂
p-hat
[ C]
[Centigrade]
RanInt#(
RanInt#(
p̂1
p-hat1
[K]
[Kel]
RanList#(
RanList#(
p̂2
p-hat2
[ F]
[Fahrenheit]
RanBin#(
RanBin#(
Lower
Lower
[ R]
[Rankine]
RanNorm#(
RanNorm#(
Upper
Upper
[u]
[u]
RanSamp#(
RanSamp#(
P/Y
P/Year
[g]
[g]
Σan
Sigmaan
C/Y
C/Year
[kg]
[kg]
Σbn
Sigmabn
Fb
Fb
[lb]
[lb]
Σcn
Sigmacn
F
F-Value
[oz]
[oz]
Getkey
Getkey
z
z-Value
[slug]
[slug]
F Result
F Result
p
p-Value
[ton(short)]
[ton(short)]
F Start
F Start
t
t-Value
[ton(long)]
[ton(long)]
F End
F End
se
se
[mton]
[mton]
χ
2
[l-atm]
F pitch
F pitch
x^2
[l-atm]
R Result
R Result
r2
r^2
[ft·lbf]
[ftlbf]
R Start
R Start
Adf
Adf
[calIT]
[calIT]
R End
R End
Edf
Edf
[calth]
[calth]
H Start
H Start
df
df
[Btu]
[Btu]
[kWh]
[kgfm]
H pitch
'Simp
an
a n+
H pitch
SSa
SSa
[kW·h]
>Simp
MSa
MSa
[kgf·m]
SSe
[Pa]
[Pa]
[kPa]
[kPa]
an
SSe
1
an+1
MSe
MSe
a n+ 2
an+2
Fab
Fab
[bar]
[bar]
n
Subscriptn
Bdf
Bdf
[mmH2O]
[mmH2O]
a0
a0
ABdf
ABdf
[mmHg]
[mmHg]
a
1
a1
pa
pa
[inH2O]
[inH2O]
a2
a2
pb
[inHg]
[inHg]
pab
pab
[lbf/in2]
[lbf/in^2]
CellSum(
CellSum(
[kgf/cm2]
[kgf/cm^2]
CellProd(
[atm]
[atm]
[dyne]
[dyne]
bn
bn
b n+ 1
bn+1
b n+ 2
bn+2
b
pb
CellProd(
0
b0
CellMin(
CellMin(
b1
b1
CellMax(
CellMax(
[N]
[New]
b2
b2
CellMean(
[kgf]
[kgf]
[lbf]
CellMean(
anStart
anStart
CellMedian(
CellMedian(
[lbf]
bnStart
bnStart
CellIf(
CellIf(
[tonf]
[tonf]
GraphY
[fm]
[fm]
And
And
Y
8-62
ﺃﻣﺮ
ﻧﺺ
ﺃﻣﺮ
[mm]
[mm]
[cm]
[m]
ﺃﻣﺮ
ﻧﺺ
ﻧﺺ
Logistic
[cal15]
[cal15]
[cm]
[kcal15]
[kcal15]
[m]
[kcalth]
[kcalth]
Pie
Pie
[km]
[km]
[kcalIT]
[kcalIT]
Bar
Bar
[Mil]
[Mil]
If
If
DotG
[in]
[in]
Then
Then
1-Variable
[ft]
[ft]
Else
Else
[yd]
[yd]
[fath]
[fath]
[rd]
[rd]
To
To
QuadReg
QuadReg
[mile]
[mile]
Step
Step
CubicReg
CubicReg
[n mile]
[n_mile]
QuartReg
QuartReg
[acre]
[acre]
While
While
LogReg
LogReg
[ha]
[ha]
WhileEnd
WhileEnd
ExpReg(a·e^bx)
ExpReg(ae^bx)
[cm2]
[cm^2]
Do
Do
PowerReg
PowerReg
[m2]
[m^2]
S-Gph1
S-Gph1
[km2]
[km^2]
Return
Return
S-Gph2
S-Gph2
[in2]
[in^2]
Break
Break
S-Gph3
S-Gph3
[ft2]
[ft^2]
Stop
Stop
[yd2]
[yd^2]
[mile2]
[mile^2]
Send(
Send(
Dot
Dot
[m/s]
[m/s]
Receive(
Receive(
Scatter
Scatter
[km/h]
[km/h]
OpenComport38k
OpenComport38k
xyLine
xyLine
[ft/s]
[ft/s]
Hist
Hist
[mile/h]
[mile/h]
Send38k
Send38k
MedBox
MedBox
[knot]
[knot]
Recieve38k
Recieve38k
N-Dist
N-Dist
[mL]
[mL]
ClrText
ClrText
Broken
Broken
[L]
[Lit]
ClrGraph
ClrGraph
Linear
Linear
[tsp]
[tsp]
ClrList
ClrList
Med-Med
Med-Med
[cm3]
[cm^3]
LinearReg(a+bx)
Quad
Quad
[m ]
[m^3]
S-L-Normal
S-L-Normal
Cubic
Cubic
[tbsp]
[tbsp]
S-L-Thick
S-L-Thick
Quart
Quart
[in3]
[in^3]
S-L-Broken
S-L-Broken
Log
Log
[ft3]
[ft^3]
S-L-Dot
S-L-Dot
Exp(a·e^bx)
Exp(ae^bx)
[fl_oz(UK)]
[fl_oz(UK)]
DrawGraph
DrawGraph
Power
[fl_oz(US)]
[fl_oz(US)]
[cup]
[cup]
DrawDyna
DrawDyna
S-WindAuto
S-WindAuto
[pt]
[pt]
DrawStat
DrawStat
S-WindMan
S-WindMan
[qt]
[qt]
DrawFTG-Con
DrawFTG-Con
Graph X=
Graph X=
[gal(US)]
[gal(US)]
DrawFTG-Plt
DrawFTG-Plt
Y=Type
Y=Type
[gal(UK)]
[gal(UK)]
DrawR-Con
DrawR-Con
r=Type
r=Type
[μm]
[microm]
DrawR-Plt
DrawR-Plt
ParamType
ParamType
3
IfEnd
For
Next
LpWhile
Locate
IfEnd
For
Next
LpWhile
Locate
CloseComport38k CloseComport38k
PlotPhase
LinearReg(a+bx)
PlotPhase
LogisticReg
Logistic
LogisticReg
DotG
1-Variable
2-Variable
2-Variable
LinearReg(ax+b)
LinearReg(ax+b)
Med-MedLine
Med-MedLine
Square
Square
Cross
Cross
ExpReg(a·b^x)
Power
ExpReg(ab^x)
[mg]
[mg]
DrawRΣ-Con DrawRSigma-Con
X=Type
X=Type
[A]
[Ang]
DrawRΣ-Plt
X>Type
X>Type
[AU]
[AstU]
DrawWeb
DrawWeb
XType
Y>Type
[pc]
[pc]
ThickG
ThickG
Y=Type
[calth/s]
[calth/s]
DispF-Tbl
YsType
Y<=Type
[hp]
[hp]
DispR-Tbl
DispR-Tbl
XtType
X>=Type
[Btu/min]
[Btu/min]
SimplifyAuto
SimplifyAuto
XsType
X<=Type
[W]
[Wat]
SimplifyMan
SimplifyMan
G-Connect
G-Connect
[eV]
[eV]
NPPlot
NPPlot
G-Plot
G-Plot
[erg]
[erg]
Sinusoidal
Sinusoidal
Resid-None
Resid-None
[J]
[Jou]
DispF-Tbl
SinReg
8-63
DrawRSigma-Plt
SinReg
Resid-List
Resid-List
ﺃﻣﺮ
ﻧﺺ
BG-None
BG-Pict
ﺃﻣﺮ
BG-None
BG-Pict
ﺃﻣﺮ
ﻧﺺ
File6
File6
Y=DrawSpeedNorm
Y=DrawSpeedNorm
Y=DrawSpeedHigh Y=DrawSpeedHigh
ﻧﺺ
VarList
VarList
ClrMat
ClrMat
ZoomAuto
ZoomAuto
GridOff
GridOff
GridLine
GridLine
FuncOn
FuncOn
Xdot
Xdot
GridOn
GridOn
SimulOn
SimulOn
RightXdot
R-Xdot
Exp(a·b^x)
Exp(a^bx)
AxesOn
AxesOn
D Var
CoordOn
CoordOn
DrawDistT
DrawDistT
LabelOn
DrawDistChi
DrawDistChi
DrawDistF
DrawDistF
D Var
DrawDistNorm
DrawDistNorm
Q1Q3TypeStd
Q1Q3TypeStd
LabelOn
VarRange
VarRange
DerivOn
DerivOn
LocusOn
None
None
SigmadispOn
StickLength
StickLength
G SelOn
StickHoriz
StickHoriz
Q1Q3TypeOnData
LocusOn
SketchNormal
SketchNormal
ΣdispOn
SketchThick
SketchThick
G SelOn
SketchBroken
SketchBroken
T SelOn
T SelOn
IneqTypeUnion
IneqTypeUnion
SketchDot
SketchDot
D SelOn
D SelOn
Graph X>
Graph X>
R SelOn
R SelOn
Graph X<
Graph X<
Q1Q3TypeOnData
anType
anType
an+1Type
an+1Type
DrawOn
DrawOn
Graph X≥
Graph X>=
an+2Type
an+2Type
ab/c
ab/c
Graph X≤
Graph X<=
StoPict
StoPict
d/c
d/c
StrJoin(
StrJoin(
RclPict
RclPict
FuncOff
FuncOff
StrLen(
StrLen(
StoGMEM
StoGMEM
SimulOff
SimulOff
StrCmp(
StrCmp(
RclGMEM
RclGMEM
AxesOff
AxesOff
StrSrc(
StrSrc(
StoV-Win
StoV-Win
CoordOff
CoordOff
StrLeft(
StrLeft(
RclV-Win
RclV-Win
LabelOff
LabelOff
StrRight(
StrRight(
DerivOff
%
Display%
DerivOff
StrMid(
StrMid(
Data
DisplayData
LocusOff
LocusOff
Exp'Str(
Exp>Str(
ΣdispOff
SigmadispOff
Exp(
Exp(
Menu
RclCapt
Tangent
Normal
Menu
G SelOff
G SelOff
StrUpr(
StrUpr(
Tangent
T SelOff
T SelOff
StrLwr(
StrLwr(
Normal
D SelOff
D SelOff
StrInv(
StrInv(
R SelOff
R SelOff
RclCapt
Inverse
Inverse
Vertical
Vertical
DrawOff
DrawOff
Horizontal
Horizontal
'Dec
>&D
StrShift(
StrShift(
StrRotate(
StrRotate(
ClrVct
Str
ClrVct
Text
Text
'Hex
>&H
Circle
Circle
'Bin
>&B
CrossP(
F-Line
F-Line
'Oct
>&O
DotP(
DotP(
PlotOn
PlotOn
'DMS
>DMS
Norm(
Norm(
PlotOff
PlotOff
'a+bi
>a+bi
UnitV(
UnitV(
Angle(
Str
CrossP(
Angle(
PlotChg
PlotChg
'r∠θ
>re^Theta
PxlOn
PxlOn
Real
Real
ColorAuto
ColorAuto
PxlOff
PxlOff
a+bi
a+bi
ColorLighter
ColorLighter
PxlChg
PxlChg
r∠θ
re^Theta
ColorLinkX&Y
ColorLinkX&Y
ColorLinkOnlyX
PxlTest(
PxlTest(
EngOn
EngOn
ColorLinkOnlyX
SortA(
SortA(
EngOff
EngOff
ColorLinkOnlyY
ColorLinkOnlyY
SortD(
SortD(
Sel a0
Sel a0
ColorLinkOn
ColorLinkOn
VarList1
VarList1
Sel a1
ColorLinkOff
Sel a1
VarList2
VarList2
cn
VarList3
VarList3
cn+1
VarList4
VarList4
cn+2
ColorNormal
cn
cn+1
ERROR
cn+2
BLANK
ColorClr
ColorLinkOff
ColorNormal
ERROR
BLANK
ColorClr
VarList5
VarList5
c0
c0
VarList6
VarList6
c1
c1
ColorLinkX&Freq
File1
File1
c2
NormPD(
NormPD(
NormCD(
InvNormCD(
c2
ColorLinkX&Freq
File2
File2
cnStart
CnStart
NormCD(
File3
File3
IneqTypeIntsect
IneqTypeIntsect
InvNormCD(
File4
File4
fn
tPD(
tPD(
tCD(
tCD(
File5
File5
fn
File
8-64
File
ﺃﻣﺮ
ﺃﻣﺮ
ﻧﺺ
InvTCD(
InvTCD(
ﻧﺺ
Days_Prd(
Days_Prd(
ChiPD(
ChiPD(
OneSampleZTest
OneSampleZTest
ChiCD(
ChiCD(
TwoSampleZTest
TwoSampleZTest
InvChiCD(
InvChiCD(
OnePropZTest
OnePropZTest
FPD(
FPD(
TwoPropZTest
TwoPropZTest
FCD(
FCD(
OneSampleTTest
OneSampleTTest
InvFCD(
InvFCD(
TwoSampleTTest
TwoSampleTTest
BinomialPD(
BinomialPD(
LinRegTTest
LinRegTTest
BinomialCD(
BinomialCD(
ChiGOFTest
ChiGOFTest
InvBinomialCD(
InvBinomialCD(
ChiTest
ChiTest
PoissonPD(
PoissonPD(
TwoSampleFTest
TwoSampleFTest
PoissonCD(
PoissonCD(
OneWayANOVA
OneWayANOVA
InvPoissonCD(
InvPoissonCD(
TwoWayANOVA
TwoWayANOVA
GeoPD(
GeoPD(
x1InvN
x1InvN
GeoCD(
GeoCD(
x2InvN
x2InvN
InvGeoCD(
InvGeoCD(
xInv
HypergeoPD(
HypergeoPD(
HypergeoCD(
HypergeoCD(
InvHypergeoCD(
InvHypergeoCD(
SetG-Color
SetG-Color
Plot/Line-Color
Plot/Line-Color
AxesScale
AxesScale
Black
Black
Magenta
Magenta
Cyan
Cyan
Yellow
Yellow
Smpl_SI(
Smpl_SI(
Smpl_SFV(
Smpl_SFV(
Cmpd_n(
Cmpd_n(
Cmpd_I%(
Cmpd_I%(
Cmpd_PV(
Cmpd_PV(
Cmpd_PMT(
Cmpd_PMT(
Cmpd_FV(
Cmpd_FV(
Cash_NPV(
Cash_NPV(
Cash_IRR(
Cash_IRR(
Cash_PBP(
Cash_PBP(
Cash_NFV(
Cash_NFV(
Amt_BAL(
Amt_BAL(
Amt_INT(
Amt_INT(
Amt_PRN(
Amt_PRN(
Amt_ΣINT(
Amt_SigmaINT(
Amt_ΣPRN(
Amt_SigmaPRN(
Cnvt_EFF(
Cnvt_EFF(
Cnvt_APR(
Cnvt_APR(
Cost(
Cost(
Sell(
Sell(
Margin(
Margin(
PmtEnd
PmtEnd
PmtBgn
PmtBgn
Bond_PRC(
Bond_PRC(
Bond_YLD(
Bond_YLD(
DateMode365
DateMode365
DateMode360
DateMode360
PeriodsAnnual
PeriodsAnnual
PeriodsSemi
PeriodsSemi
SketchThin
xInv
SketchThin
S-L-Thin
ThinG
S-L-Thin
ThinG
zLow
zLow
zUp
zUp
tLow
tLow
tUp
tUp
ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ،OS 1.01ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ
.ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ
ﺃﻣﺮ
ﻧﺺ
!
!!
2
^2
–1
^-1
an
an
bn
bn
[K]
[K]
[N]
[N]
[L]
[L]
[A]
[A]
[AU]
[AU]
[W]
[W]
[J]
[J]
cn
cn
E
^E
-
--
r
Gamma
8-65
.9ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ،ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ
ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ،Aﻭ ﻳﻘﺴﻤﻪ ﺑـ (2, 3, 5, 7......) Bﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟـ .A
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟـ .A
• ﺗﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ .B > A
ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﲟﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
462 = 2 × 3 × 7 × 11
egcw
w
ww
w
8-66
ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ
ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ ،ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﲔ ﺍﶈﻞ
ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭ ،ﻭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ( ﻟـ .X
:Y1ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ
:Y2ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ
:Y3ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭ ﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ
:Y4ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ
:Y5ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟـ Y3ﻭ Y4
ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ Y1ﻭ .Y2
ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ.
dw
baw
bw
w
8-67
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ
ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﳝﻨﺤﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ،ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺬ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ.
ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Spreadsheet
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺟﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
.1ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ Spreadsheetﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .ﻭﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Spreadsheetﻳﻨﺸﺊ
ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ "."SHEET
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ )ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ( ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ
ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ.
ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ (Z
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ
) 1ﺍﻟﻰ (999
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ
ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﻳﺸﻴﺮ
ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﺑﺖ
ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ .ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ 7+3, sin30, A1×2ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ )=(
ﻗﺒﻠﻬﺎ.
ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ )"( ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﺺ.
ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ )=( ،ﻣﺜﻞ ،=A1×2ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Spreadsheet
ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻫﻮ 30ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ .ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ
ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ
ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ.
ﹼ
9-1
9
ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ eActivity
ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ 60ﻛﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ .ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ eActivity
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺫﻟﻚ )ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ 30ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻘﻠﻴﻞ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ .ﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ) eActivityﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ 15
ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻘﻠﻴﻞ( ﻫﻮ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .eActivity
ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ eAcitivityﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ
ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ.
) (1ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ A1ﺍﻟﻰ ،A999ﻭ ﻣﻦ B1ﺍﻟﻰ ،B999ﻭﻣﻦ C1ﺍﻟﻰ C520
ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻟـ eActivityﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ A1ﺍﻟﻰ A999ﻭ B1ﺍﻟﻰ .B80
) (2ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﺛﻢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻣﻦ A1ﺍﻟﻰ A999ﻭ B1
ﺍﻟﻰ B430
ﻟـ " "Typeﺍﺧﺘﺮ "."Expression -ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.B1=2 A1^3+3 A1^2+4 A1+5 :
ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟـ eActivityﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ A1ﺍﻟﻰ A999ﻭ B1ﺍﻟﻰ .B410
kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
• } ... {FILEﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻝ FILEﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
• }{NEW}/{OPEN}/{SAVE • AS}/{RECALCS}/{CSV
• } ... {EDITﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟـ EDITﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
• }{CUT}/{PASTE}/{COPY}/{CELL}/{JUMP}/{SEQ}/{FILL}/{SORTASC}/{SORTDES
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ PASTEﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ CUTﺍﻭ .COPY
• } ... {DELETEﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟـ ) DELETEﺣﺬﻑ(ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
• }{ROW}/{COLUMN}/{ALL
• } ... {INSERTﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟـ ) INSERTﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
• }{ROW}/{COLUMN
• } ... {CLEARﲤﺴﺢ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ.
• }{CONTENT}/{FORMAT}/{ALL
• } ... {GRAPHﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟـ GRAPHﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ) .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ (.Statistics
• }{GRAPH1}/{GRAPH2}/{GRAPH3}/{SELECT}/{SET
• } ... {CALCﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟـ ) CALCﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ(ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ) .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ (.Statistics
• }{1-VAR}/{2-VAR}/{REG}/{SET
• } ... {STOREﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠـ ) STOREﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ(ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
• }{VAR}/{LIST}/{FILE}/{MAT}/{VCT
• } ... {RECALLﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠـ ) RECALLﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ(ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
• }{LIST}/{FILE}/{MAT}/{VCT
• } ... {CONDITﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ.
• } ... {COND2}/{COND1ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ }ﺷﺮﻁ }/{1ﺷﺮﻁ .{2
9-2
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
• } ... {GRABﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ GRABﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ.
• } ... {$ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻖ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ ).($
• } ... {:ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ).(:
• } ... {Ifﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ (.CellIf
• } ... {CELLﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• (CellMin(, CellMax(, CellMean(, CellMedian(, CellSum(, CellProd
• } ... {RELATNLﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺋﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ≤ =, ≠, >, <, ≥,
.2ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ
ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ،ﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
kﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
uﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(FILE)1(NEW
.2ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
• ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﹰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻻ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
• ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ .2ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺳﻴﻔﺘﺢ
ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ.
uﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(FILE)2(OPEN
.2ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
uﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﻟﺘﻪ ،ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻻ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ
ﻳﺪﻭﻱ.
uﳊﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺈﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(FILE)3(SAVE • AS
.2ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ،2ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ
ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ،ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .2
9-3
uﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(FILE)2(OPEN
.2ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(DELETE
.3ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻳﺔ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ،ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻲﺀ.
.4ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .J
• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﹰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ " "SHEETﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻪ.
kﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ CSV
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ
ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ .CSV
uﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ.
• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ) "CSVﺻﺤﻔﺔ .(3-18
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(FILE)5(CSV)1(LOAD
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ wﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .CSV
.3ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
• ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﻛﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻠﻒ CSVﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺷﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ،ﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSV
)ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﺻﻒ ،2ﻋﻤﻮﺩ (3ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ.
• ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻴﻪ 26ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ 999ﺻﻒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ "."Invalid Data Size
uﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ CSV
.1ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻻﻣﺮ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(FILE)4(RECALCSﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ .CSVﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ
ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ )=( .ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ "ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(9-10
• ﻻ ﲢﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .CSVﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ERRORﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
9-4
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(FILE)5(CSV)2(SAVE • AS
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ.
.3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .CSV
• ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﻓﻲ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ "."ROOT
• ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﺪ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ).1(OPEN
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(SAVE • AS
.5ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .CSVﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻫﺎﻡ!" ﻻﺣﻆ
ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﳊﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ) "CSVﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(2-48
uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ CSVﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(FILE)5(CSV)3(SETﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ .CSVﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 3ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ CSVﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(3-20
kﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ " "Auto Calcﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻛﺴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ
ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .ﻳﻜﻮﻥ Auto Calcﻫﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-37
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟـ Auto Calcﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ ﻫﻮ ") "Onﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ( .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻹﲤﺎﻣﻬﺎ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ Auto Calcﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻔﻌﻞ
) ،(Offﺗﻀﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ
ﻭﻗﺖ ،ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ Auto Calcﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ.
uﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) .1(FILE)4(RECALCSﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ
ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ.
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ Auto Calcﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲡﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ .Aﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻻﺣﻆ
ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ Aﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ .ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺃﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﺎ
ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Aﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ )ﻣﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ( ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
9-5
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﲟﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﲟﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ .ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﲟﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ،ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ،
ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ،ﺍﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ.
uﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ
ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﺍﻭ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ JUMPﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(9-7
ﺻﻒ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺨﻼﻳﺎ
ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ Aﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻼﻳﺎﻩ
ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .dﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ dﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ،A2ﻣﺜﻼ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ )ﻣﻦ A2ﺍﻟﻰ.(Z2
ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ) A2:Z2ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ( ﻓﻲ
ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.
ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺨﻼﻳﺎ
ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻼﻳﺎﻩ
ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .fﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ fﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ
ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ،C1ﻣﺜﻼ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ Cﻛﺎﻣﻼ )ﻣﻦ C1ﺍﻟﻰ
.(C999ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ) C1:C999ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ
ﺍﺘﺎﺭ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.
ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ dﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ Aﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
fﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 1ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﹰ .ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.
9-6
uﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻣﺮ JUMP
ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻫﻨﺎ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).2(EDIT)4(JUMP)1(GO
.2ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ) A1ﺍﻟﻰ
(Z999ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
ﺧﻂ 1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )↑.2(EDIT)4(JUMP)2(TOP
ﻋﻤﻮﺩ Aﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )←.2(EDIT)4(JUMP)3(TOP
ﺧﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )↓.2(EDIT)4(JUMP)4(BTM
ﻋﻤﻮﺩ Zﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )→.2(EDIT)4(JUMP)5(BTM
uﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ
.1ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻒ ﺍﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ ﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ،ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ .ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ
"ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .9-6
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).!i(CLIP
• ﺳﻴﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ-ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﻒ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ.
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ.
• ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .Jﺍﺫﺍ ﻓﻌﻠﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺳﻴﻘﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ.
9-7
kﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺛﻮﺍﺑﺖ ،ﻭ ﻧﺺ ،ﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ(
ﺩﻋﻮﻧﺎ ﺍﻭﻻ ﻧﻠﻘﻲ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻠﻬﺎ.
uﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ
.1ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ،ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ
ﲟﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ )ﻣﺜﻞ
) b, al(Bﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(،ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﲟﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ
ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.
• ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﻀﻲ ﻗﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 3ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .Jﺳﻴﻌﻴﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 1ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ.
.3ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
uﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
.1ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).2(EDIT)3(CELL
ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ
• ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ
ﹼ
ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ .ﻭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ dﻭ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
• ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﻀﻲ ﻗﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 4ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .Jﺳﻴﻌﻴﺪ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 1ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ.
.4ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
uﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ
ﲢﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Moveﻛﻤﺎ
ﻣﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ .1-37
ﻫﻮ ﹼ
9-8
kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺗﻪ .ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ،
ﺃﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ،A1×2 ،sin30 ،7+3ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ )=( ﻗﺒﻠﻬﺎ .ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ
sdawﻣﺜﻼ ﹰ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ) 0.5ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
Degﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ(.
uﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
.1ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ.
• ﲢﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺳﻴﺸﺮﻉ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ.
ﻣﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ .1-37
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Moveﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﹼ
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 2(EDIT)5(SEQﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ
ﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 1
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ
ﺑﻨﻮﺩ
Expr
ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) f(xﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ.
ﻣﺜﻼ(X2 + 1) a+(X)x+bw :
Var
ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻝ .Expr
ﻣﺜﻼ(X) a+(X)w :
Start
ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ) (X1ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻼ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺑـ .Var
ﻣﺜﻼcw :
End
ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ) (Xnﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻼ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺑـ .Var
ﻣﺜﻼbaw :
Incre
ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ) (mﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟـ ،X1ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ،(X3 = X2 + m) ،(X2 = X1 + m) :ﻭ ﻣﺎ
ﺷﺎﺑﺔ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻝ .X1 + (n – 1) m < Xn
ﻣﺜﻼcw :
9-9
ﺑﻨﻮﺩ
1st Cell
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ
ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ) ،B2 ،A1ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ .ﻭ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 1ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ.
ﻣﺜﻼ(B1) al(B)bw :
• ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻌﻮﺩﺍ ﻭ ﻧﺰﻭﻻ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
• ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ
ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ،ﻭ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ.
.3ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(EXEﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ wﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭ
ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
o
kﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ
.aﺗﺨﺒﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ )”(
ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﻭ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ )"( ﻛﺠﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺩﻋﻮﻧﺎ ﻧﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
> . × = B1, A1, B1) :
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻝ A1ﻋﻨﺪ }ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ } < {A1ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ .{B1ﻭ ﺇﻻﹼ ،ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﻟـ .B1
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ5(CELL)1(Min) :
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ[)] :ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ:ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ(CellMin
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ=CellMin(A3:C5) :
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ .A3:C5
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ5(CELL)2(Max) :
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ[)] :ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ:ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ(CellMax
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ=CellMax(A3:C5) :
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ .A3:C5
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ5(CELL)3(Mean) :
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ[)] :ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ:ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ(CellMean
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ=CellMean(A3:C5) :
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ .A3:C5
9-19
ﺍﻷﻣﺮ
(CellMedian
)ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ(
(CellSum
)ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ(
(CellProd
)ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ(
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ5(CELL)4(Med) :
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ[)] :ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ:ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ(CellMedian
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ=CellMedian(A3:C5) :
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ .A3:C5
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ5(CELL)5(Sum) :
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ[)] :ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ:ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ(CellSum
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ=CellSum(A3:C5) :
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ .A3:C5
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ5(CELL)6(Prod) :
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ[)] :ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ:ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ(CellProd
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ=CellProd(B3:B5) :
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ .B3:B5
kﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Spreadsheet
ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Spreadsheetﺍﳋﺎﺹ ( CellSumﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ C1ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ .A1:B5ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ .A1:B5
.1ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ C1ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
)!.(=)5(CELL)5(Sum
)Jav(A)b3(:)al(b)f
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) GRABﺻﻔﺤﺔ
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (9-12ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) CLIPﺻﻔﺤﺔ (9-7ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ
ﺍﳌﺴﻄﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ.
)←J1(GRAB)4(TOP
)ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ GRABﻭ ﻳﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ (.A1
!i(CLIP)ecccc
)ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ (.CLIP
)w
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ.
9-20
.4ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ (A1<0ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )ﻟﻮﻥ
ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ،ﻭ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺀ( ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ.
kﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ.
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(g)5(CONDITﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ.
ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ،ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻂ " "Conditionﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(COND1ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻁ 1ﺃﻭ
) 2(COND2ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻁ .2
uﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﳋﻠﻴﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻻﻭﻝ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ 1
،0≤A1≤10ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ 10≤A1≤20 2ﺗﺘﻜﺎﻓﺄ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻋﻨﺪ A1=10ﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻁ 1
ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻖ.
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳋﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (9-13ﻭ ﻣﻊ
ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ.
uﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ
ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ :ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ.
• Value Of Cell :Type
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ (A1<0ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻧﺼﻬﺎ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ A1<0ﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻋﻨﺪ .1100ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ A1ﺃﺯﺭﻕ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ،CellSum(B1:B30) ≤A1ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ A1ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ،ﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) ،A1 ،ERROR= (.ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻣﺜﻞ .(A1
>,ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ<=>=ERROR, =BLANK, ≠ERROR, ≠BLANK, ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ<≠>AAAABB~1.txtﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﳌﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ،ﺳﻴﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺑﻌﺪ
ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ 300ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ
300ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﺎﹰ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ .300
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ 200ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ
200ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ .200
• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﺇﻻ ﺇﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ.
• ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺪ.
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ Jﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
• ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ.
ﻳﻘﻒ " "SMEMﻋﻠﻰ "ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ".
• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ.
) , ,' ,% ,$ ,# ,! , 0-9, a-z, A-Zﻓﺎﺻﻞ( ,~ ,` ,_ ,^ ,[ ,] ,@ ,= ,; , .,– ,+ ,( ,) ,ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ
11-2
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ "ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ" ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ"
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (13-12ﻭ "ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(11-9
ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ /ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
@3DGRAPH
3DGRAPH
) 1 = nﺇﻟﻰ 3DGMEM n (20
) 1 = nﺇﻟﻰ 3DVWIN n (6
ALPHA MEM
CONICS
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
—
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ 3D Graph
ﻻ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ 3D V-Window
ﻻ
ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ
ﻻ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ
ﻻ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ E-CON
—
CPnnn
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﺼﺺ )ﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ
(99
ﻧﻌﻢ
SUnnn
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ) E-CON4ﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ
(99
ﻧﻌﻢ
SDnnn
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ،CH2 ،CH1) E-CON4
(CHFFT ،CHMIC ،CHSNC ،CH3
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ E-CON4ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ
ﻧﻌﻢ
DYNA MEM
E-CON4
ECON4_n
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ
ﻻ
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
—
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﻻ
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
—
) 1 = nﺇﻟﻰ G-MEM n (20
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﻧﻌﻢ
@GEOM
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ
—
@IMAGE
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ
ﻧﻌﻢ
LISTFILE
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
—
) 1 = nﺇﻟﻰ ،26ﻭ LIST n (Ans
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ/ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ
—
EQUATION
F-MEM
) 1 = nﺇﻟﻰ F-MEM n (20
G-MEM
ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ
) 1 = nﺇﻟﻰ LISTFILE n (6
MAT_VCT
11-3
ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ /ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
) A = nﺇﻟﻰ ،Zﻭ MAT n (Ans
ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﻧﻌﻢ
) A = nﺇﻟﻰ ،Zﻭ VCT n (Ans
ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ
ﻧﻌﻢ
@PICTPLT
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
—
PICTPLOT
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﻧﻌﻢ
PROGRAM
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ
—
ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﻧﻌﻢ
RECURSION
S-SHEET
_SETTING
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
—
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﻻ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﻧﻌﻢ
SETUP
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﻻ
STAT
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﻻ
STRING
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ
—
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ
ﻻ
ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
)ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ،ﻭ ﺭﺩﹼ ،ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺦ(
ﻻ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﻻ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻲ
ﻻ
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
—
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻻ
ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﻻ
) 1 = nﺇﻟﻰ STRING n (20
SYSTEM
TABLE
FINANCE
V-WIN
) 1 = nﺇﻟﻰ V-WIN n (6
Y=DATA
ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻀﺎﻑ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ *
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻴﺔ
ﻻ
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
1
ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ
ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
.g1m, .g2m, .g3m,
.g1r, .g2r
ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ
.g1e, .g2e, .g3e
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ eActivity
.g3a, .g3l
:.g3aﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ
:.g3lﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ
.g3p
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
11-4
ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ
ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
.g3b
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﺐ ﻣﻘﻠﺒﺔ
.bmp
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﻴﺔ
.txt
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
.csv
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ CSV
ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ
ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
* 1ﻳﻈﻬﺮ " "No Dataﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
kﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ
uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 4(FOLDER) 1(MKEFLDRﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻠﺪ.
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 8ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ.
• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ 9 :ﺍﻟﻰ Z, {, }, ’, ~, 0ﺍﻟﻰ ،Aﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ
ﺣﺮﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ "."Invalid Name
• ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ" ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ
ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ
• ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻠﺪﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .J
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻠﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ.
• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻠﺪﺍﺕ
ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ،ﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﻬﺎ.
• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﺰﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (11-10ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ
)ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ (4ﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻪ.
uﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ
.1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻪ
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 4(FOLDER) 2(RENFLDRﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ.
• ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ" ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ
ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
11-5
ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ
kﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ
ﹼ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 5(DETAILﻭ eﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻬﺎ
ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ g3pﺍﻭ ،g3bﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺿﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
ﻣﻠﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ g3p/g3b
)5(DETAIL
ﺃﻭ e
→
←
dﺃﻭ J
ﻣﻠﻒ g3p/g3b
)5(DETAIL
ﺃﻭ e
e
→
←
→
←
dﺃﻭ J
d
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ dﻭ eﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ،ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻠﻒ g3pﺍﻭ (g3bﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
ﺇﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻰ
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ cﻭ fﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﹼ
ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
11-6
kﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(SELECTﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﲟﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ )( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺒﻬﺎ .ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(SELECTﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺳﻴﻠﻐﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ،ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ.
→
)1(SELECT
←
• ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻪ .ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ.
w
→
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺪ ،ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ )( ﻓﻲ
ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ) ( ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺪ.
J
→
• ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ Memoryﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
11-7
kﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
uﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ
ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
.1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).2(COPY
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ .ﻳﻜﻮﻥ " "ROOTﻫﻮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ROOTﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ.
• ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ﻣﺤ ﹼﺪﺩ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(OPEN
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(SAVE • AS
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
.5ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺇﻃﻼﻗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
• ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .J
.6ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ) 5(g3mﺃﻭ ) 6(g2mﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ g3mﻫﻮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻟـ .fx-CG10/fx-CG20/fx-CG20 AU/fx-CG50ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ g2mﻫﻮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ fx-9860GIIﻭ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
).(FA-124
.7ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "! "Completeﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺇﲤﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ.
11-8
uﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
.1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ.
• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،g1m :ﻭ ،g2mﻭ ،g3mﻭ ،g1rﻭ .g2rﻭ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻷﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﳋﻄﺄ "."Invalid Type
• ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﳊﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ
) ،SETUPﻭ ،STATﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (11-3ﻭ ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(COPYﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ .ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻳﺔ،
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ "ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ" ،ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ " .11-3ﻧﻌﻢ" ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻳﺔ ،ﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ
"ﻻ" ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻳﺔ.
• ﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "! "Completeﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﲤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ.
uﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﲢﻘﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ،1ﻳﻘﻊ
ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ.
ﻭﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ " "Memory Fullﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ.
ﻭﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ " "Too Much Dataﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺟ ﹼﺪﺍ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ.
ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ.
• ) ... 1(Yesﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
• ) ... 6(Noﻳﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ.
• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Aﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ.
11-9
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ
ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻹﳊﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ،.g1mﻭ ،.g2mﻭ ،.g3mﻭ ،.g1rﺃﻭ .g2rﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ .ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ.
kﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ
uﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ
.1ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
.2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻠﹼﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ.
• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (11-7
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )6(DELETE
.4ﺭﺩﹼﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻓﻪ ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ.
uﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟـ""R
.1ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ(.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).3(SEARCH
• ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ " "Rﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ " "Rﻣﻈﻠﻼ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "Not Foundﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ.
11-10
kﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
uﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
.1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )4(BACKUP
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )1(SAVE
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ.
• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "Memory Fullﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻹﲤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ.
• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ.
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "! "Completeﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ .BACKUP.g3m
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .1
11-11
uﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
.1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Memoryﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )4(BACKUP
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )2(LOAD
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﺃﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﺪ
1
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ *.w
• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻘﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ.
* 1ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "No Dataﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ
ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﺳﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻰ
ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .1
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "! "Completeﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ.
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .1
11-12
kﲢﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﺰﺃﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ .ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ
ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ,ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ
ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ.
• ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﺇﻥ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ
ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ.
uﲢﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Memoryﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 5(OPTﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
ﻭ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "! "Completeﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Memoryﺍﻷﻭﻝ.
• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ،ﺭﲟﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ
ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
11-13
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ
ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ.
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• )} ... 1(DISPLAYﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ{
• )} ... 2(PWRPropﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ{
• )} ... 3(LANGUAGEﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ{
• )} ... 4(VERSIONﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ{
• )} ... 5(RESETﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ{
• )} ... 6(g)1(BattSetﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ{
• )} ... 6(g)2(UserNameﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ{
• )} ... 6(g)5(OS Updateﲢﺪﻳﺚ{
.2ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ
kﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(DISPLAYﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ.
• ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ eﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﰎ.
• ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ dﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ.
• ) 1(INITIALﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﺃﻭ ) !J(QUITﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ.
12-1
12
kﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ
uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(PWRPropﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ.
• ) 10} ... 1(10Minﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ{ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ(
• ) 60} ... 2(60Minﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ{
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﺃﻭ ) !J(QUITﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ.
uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(PWRPropﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﺃﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ".
• )} ... 1(30Secﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ 30ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ{ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ(
• )} ... 2(1Minﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ{
• )} ... 3(3Minﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ{
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﺃﻭ ) !J(QUITﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ.
12-2
kﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ LANGUAGEﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ.
uﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ
.1ﻓﻲ ﺣﲔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(LANGUAGEﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﺃﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(SELECT
.3ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ .ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .J
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﺃﻭ ) !J(QUITﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ.
uﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
.1ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(LANGUAGEﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).6(MENU
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﺃﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(SELECT
.4ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ .ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .J
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(MESSAGEﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ.
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﺃﻭ ) !J(QUITﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ.
12-3
kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ VERSIONﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
uﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ
.1ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 4(VERSIONﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﺃﻭ fﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺜﺒﺘﺔ( ﻧﺴﺦ ﻭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .3ﺇ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﺃﻭ ) !J(QUITﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ.
kﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ
.1ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 5(RESETﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ .1
• )} ... 1(SETUPﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ{
• )} ... 2(MAINﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ{
• )} ... 3(ADD-INﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ{
• )} ... 4(STRGMEMﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ{
• )} ... 5(A&Sﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ{
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(gﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ 2ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
• )} ... 1(M&Sﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ{
• )} ... 2(ALLﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺍﺕ{
• )} ... 3(LANGUAGEﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ{
12-4
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
)1(SETUP
䡬
)2(MAIN
䡬
ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
ﺣﺬﻑ
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ
ﺣﺬﻑ
ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ
ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ(
䡬
䡬
)3(ADD-IN
䡬
)4(STRGMEM
䡬
)5(A&S
)6(g)1(M&S
䡬
䡬
)6(g)2(ALL
䡬
䡬
䡬
䡬
䡬
)6(g
)3(LANGUAGE
*1
䡬
䡬
* 1ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(12-3ﻻ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ) (g3lﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﺩﺍﺀﻫﺎ.
.3ﺭﺩﹼﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺃﻭ
) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺋﻬﺎ.
.4ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ.
→
ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
) 1(Yesﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .3
ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
) 2(MAINﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .2
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﳒﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ .ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ
ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃ ﹼﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﹼ
ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
12-5
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(g)2(ALLﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ,ﺳﻮﻑ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻗﻢ
ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ .ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (12-3
• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (12-1
• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (12-2
• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(
kﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ،ﺗﺄﻛﹼﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻤﻠﻬﺎ.
uﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ
.1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).6(g)1(BattSet
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﺃﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ
ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
).1(SELECT
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ.
12-6
kﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﻳﻒ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻛﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ
ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ.
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻮﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ .ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ
ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ .ﺳﻮﻑ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ
ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ .ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻧﺴﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ.
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭ /ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ
ﹼ
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺇﻓﺴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
uﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ
.1ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
) 6(g)2(UserNameﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(EDIT
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ "."User Name
• ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ،ﻓﺈ ﹼﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ" ."Passwordﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ
ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .wﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﳌﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ،ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﹼﻙ
ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ " ."User Nameﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ،ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ "."Password
.3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
) (1ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺣﺘﻰ 19ﺍﺣﺮﻑ( ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺃﻭ .c
) (2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻚ )ﺣﺘﻰ 19ﺃﺣﺮﻑ( ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺃﻭ .c
) (3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ( ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
• ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺿﻐﻂ wﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ.
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ.
12-7
uﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(g)2(UserNameﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺳﻢ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).2(DELETE
• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ "."Password
.3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ.
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ.
kﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﻪ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
12-8
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﺸﺮ
ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﻳﺒﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺃﻭ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺘﲔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺘﲔ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﹼ
ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ.
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ .Linkﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
• }} ... {TRANSMITﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ{
• }} ... {RECVﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ{
• }} ... {EXAMﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ{
• }} ... {CABLEﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ{
• }} ... {WAKEUPﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ{
• }} ... {CAPTUREﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻻﻗﻄﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ{
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﺍﳌﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻟـ 3-pin
• ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ) :(BPSﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺼﻰ ) ،bps 9600ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ CFX-9850Gﺍﻭ (fx-7400G
ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺼﻰ ) ،bps 115200ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ،fx-CG20 AU ،fx-CG20 ،fx-CG10
،fx-9860G AU PLUS ،fx-9860GII ،fx-9860GII SD ،fx-CG50 ،fx-CG20 CN
،fx-9860G SD (OS 2.0) ،fx-9860G Slim (OS 1.11) ،fx-7400GII ،fx-9750GII
) fx-9860G (OS 2.0ﺃﻭ )(fx-9860G AU (OS 2.0
• ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ) :(PARITYﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ
• ﻣﻨﻔﺬ USB
• ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﳌﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ .USB
kﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻠﻢ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻠﻢ ،ﻳﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺘﲔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺘﲔ )ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ 3PINﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ( ،ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ
ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ.
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ USBﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ( ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ( ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ "ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ".
uﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ
.1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
).5(WAKEUP
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ.
• }} ... {Onﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ{
• }} ... {Offﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ{
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(On
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
13-1
13
.3ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻠﻢ.
.4ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﺳﻞ.
.5ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻞ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
kﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺇ ﹼ ﻣﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ g3pﺃﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ bmpﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ).!h(CAPTURE
ﺗﻮﻓﹼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
) ... 6(CAPTURE)1(Memoryﲢﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ .g3p
) ... 6(CAPTURE)2(BMPﲢﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ .bmp
ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﻗﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-38
kﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ
ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ "ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ" .ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ.
• ) ... 1(USB Flashﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(13-3
• ) ... 2(ScreenRecvﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ® Windows Vistaﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .ﳌﺰﻳﺪ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ.
ﺗﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
• )) ... 3(ScreenR(XPﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ Windows® XP
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
• ) ... 4(Projectorﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(13-16
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ
ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ "ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ" ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ
ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USB
ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
13-2
.1ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ
ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ USBﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﻤﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺨﻢ .ﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ
ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎﹰ،ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ.
kﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
• ﺍﳌﻨﻔﺬ USB
• ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
-32) Windows 7ﺑﺖ ،ﻭ -64ﺑﺖ(
-32) Windows 8.1ﺑﺖ ،ﻭ -64ﺑﺖ(
-32) Windows 10ﺑﺖ ،ﻭ -64ﺑﺖ(
10.6) Mac OS Xﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ( 10.8) OS X ،ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ( 10.12) macOS ،ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ(
kﺭﺑﻂ ﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺨﻢ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ.
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﳝﻜﻦ
ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
.1ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ.
.2ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﻟﺮﺑﻄﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ".
13-3
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(USB Flash
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "Preparing USBﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪ ﻭ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ.
.4ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،Windowsﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ .Windowsﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﺑﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻟـ Windows Explorerﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
:Windows 7ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ :Windows 8.1ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ :Windows 10ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ• ﻣﻊ ،Mac OS Xﺃﻭ OS Xﺃﻭ ،macOSﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ .Mac
ﺃﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻬﺎ.
• ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
.5ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ"
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(13-5
uﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﶈﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ
.1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،Windowsﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﶈﺮﹼﻙ ) ،E, F, Gﺍﻟﺦ( ﹼ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
.2ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ USBﻋﻦ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
• :Windowsﺃﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ "ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ" ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ
ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ "ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟـ USBﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺨﻢ" ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺮﻓﻪ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ
ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 1ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ .ﲢﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ".
• :Mac OSﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ )ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﻼﺕ( .ﲢﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
.3ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "Updating Main Memoryﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪ ﻭ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "! "Completeﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﲤﺎﻡ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ .ﻹﻏﻼﻕ
ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
.4ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟـ USBﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
13-4
kﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
uﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ USB
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ @MainMemﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ،ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "Storage Memory Fullﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ،
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ USBﺃﻳﻀﺎ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺠﻠﹼﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ .@MainMemﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ @MainMemﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﹼﺪ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
@MainMem
@3DGRAPH
@3DGRAPH
E-CON4
ECON4
F-MEM
FMEM
@GEOM
GEOM
G-MEM
GMEM
LISTFILE
LISTFILE
MAT_VCT
MAT_VCT
@PICTPLT
@PICTPLT
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
>ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ<
S-SHEET
V-WIN
SSHEET
VMEM
ROOT
ROOT
>ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ<
V-WIN x
ALPHA MEM
RECURSION
SETUP
STRING
CONICS
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
3DGRAPH
3DGMEMxx
3DVWINx
ECON4_x
SUxxx
SDxxx
CPxxx
F-MEM xx
@IMAGE
>ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ<
G-MEM xx
LIST xx
LISTFILE x
MAT ANS
MAT x
VCT ANS
VCT x
PICTPLOT
13-5
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ @MainMem
3DGRAPH.g3m
3DGMEMxx.g3m
3DVWINx.g3m
ECON4_x.g3m
SUxxx.g3m
SDxxx.g3m
CPxxx.g3m
FMEMxx.g3m
@IMAGE.g3m
>.g3mﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ<
GMEMxx.g3m
LISTxx.g3m
FILEx.g3m
MATANS.g3m
MATx.g3m
VCTANS.g3m
VCTx.g3m
PICTPLOT.g3m
>.g3mﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ<
>.txtﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ<
>.g3mﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ<
VMEMx.g3m
ALPHAMEM.g3m
RECUR.g3m
SETUP.g3m
STRING.g3m
CONICS.g3m
ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
ROOT
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﹼﺪ
@MainMem
ROOT
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
DYNA MEM
EQUATION
FINANCIAL
STAT
SYSTEM
TABLE
Y=DATA
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ @MainMem
DYNA MEM.g3m
EQUATION.g3m
FINANCE.g3m
STAT.g3m
SYSTEM.g3m
TABLE.g3m
Y=DATA.g3m
uﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ USB
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ
@MainMemﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻠﹼﺪﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ ،USBﻳﺘﻢ
ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﹼﺪ .@MainMemﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ @MainMemﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
• ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ @MainMemﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻠﹼﺪﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
→ SMEMﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ
) @MainMemﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ (1
ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ (2
ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ → (3ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ 3ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ
ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻰ " "SAVE-Fﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
ﹼ
• ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ g3mﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ @MainMemﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ USBﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ
ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ )ﺑﻨﻮﺩ( ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ g3mﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ
ﻋﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ g3mﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ،@MainMemﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ ) "USBﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(13-5ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ g3m,ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ.
• ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ .@MainMemﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ "ﲢﻘﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ" ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .11-3ﻳﻌﻨﻲ
ﺑـ "ﻧﻌﻢ" ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻳﺔ ،ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺑـ "ﻻ" ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ
ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻳﺔ.
13-6
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ،@MainMemﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﻘﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ
ﻣﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ " "SAVE-Fﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
ﹼ
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ
" "Memory ERRORﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ USBﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ) (.g3a/.g3Iﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ،@MainMemﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ .ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﺳﻮﻑ
ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ،ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻳﺔ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﲤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﺼﻲ ) (.txtﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ،@MainMem\PROGRAMﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻊ
ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻛﺎﳌﻠﻒ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻤﻮﻋﺔ .PROGRAMﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﲢﻜﻢ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-8
uﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
.1ﺃﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(13-3
.2ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻋ ﹼﺪﻝ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ،ﺃﻭ ﺃﺿﻒ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ﹰ.
• ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻠﹼﺪﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ،@MainMemﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ
) "USBﺻﻔﺤﺔ (13-5ﻭ "ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ ) "USBﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(13-6
.3ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(13-4
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭ ﻗﻢ
ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(11-13ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
13-7
uﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻨﺸﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ) .ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ 8ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ"(.
.2ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﻭ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
.3ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ،@MainMem\PROGRAMﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻔﺲ
ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ Windowsﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻔﻜﺮﺓ ،ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ TextEditﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ Mac
.OS
.4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
• ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ⇔ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-59
.5ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ،ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﻭ ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
• ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﲢﺖ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ،
ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ \.@MainMem\PROGRAM
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ txtﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ASCIIﺃﻭ .ANSI
.6ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(13-4
kﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﻄﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ .ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ.
• ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ) :(.g3aﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
• ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ) :(.g3lﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ "ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ"
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (12-3ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
• ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ) :(.g3lﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ "ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ"
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (12-3ﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
uﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(13-7ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ
ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ) (.g3a/.g3lﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﶈﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
13-8
kﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ USB
• ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
:Windowsﺃﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ "ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ" ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻓﻲﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ "ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺨﻢ ."USBﲢﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ
ﺁﻣﻦ".
:Mac OSﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﻼﺕ .ﲢﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﺪﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "File System ERRORﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ
USBﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺇﻻ ﹼ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ
ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ
") "File System ERRORﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(α-8
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ.
ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻞ .ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺴﲔ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﲢﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(11-13
• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ USBﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ،ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ،ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ.
13-9
.2ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺘﲔ
kﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
ﺗﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺁﻟﺘﲔ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺘﲔ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ *SB-62ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ.
* ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ.
uﺭﺑﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺗﲔ
.1ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻜﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺗﲔ.
.2ﺃﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺗﲔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ.
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺘﲔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻛـ .3PIN
) (1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Link
) (2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ،4(CABLEﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ.
) (3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).2(3PIN
ﻛﺎﺑﻞ SB-62
ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
• ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﹼ
fx-CG50 ،fx-CG20 CN ،fx-CG20 AU ،fx-CG20 ،fx-CG10
ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﱘ
fx-9860G Slim (OS ،fx-7400GII ،fx-9750GII ،fx-9860G AU PLUS ،fx-9860GII ،fx-9860GII SD
) ،fx-9860G AU (OS 2.0) ،fx-9860G (OS 2.0) ،fx-9860G SD (OS 2.0) ،1.11ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ CFX-9850G
13-10
kﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ
ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 2(RECVﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﳊﲔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﺮﻉ
ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ.
ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ
ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(TRANSMITﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• }} ... {SELECTﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ{
• }} ... {CURRENTﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ* 1ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ{
* 1ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ.
uﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ
)ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(SELECTﺃﻭ ) 2(CURRENTﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• }} ... {SELECTﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ{
• }} ... {ALLﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ{
• }} ... {TRANSMITﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ{
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﺃﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ )1(SELECT
ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ .ﻭ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ"" .ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) 6(TRANSMITﻳﺮﺳﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ.
• ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(SELECTﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
13-11
uﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) .6(TRANSMITﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ.
• ) ... 1(Yesﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
• ) ... 6(Noﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .A
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 11-3ﻭ .(11-4ﻭ
ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟـ"ﻧﻌﻢ" ﻭ "ﻻ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ "ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ.
ﹼ
ﻧﻌﻢ :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﺗﻈﻬﺮ
ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺄﻝ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
13-12
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭ ) 6(Noﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
ﻻ :ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
kﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﻻﺣﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ،
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺘﺔ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﻋﻨﺪ
ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
• ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻌﺎ ،ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺗﲔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ
ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ .ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ
ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﲤﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ Jﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ،
ﻓﺄﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻻﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ.
• ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﳑﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﳌﺴﺢ
ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻹﻓﺴﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ fx-CG50ﺍﻟﻰ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ،ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻠﹼﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﻻ ﺍﻠﹼﺪﺍﺕ(.
kﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ) (fx-CG50ﻭ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ
ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺘﲔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(13-10ﻭ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ
ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ.
uﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ
ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺎﹰ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ) (fx-CG50ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﱘ.
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﱘ .ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ) (Y=DATAﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ،fx-9860GIIﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎﹰ ،ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ fx-9860GIIﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ.
13-13
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ) (fx-CG50ﺍﻟﻰ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ
ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ.
ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
@3DGRAPH
ALPHAMEM
CONICS
DYNA
E-CON4
EQUATION
FMEM
@GEOM
GMEM
LIST n
LIST FILE n
MAT n
VCT n
@PICTPLT
PROGRAM
RECUR
SETUP
SSHEET
STAT
STRING n
SYSTEM
TABLE
FINANCE
VMEM
Y=DATA
◎ :ﻣﺮﺳﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ
×
◎
*2
×
*8
◎
◎
×
*3* 2
*2
*2
fx-9750GII
×
◎
*2
×
*8
◎
◎
×
*3* 2
*2
*2
fx-7400GII
×
◎
×
×
×
◎
◎
×
*3* 2
*2
*2
×
◎
*2
×
×
◎
◎
×
*3* 2
*2
*2
◎
×
×
*4
*2
*5
*6* 2
*2
◎
×
◎
*2
*7
*7* 3* 2
◎
×
×
*4
*2
*5
×
*2
◎
×
◎
*2
*7
*7* 3* 2
◎
×
×
*4
*2
*5
×
*2
◎
×
◎
*2
*7
*7* 3* 2
◎
×
×
*4
*2
*5
×
*2
×
×
◎
*2
*7
*7* 3* 2
*1
CFX-9850G
× :ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺳﻞ
*fx-9860GII SD (OS 2.0), fx-9860GII (OS 2.0), fx-9860G AU PLUS (OS 2.0), 1
)fx- 9860G Slim (OS 1.11), fx-9860G SD (OS 2.0), fx-9860G (OS 2.0), fx-9860G AU (OS 2.0
* 2ﻻ ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ.
* 3ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ " "Thinﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ "."Normal
* 4ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ،ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ.
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺠﺞ ﻣﻦ Pxlchg ،PxlOff ،PxlOn ،Textﻭ ( PxlTestﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ،ﻭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ
ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺪﻡ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ
.Syntax ERROR
* 5ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ) (fx-CG50ﻟﻜﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﲔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Thinﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ fx-CG50ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ " ."Sketch Lineﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ " "Normalﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ .ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ) (fx-CG50ﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﻦ
ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ.
* 6ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ.
* 7ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ.
* 8ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑـ E-CON2/E-CON3ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
13-14
uﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ).(fx-CG50
• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ) (Y=DATAﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ fx-9860GIIﺍﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﲔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ.
• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ،ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﳊﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻗﺪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ .ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ) (Y=DATAﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ fx-9860GIIﺍﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ )ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(
ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﰎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ) Wakeupﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ،(13-1ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .Wakeup
ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﺃﻗﺪﻡ ﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ CASIOﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
).(fx-CG50
ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ALPHAMEM, CONICS, DYNA,ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ.
EQUATION, FMEM, Geometry,
LIST n, LIST FILE n, MAT n,
RECUR, SSHEET, STRING n,
TABLE
CAPT n, PICT n, SYSTEM,
E-CON3
SETUP, STAT, FINANCE
GMEM
Program
VMEM, Y=DATA
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ
ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺳﻞ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ .ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ) (fx-CG50ﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ .ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ.
• ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺣﺠﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ Textﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
• ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ،PxlOnﻭ ،PxlOffﻭ ،Pxlchgﻭ
( PxlTestﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﺞ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ .ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ).(fx-CG50
13-15
.3ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ CASIOﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
kﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ
ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
http://edu.casio.com/support/projector/
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
• ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ".
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).4(Projector
kﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ
ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ
• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﻘﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﺮﺟ ﹼﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ،ﺃﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺭﺑﻄﻪ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺼﺤﺢ
ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ .ﺃﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ .USBﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ .ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ .USB
• ﺑﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺃﻓﺼﻞ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ .USB
13-16
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ
.1ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ
ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ.
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ.
kﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ
ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻳﺘﻢ
ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺓ ] [F1ﺍﻟﻰ ] [F6ﺃﻭ ] ،[OPTNﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ
ﹼ
ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻼﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ.
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ) 1ﺍﻟﻰ 6ﺃﻭ (Kﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ.
• ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ dﻭ eﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
• ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .J
uﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ .3 (Draw) – 5:Vector :ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ
ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺛﻨﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ 3ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ " ،"5:Vectorﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ .w
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ 3ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .f
14
14-1
kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ
ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ.
ﹼ
1(File) u
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ:
ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ
1:New
ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ
2:Open
ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ
3:Save as
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ
4:Key Help
1e(View) u
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ:
ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ
1:Zoom Box
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-35
2:Pan
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-36
3:Scroll
ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
4:Zoom In
ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
5:Zoom Out
ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﻤﻸ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
6:Zoom to Fit
2(Edit) u
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ:
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ
1:Undo/Redo
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
2:Select All
ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
3:Deselect All
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻀﻠﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-19
4:Select Figure
ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ
5:Delete
ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
6:Clear All
14-2
3(Draw) u
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ:
ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ
1:Point
ﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ
2:Line Segment
ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ
3:Infinite Line
ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ
4:Ray
ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺔ
5:Vector
ﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ
6:Circle
ﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻮﺱ
7:Arc
ﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ
)8:SemiCirc (Diam
3e(Draw Spec) u
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ:
ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ
1:Triangle
ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ
2:Isosc Triangle
ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ
3:Rectangle
ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ
4:Square
ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻀﻠﻊ
5:Polygon
ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻀﻠﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ
6:Regular n-gon
ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
)7:Function f(x
4(Construct) u
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ:
ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﻄﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ
1:Perp Bisector
ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ
2:Perpendicular
ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ
3:Midpoint
ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ
4:Intersection
ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
5:Angle Bisector
ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ
6:Parallel
ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﳑﺎﺱ
7:Tangent
ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ
8:Attached Angle
14-3
5(Transform) u
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ:
ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ
1:Reflection
ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ
2:Translation
ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺔ
)3:Trans(Sel Vec
ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ
4:Rotation
ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ
5:Dilation
ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ 180ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ
6:Symmetry
6(Animate) u
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ:
ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﻴﺌﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﻳﻦ
1:Add Animation
ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﻟﻠﺸﻴﺌﲔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﻳﻦ
2:Replace Anima
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ
3:Trace
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ
4:Edit Animation
ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺓ
)5:Go (once
ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺭﺍ
)6:Go (repeat
ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-62
7:Add Table
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ
8:Display Table
K(Option) u
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ:
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ
1:Text
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ
2:Expression
ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ
3:Number Format
ﻓﺘﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ
4:Clr Constraint
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺷﻴﺎﺀ
5:Show All
ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ
6:Hide
ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﻤﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ.
7:Area Calc
14-4
K(Option)e(Properties) u
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ:
ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ
1:to the front
ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻒ
2:to the back
ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ
3:All TEXT
ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ
4:Fade I/O
ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﻠﻒ (g3p
5:Store Picture
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) ( ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ،
ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ،ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ.
uﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻳﺘﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
uﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺧﺎﺹ
ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ) bﺍﻟﻰ (jﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ
ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
j
i
h
g
f
e
d
c
b
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ 1(File) – 4:Key Helpﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ aﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﻓﹼﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ
ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ.
ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ J
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
14-5
kﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ
ﻳﺒﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ.
ﹼ
uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.1(File) – 1:New :
• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
.2ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(Yes
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﹰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
uﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.1(File) – 2:Open :
• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ.
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(STRGMEMﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ .g3pﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(14-8
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
.3ﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(Yes
• ﺳﻴﻔﺘﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .2
14-6
uﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.1(File) – 2:Open :
• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
).1(DELETE
• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ.
.4ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .J
uﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﲢﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.1(File) – 3:Save as :
• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭ ﻭﻳﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ.
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 8ﺍﺣﺮﻑ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ Aﺍﻟﻰ Z -ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ 0ﺍﻟﻰ 9
ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ )} {(• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ.
14-7
kﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ) (g3pﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻓﺘﺤﺖ ﻣﻠﻒ ،g3pﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ g3pﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ.
• ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
.(14-37
• ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ.
uﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ g3pﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.1(File) – 2:Open :
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )6(STRGMEM
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ "?."Clear current image
.4ﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(Yes
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﺘﻮ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ،ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺸﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ
ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .1ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ .6
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ،ﺳﻴﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ.
14-8
kﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﻠﻒ (g3pﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ
ﻭﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ).(g3p
ﹼ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
uﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
)].K(Option)e(Properties) – 5:Store Picture w(Pict [1~20
.2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 20ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
• ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
uﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﲢﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
).K(Option)e(Properties) – 5:Store Picture cw(Save As
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﲢﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
.(5-21
14-9
kﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ
ﺗﺒﲔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﹼ
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-41
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-1
ﻳﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ،ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ
ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ.
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ
ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-31
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ،ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ
ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ،ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ.
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻀﻠﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﹰ
)ﻳﺼﻠﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﻀﻠﻌﺎﺕ(.
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-19
ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-32
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﻤﻴﻊ،
ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ،ﻭﺣﺬﻑ
ﺍﳉﻤﻴﻊ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻄﻪ ﻣﺮﹼﺗﲔ(
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ !bﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ
ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-63
ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺧﺎﺹ.
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-5
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ /ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-30
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ /ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-37
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ،ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ
ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ
ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ) .ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-36
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-37
14-10
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-5
.2ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ
ﻳﺒﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﹼ
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ،ﻭﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻀﻠﻌﺎﺕ ،ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ) .ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) ،([F3](Drawﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
)([F3][g](Draw Spec
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )([F2](Edit
• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﻄﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ،ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ) .ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )([F4](Construct
• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )([F5](Transform
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ،ﻭﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ،ﻭﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )([F2](Edit
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(Drawﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ،ﻭﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ
ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ،ﻭﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ،ﻭﺍﳌﻀﻠﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ.
uﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3(Draw) – 1:Point :
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
ﻳﺨﻄﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
• ﺳﻮﻑ
ﹼ
• ﺳﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺗﻬﺎ.
.3ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﺃﻭ oﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﺗﺒﻘﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﺎ ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ .ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﺃﻭ
.o
14-11
uﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ،
ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ.
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3(Draw) – 1:Point :
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ.
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻂ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺑـ "."䡺
→
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
uﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3(Draw) – 2:Line Segment :
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﲔ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻭ 3ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
.wﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ.
14-12
uﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3(Draw) – 3:Infinite Line :
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺮ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ.
uﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3(Draw) – 4:Ray :
.2ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
.3ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﳝﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
uﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺔ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3(Draw) – 5:Vector :
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺔ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺔ.
14-13
uﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3(Draw) – 6:Circle :
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
.w
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ .ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻭ 3ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
ﺇﻣﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ.
ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﹼ
uﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻮﺱ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3(Draw) – 7:Arc :
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺱ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
.w
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
.4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ.
.....
.5ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﻭﻣﻦ
ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ،ﻓﻲ
ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ.
14-14
uﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3(Draw) – 8:SemiCirc (Diam) :
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ.
• ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ،ﳝﺮ ﹼ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ w
ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﺮﺳﻢ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ.
uﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3e(Draw Spec) – 1:Triangle :
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﺧﺮ.
• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ،ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺮﺳﻤﻪ.
14-15
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ.
→
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ،2ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ
ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻸ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ،ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ،
,ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ،ﻭ ﻣﻀﻠﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ.
ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﹼﺓ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ.
uﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3e(Draw Spec) – 2:Isosc Triangle :
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﺍﻟﻰ 4ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(14-15
• ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ.
uﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
3e(Draw Spec) – 3:Rectangleﺃﻭ .3e(Draw Spec) – 4:Square
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﺧﺮ.
• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣ ﹼﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ،ﻣﺸﻴﺮﺍ ﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ( ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ.
14-16
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ،2ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ
ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ،ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .3
uﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3e(Draw Spec) – 5:Polygon :
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮ ﹼﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ.
.3ﻹﲤﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ ،ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
→
ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ Jﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ،3ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ،ﻭﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻠﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ.
14-17
uﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻀﻠﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3e(Draw Spec) – 6:Regular n-gon :
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻳﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ.
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 3ﺍﻟﻰ 12ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﺍﻟﻰ 4ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(14-15
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻀﻠﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .2
uﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3e(Draw Spec) – 7:Function f(x) :
• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﻟﺮﺳﻤﻬﺎ.
→
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
• ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ ﻫﻮ ).Y=f(x
ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ،Rad
ﹼ
14-18
kﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ )ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ( ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ,ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻨﻪ.
ﻳﺒﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ.
ﹼ
uﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ
.1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺭﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ oﺃﻭ Jﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ.
ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ.
.2ﹼ
• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺎ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ
ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ
ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ.
ﺍﻟﻰ kﻭﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺧﻂ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺭﻗﻴﻘﺎ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ
→
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻭ 3ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺗﻬﺎ.
uﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻀﻠﻌﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ
.1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺭﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ oﺃﻭ Jﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ.
ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ.
.2ﹼ
• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ
ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ.
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ )ﺭﺃﺱ،ﻭ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ،ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(
14-19
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ xﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.2(Edit) – 4:Select Figure :
• ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﹰ.
uﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ
.1ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺭﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ oﺍﻭ Jﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ.
ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ.
.2ﹼ
• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ .kﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺎ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﺫﺍ
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ kﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ.
→
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ( .k
uﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.2(Edit) – 2:Select All :
uﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ oﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.2(Edit) – 3:Deselect All :
14-20
kﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻄﻂ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ،ﺇﻣﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ،ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ
ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ،ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.2(Edit) – 2:Select All :
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) !f(FORMATﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻤﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ.
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) b(Char Colorﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ bﺍﻟﻰ i
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) c(Line Styleﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.b (Norm)، c (Thick)، f (Thin) :
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) d(Line Colorﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ bﺍﻟﻰ i
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺇﻣﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) e(Area Colorﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ bﺍﻟﻰ i
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ .ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻣﻼﺀ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).v(Clear
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻔﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺇﻣﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) f(Paint Styleﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) b(Normalﺃﻭ
).c(Lighter
14-21
.4ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
→
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-19ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ
ﻧﻮﻉ ﻟﻮﻧﻪ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻪ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).!f (FORMAT
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻈﻬﺮﺓ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ.
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 3ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
.(14-21
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 4(Constructﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺷﻄﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ،ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ،ﻭ ﺷﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ،ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ.
uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﻄﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ
.1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮﻩ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.4(Construct) – 1:Perp Bisector :
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﻄﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ.
→
ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ،ﻭ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﳌﻀﻠﻊ ،ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
14-22
uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ
.1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.4(Construct) – 2:Perpendicular :
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭ ﳝﺮ ﹼ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ.
→
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ،
ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ،ﻧﺎﻗﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﺃﻭ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ
.1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮﻫﺎ
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.4(Construct) – 3:Midpoint :
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﻄﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ.
→
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ،ﻭﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ ،ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
14-23
uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﲔ
.1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮﻫﺎ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.4(Construct) – 4:Intersection :
• ﻳﺨﻄﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﲔ.
→
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺘﲔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ
ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﲔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ :ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ،ﻭ ﺧﻂ ,ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ،ﻧﺎﻗﻞ ،ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ ،ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ،ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺱ.
uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﻄﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ
.1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.4(Construct) – 5:Angle Bisector :
• ﺳﻴﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻌﲔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﲔ ﺑﺎﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻪ.
→
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﻄﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )ﺃﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻴﺌﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﲔ( :ﺧﻂ
ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﺌﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﲔ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﻄﺮﻳﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ.
14-24
uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ
.1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ،ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.4(Construct) – 6:Parallel :
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭ ﳝﺮ ﹼ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ .ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ) (
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ.
→
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
• ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﻧﺎﻗﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ
• ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ
uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﳑﺎﺱ
.1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.4(Construct) – 7:Tangent :
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "."Select Curve
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ.
ﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ
• ﺣﺮ ﹼ
ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ.
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻫﻮ ﳑﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
→
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ،ﺃﻭ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ،ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺱ ،ﺃﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
14-25
uﻹﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ
.1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺒﻪ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.4(Construct) – 8:Attached Angle :
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﻓﻖ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ.
→
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " ،"Select Display Positionﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺒﲔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﻳﻦ.
→
→
→
.3ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 5(Transformﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﻣﺜﻞ
ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ،ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ،ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ.
uﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ
.1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻜﺴﻪ.
.2ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ.
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.5(Transform) – 1:Reflection :
• ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ""Select Axis
.4ﺣﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻗﺮﺏ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ.
• ﺣﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ
ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ.
14-26
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻛﺎﶈﻮﺭ.
→
→
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ،ﻭ ﺧﻂ ،ﻭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ،ﻭ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-ﺃﻭ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ y-ﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ
.1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺘﻪ .ﻫﻨﺎ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.5(Transform) – 2:Translation :
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ.
.3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ.
• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ 1ﻫﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ،X-ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ 2ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ .Y-
.4ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .3
→
→
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ.
.1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺮﻳﻜﻪ .ﻫﻨﺎ ،ﺳﻨﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ،ﺛﻢ ،ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.5(Transform) – 3:Trans(Sel Vec) :
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "."Select Vector
.3ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ.
ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ
• ﹼ
ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ.
14-27
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ.
→
→
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺟﺰﺋﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ.
uﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ
.1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ .ﻫﻨﺎ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻘﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.5(Transform) – 4:Rotation :
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "."Sel Rotation Center
ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ.
.3ﹼ
.4ﺇﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ.
.5ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ )ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ،ﻳﺪﻭﹼﺭ ﺍﳌﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﶈ ﹼﺪﺩ.
→
→
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺟﺰﺋﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﺗﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ.
uﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ
.1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲤﺪﻳﺪﻩ .ﻫﻨﺎ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.5(Transform) – 5:Dilation :
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "."Sel Dilation Center
• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ.
ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ.
.3ﹼ
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ.
14-28
.5ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻟـ 0.1 < | x | < 10ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ.
→
→
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺟﺰﺋﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ.
• ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ
ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ2 :
ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ
ﺃﺻﻠﻲ
ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ-1 :
ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ0.5 :
uﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻲ 180ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ
.1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ .ﻫﻨﺎ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.5(Transform) – 6:Symmetry :
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "."Select Center Point
ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
.3ﹼ
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺪﻭﹼﺭ 180ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ .ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ.
→
14-29
kﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﰎ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ.
uﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ * ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
.2(Edit) – 1:Undo/Redo
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ.
• ﻗﻢ ﲟﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ) 2(Edit) – 6:Clear All :ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(14-32
• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-35
• ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-36
• ﲤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-36
• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-35
• ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-33
uﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ * ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
.2(Edit) – 1:Undo/Redo
kﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻜﻞ ،ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ .ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(14-19
uﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺷﻜﻞ
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﲡﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺄﻣﲔ ﺟﺰﺀ )ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ( ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(14-47ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ )ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ،ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(14-48
.1ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺮﻳﻜﻪ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ .ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ،
ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ.
ﺛﻼﺙ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ
ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ
14-30
ﺭﺃﺱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .v
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ
• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .1
ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ
ﺛﻼﺙ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ
ﺍﻟﻰ ،ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻀﻤﻦ
ﺭﺃﺱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ.
ﺳﻴﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ.
•
ﹼ
ﺛﻼﺙ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ
ﺭﺃﺱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ
ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ
.4ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
ﺛﻼﺙ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ
ﺭﺃﺱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ
ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ vﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ،
ﹼ
)ﲢﻮﻳﻞ( ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ.
→
→
14-31
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻞ
uﳊﺬﻑ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ
.1ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ .ﳊﺬﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ،
ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Dﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.2(Edit) – 5:Delete :
• ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ.
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.2(Edit) – 6:Clear All :
• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ.
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺳﻴﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻠﺔ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ oﻣﺮﹼﺗﲔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
kﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
uﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ
.1ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻪ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.K(Option) – 6:Hide :
• ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ.
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺘﻔﻴﺔ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ .K(Option) – 5:Show All :ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
kﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ
ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﹰ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺪﻳﺲ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺮﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ )ﺭﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ(.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﺪﺳﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ
ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻡ ،ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ.
• ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ.K(Option)e(Properties) – 1:to the front :
• ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻒ.K(Option)e(Properties) – 2:to the back :
• ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ.K(Option)e(Properties) – 3:All TEXT :
14-32
.3ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ
ﻳﻮﻓﹼﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ،ﻭ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ .ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ،ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮﻫﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ.
kﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ )ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ( ﻣﻦ
ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ.
→
On :Grid ،On :Axes
Line :Grid ،Scale :Axes
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) !m (SETUPﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "Gridﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ.
ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ:
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ:
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
)1(On
ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
)2(Off
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
)3(Line
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 3ﻭﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .4
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "Grid Spaceﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1 (Space
.4ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 0.01ﺍﻟﻰ ،1000ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻟـ .0.01
14-33
.5ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "Axesﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ.
ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ:
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ:
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
)1(On
ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
)2(Off
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ
)3(Scale
.6ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ
ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ.
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ،Deg :ﻭ Rad
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ mm :ﻭ cmﻭ mﻭ kmﻭ inchﻭ feetﻭ yardﻭ mile
→
On :Angle Unit ،Rad :Angle
On (mm) :Length Unit
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) !m(SET UPﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ.
ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ:
ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﻇﻠﻞ " "Angleﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(Deg
ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺏ
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﻇﻠﻞ " "Angleﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).2(Rad
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﻇﻠﻞ " "Angle Unitﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(On
ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﻇﻠﻞ " "Angle Unitﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).2(Off
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ
.1ﻇﻠﻞ " "Length Unitﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(On
.2ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ bﺍﻟﻰ i
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ.
ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ
ﻇﻠﻞ " "Length Unitﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).2(Off
.3ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
14-34
kﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ) (Xminﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ )(Xmax
ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ y-ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻟـ ) 1:2ﻣﺤﻮﺭ :x-ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ،(y-ﻟﻜﻦ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰﺀ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ y-ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ).(Ymid
Ymid
Xmin
Xman
uﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ:
).!3 (V-WIN
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻟـ ،Xminﻭ ،Xmaxﻭ .Ymid
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1 (INITIAL
.3ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
kﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻭ ﲤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻧﻮﻋﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ،
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻧﺘﺰﺍﻉ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.1e(View) – 2:Pan :
• ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺰﺍﻋﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
.2ﹼ
• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﻰ .
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ.
14-35
.4ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
→
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﻭ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ،ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﲔ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ )ﲢﺮﻳﻚ( ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
uﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .ﺍﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.1e(View) – 3:Scroll :
• ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ،ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻭ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ.
.3ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
kﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ
ﻳﻮﻓﹼﺮ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ
ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ.
ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﹼ
uﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.1e(View) – 1:Zoom Box :
• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﻣﻦ
.2ﹼ
ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ.
.3ﹼ
• ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ،ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
.4ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﳝﺘ ﹼﺪ ﻟﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ.
→
14-36
uﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ
ﳌﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ +ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.1e(View) – 4:Zoom In :
ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ -ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.1e(View) – 5:Zoom Out :
uﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ -ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.1e(View) – 6:Zoom to Fit :
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
→
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
).3e(Draw Spec) – 7:Function f(x
kﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ g3pﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ .ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
K(Option)e(Properties) – 4:Fade I/Oﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ
)ﺑﺎﻫﺖ (I/Oﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-12
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﺪﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ.
kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ.
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
.1ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.K(Option) – 1:Text :
• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻟﻔﺎ.
14-37
.3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 31ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
→
.4ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺃﻱ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺫﻟﻚ.
• ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(14-30
→
uﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
.1ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
.4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
→
.5ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻣﺮﺗﲔ.
14-38
kﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ
ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ .ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻧﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ،ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ.
uﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ
.1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻨﻘﻮﻡ
ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ .A
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ dﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ.
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺁﻟﻔﺎ.
14-39
.6ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 14ﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ.
→
.7ﻟﻺﻏﻼﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻣﺮﺗﲔ.
uﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ
.1ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ dﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﺎﻡ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ.
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ.
• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ.
.6ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 14ﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ.
→
.7ﻟﻺﻏﻼﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻣﺮﺗﲔ.
14-40
.5ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ Jﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ
ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ:
ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ/ﻃﻮﻝ،ﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﺪﺭ،ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ،ﻭ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ،ﻭ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ،ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ،ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ،ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻥ،ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ،ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ،ﻭ
ﲤﺎﺱ ،ﻭ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ،ﻭ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ،ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ.
ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﺒﻖ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ
ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ،ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ )ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ( ،ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻄﲔ ،ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ.
ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﺒﻖ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ،
ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ،ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﲔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ.
kﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ
ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ
ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ،ﺍﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ،ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﳋﻂ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ،ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ) wﺃﻭ ،(fﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ.
14-41
ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ،ﻭ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ.
ﹼ
ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ
ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ /ﻃﻮﻝ
ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ
ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﲔ .ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ
ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ،ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ
ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ،ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ
ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﻣﻨﺤﺪﺭ
ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ،ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ،ﻭﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺧﻂ
ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ
ﻣﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﺍﳋﻂ ،ﻭﺷﻌﺎﻉ ،ﻗﻄﻌﺔ
ﺧﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ
ﺃﻱ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺧﻂ،
ﻭﺷﻌﺎﻉ ،ﻭﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ،ﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ،
ﻭﻗﻮﺱ ،ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ(
ﻻ
ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ
ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )"="EXPR
ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ(
ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻻ
ﻣﺘﺠﻪ
ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ
ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﻭ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻭ
ﻗﻮﺱ
ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ،ﻭﻧﺼﻒ
ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻭ ﻗﻮﺱ
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ
ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﻭ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ
ﻗﻮﺱ
ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
ﻣﺤﻴﻂ
ﻣﻀﻠﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ
ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ
ﺃﻱ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ،ﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﻭ
ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭ ﻗﻮﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﻠﻊ
ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ
ﻻ*
ﺧﻄﲔ،ﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻂ ،ﻭ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ،
ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ* 2ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ
ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺛﻨﲔ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ،ﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ،ﺃﻭ
ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﻗﻮﺱ
ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﳑﺎﺳﺎ
ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ*
1
ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ*
1
ﲤﺎﺱ
ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻘﻔﻞ
ﻻ*
3
ﻻ
3
ﻧﻌﻢ
* 1ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻛﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ.
* 2ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ،ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ .ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﺮﹼﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﲔ.
* 3ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻬﺎ.
14-42
ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻘﻔﻞ
ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ
ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﲔ
ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ.
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺧﻂ ،ﻭﻗﻮﺱ ،ﻭﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ
ﻣﺘﺠﻪ
ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ/
ﺍﳌﻨﺤﻨﻲ
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ
ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺄﺓ ﺑﺄﻣﺮ
ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ
ﻻ
ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ
ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ
ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺄﺓ ﺑﺄﻣﺮ
5 – 5:Dilation
ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ
ﻻ
ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ /ﻧﺺ
ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻪ
ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ
ﻻ
5 – 4:Rotation
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ.
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ .ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ.
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻂ
.1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮﻫﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ.
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ dﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﺎﻡ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ.
14-43
.4ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ.
• ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻃﻮﻟﻬﺎ ،ﻭﺍﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ،ﻭﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺘﻬﺎ.
ﺍﳌﻴﻞ
ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ
.5ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻣﺮﺗﲔ.
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ:
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ABCDﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻣﻜﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ،Aﻭ ،Dﻭ Bﻭﻧﻘﺎﻁ ،Aﻭ ،Dﻭ C
.1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ.
.2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ،Aﻭ ،Dﻭ .B
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ADBﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ.
ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
.4ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﹼ
• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻈﻠﻞ ﻭﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ.
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ oﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ،Aﻭ Dﻭ .C
• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ADCﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ .ﻳﻈﻬﺮ
ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﲔ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ.
.6ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
14-44
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻨﺠﻤﲔ )``( ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ .ﻳﺸﻴﺮ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ.
kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻧﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ
.1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ
.2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ACﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ .BC
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ.
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﺠﻢ ) ∠ACBﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ.
.4ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ) ∠ACBﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻧﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ،90ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ∠ACB 90ﺩﺭﺟﺔ.
→
.5ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻣﺮﺗﲔ.
14-45
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
• ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 5ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ،ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(14-47
• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ )ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
(14-47ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ )ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ،ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(14-48
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ )ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳌﺴﺢ (2(Edit) – 6:Clear All :ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻃﻮﻝ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ،ﻭ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ،ﻭ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ. ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﺈ ﹼﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﻩ ﺟ ﹼﺪﺍ.
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﻣﻊ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ (10.7ﺍﻟﻰ .120
→
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻻﻳﺠﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺟ ﹼﺪﺍ ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺟ ﹼﺪﺍ ﻟﻴﺮﺍﻩ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ
ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ
ﹼ
ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻠﻎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻬﺎ.
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﹼﺓ ،ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ.
14-46
kﻗﻔﻞ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ
ﺑـ "ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ" ﻧﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺮﻳﻜﻪ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﹼﺎ ﻧﻘﻔﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﻧﺤﺮﻙ
ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ،ﻭﺳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ.
uﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ
ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻳﻘﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻔﺘﺢ.
ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ
ﻳﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ
uﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-45ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ .ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﻣﻘﻔﻼ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
→
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ
،ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
→
• ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﺎﻡ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
] [Lockﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ .wﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ
→
14-47
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ "ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻘﻔﻞ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ
ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(14-41
uﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ
،ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﺎﻡ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
] [Unlockﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ .wﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ
uﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.K(Option) – 4:Clr Constraint :
ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﻔﻠﺔ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻘﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ،ﻛﺎﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﻔﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺒﻪ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ )ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﺽ(
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ) (ABCﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ABﻭﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ BC
ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﻥ )ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ABﻭ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ (BC
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﲤﺮ ﹼ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Aﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ
) (Bﺧﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ A ،Bﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﺙ(
• ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
.4(Construct) – 1:Perp Bisector
• ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ )ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ( ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.5(Transform) – 5:Dilation :
14-48
kﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ
ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ.
ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ :ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ/ﻃﻮﻝ ،ﻭﻣﻨﺤﺪﺭ ،ﻭﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ،ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ،
ﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ،ﻭﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ،ﻭﻣﺤﻴﻂ ،ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ،ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ،ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ.
uﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ:
ﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
.1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺒﻪ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ eﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [Pasteﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ.
→
14-49
.5ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ.
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ vﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻠﺼﻖ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ،
ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(14-30
→
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ )!j(PASTE
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
kﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ "ﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
،14-49ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﳊﺎﻕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﻧﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ.
ﻃﻮﻝ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ:
ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ )ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ(
ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ(
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
uﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ
.1ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
• ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻪ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ.
14-50
.3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 14ﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ.
• ﳊﺬﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .o
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ w
• ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻣﺮﺗﲔ.
.5ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﹼ
kﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ،ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳋﻂ ،ﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ،ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ:
ﻣﻊ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ABﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ) CDﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Cﻋﻠﻰ (ABﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ∠ACDﻭ ∠DCBﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ.
)(54.72 + 125.28 = 180.00
• ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟـ ∠ACDﻭ ،∠DCBﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(14-49
14-51
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.K(Option) – 2:Expression :
• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ "= "EXPRﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ.
• ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ
.2ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ.
• ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ )@( ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ،@1 :ﻭ ،@2
ﺇﻟﺦ .ﻣﻨﺬ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ) ،DCB (@1ﻭ ) ACD (@2ﻫﻨﺎ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ.@1+@2 :
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ "@" ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ .1
.3ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻟـ "=."EXPR
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ،"@1X" ،ﻭ " ،"@1Yﺍﻟﺦ .ﻳﺸﻴﺮ " "@1Xﺇﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻥ x-ﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ " "@1Yﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ y-ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻥ y-
ﳌﺘﺠﻪ.
14-52
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﻜﺎﻝ،
ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ABCﻭﻣﺜﻠﺚ ’ A’B’Cﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻸ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺁﺧﺮ
ﻏﻴﺮ " .("Clearﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
.(14-21
uﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ:
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ ﳌﺜﻠﺜﲔ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
.1ﺇﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻛﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ،
ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻛﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.K(Option) – 7:Area Calc :
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ .ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ
ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻠﲔ.
.3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﳊﺴﺎﺑﻪ )ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ( ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ،ﻭ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ.
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ " "@1 DABCﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ،ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ") "@1ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻟـ
(DABCﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ.
14-53
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .+
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ fﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ewﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ
ﺃﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "’ "@2 DA’B’Cﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ،ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ") "@2ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ
ﻟـ ’ (DA’B’Cﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ.
.6ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ’DABC+DA’B’C
ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
.7ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ.
• ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(14-30
14-54
kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
• ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻫﻮ " ."Fix2ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(2-12
• ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ:
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ
.1ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.K(Option) – 3:Number Format :
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ.
ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ .ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ،ﺳﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ " "Fix1ﻫﻨﺎ.
.3ﹼ
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
→
14-55
.6ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ
ﻳﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﻭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ/ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺧﻂ ،ﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ،ﻭ ﻧﺼﻒ
ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ،ﻭ ﻗﻮﺱ ،ﺃﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ /ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ
ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ.
kﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ
uﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ:
ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ،ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮﻫﺎ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.6(Animate) – 1:Add Animation :
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ
ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ.
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ 6(Animate) – 5:Go (once) :ﺃﻭ
).6(Animate) – 6:Go (repeat
• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ.
→
...
.4ﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ oﺃﻭ .J
14-56
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﹼ
ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻭﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 3ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ.ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﲡﺮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ!
• ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ" ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
uﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ
.1ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.6(Animate) – 2:Replace Anima :
• ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺤﻨﻰ.
.3ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
) 6(Animate) – 5:Go (onceﺃﻭ )6(Animate) – 6:Go (repeat
.4ﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﺃﻭ .o
uﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻳﺘﺮﻙ ﻭﺭﺍﺀﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ:
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺊ
ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ( ﻭﺍﳋﻂ )ﺍﺮﺝ( .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ
ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ) (ABﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺮﺝ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ) (Cﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ.
.1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ABﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ،Cﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ .AB
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ،Dﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ،ABﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ
ﺍﳋﻂ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ .C
.3ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺑﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Dﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ .C
.4ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺑﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Dﻣﻊ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ .AB
ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ .DE
.5ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ABﻭ ،DEﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻂ ABﻭ .DE
14-57
.6ﺃﺩﺧﻞ 90ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ .jaw
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻂ ABﻭ 90 DEﺩﺭﺟﺔ،
ﻭﻳﻘﻔﻠﻬﺎ.
.7ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Joﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
.8ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻂ DEﻭ ،DCﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
.9ﺍﺿﻐﻂ dwﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ،ﺣﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
w
→
.10ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
• ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ .w
.
• ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻂ DEﻭ DCﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ.
.11ﺍﺿﻐﻂ JJoﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Eﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ .AB
.12ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.6(Animate) – 1:Add Animation :
.13ﺍﺿﻐﻂ oﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ .D
14-58
.14ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.6(Animate) – 3:Trace :
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ) Dﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ (13ﻛـ "ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ".
.15ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.6(Animate) – 5:Go (once) :
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ABﻫﻲ ﺍﺮﺝ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Cﻫﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ
ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺊ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
• ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
.6(Animate) – 3:Traceﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ.
• ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ.
uﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ:
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ"
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
.6(Animate) – 4:Edit Animation
• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ
ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ6(Animate) – :
)6:Go (repeat
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ " "Timesﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )1 (Times
→
.2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ 0ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ oﺃﻭ J
ﻟﻮﻗﻔﻬﺎ.
14-59
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ Eﲤﺮ ﹼ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ
ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ AB
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ " "Stepsﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).(1 STEPS
→
.2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ 2ﺍﻟﻰ 100ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ
ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Eﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ
ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ AB
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ" ،"t0ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﻗﻮﻋﻪ ﲢﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ " "Eﻣﻦ "ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ".
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ -10ﺍﻟﻰ .10
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ t0ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Eﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ .AB
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ 0ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Aﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢ ﹼﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
1ﻧﻘﻄﺔ .Bﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ 0.5ﻳﺤ ﹼﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ .ABﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ
ﻣﻦ 0.5ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ،Aﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ
ﺍﻟﻜﺒﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ .B
.3ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟـ ،t0ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ "."t1
.4ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ -10ﺍﻟﻰ 10ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ t1ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Eﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ .AB
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ 1ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Bﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢ ﹼﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
0ﻧﻘﻄﺔ .A
14-60
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ:
ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ E
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " ،"Eﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﲢﺖ "."Animations
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )1(DELETE
• ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Eﻭﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ") "Eﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻗﻴﻢ ""t0ﻭ
" "t1ﲢﺘﻪ( ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﲢﺖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”“Animations
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 1ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺳﻴﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ )1 (DELETE
ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ.
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ D
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ" ،"Dﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﲢﺖ "."Traces
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )1(DELETE
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Dﻭﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻟﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ " "Dﲢﺖ
"."Traces
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Tracesﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) 1(DELETEﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ
ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ.
.3ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
• ﺳﻴﻐﻠﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.
14-61
kﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ
ﲢﺖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺗﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ،ﻭﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ,،ﻗﻮﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ
.20ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ "ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ" ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ
ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ،ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ،ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ،ﺍﻟﺦ.
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ :ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ) ،(x،yﻭﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ/ﻃﻮﻝ ،ﻭﺍﻧﺤﺬﺍﺭ ،ﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ،ﻭﻣﺤﻴﻂ
ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ،ﻭﻣﺤﻴﻂ ،ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ،ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ،ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ،ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ) ،(x،yﻭﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ.
uﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ:
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ CDEﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ (Dﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ .ABﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎ ،ﻗﻢ
ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ CDﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ Dﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ
ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ .AB
.1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ABﻭﻣﺜﻠﺚ .CDE
.2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ABﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ،Dﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
.6(Animate) – 1:Add Animation
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Dﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ .AB
.3ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ،CDﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ .CD
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ.
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .wﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ .
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ eﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
14-62
.6ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [Add Tableﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ.
• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ CDﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ
ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻲ "."Length
.7ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ.
.8ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﳉﻌﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ.
.9ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ،CDﻭ ،DEﻭ CEﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ.
.10ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ.
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .wﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ .
.11ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮ ﺓ 5ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 6ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ.
ﺳﻴﻀﻤﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ " "Lengthﺍﳌﻨﺸﺄ
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ،
ﹼ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ،6ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ " "Areaﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ CDEﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ.
• ﻛﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﻨﺎ ،ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ CDEﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ Dﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ،ABﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ
ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ) (CEﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ.
.12ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ J
.13ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻣﺮﺗﲔ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ 26ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ.
• ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 4ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 6ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﻷﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ
ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ 6(Animate) – 7:Add Table :ﺃﻭ .!b
14-63
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ" ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.6(Animate) – 8:Display Table :
uﳊﻔﻆ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ
ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(STORE)1(LIST
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ.
.4ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻌﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 26ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ".
uﳊﻔﻆ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )1(STORE)1(S-SHT
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
.3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 8ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ“
uﳊﺬﻑ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ.
.2ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).2(DELETE)1(DELETE
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).2(DELETE)2(DEL-ALL
• ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ.
14-64
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ )ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ،ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ )ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ(.
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻮﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﺮﻯ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺴﻘﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻫﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ ﻟﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻲ ،XY
ﺳﻨﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻛﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ) .(X, Yﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻗﻴﻢ
ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ.
ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ
ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ(
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ.
ﺳﺠﻞ ﻭﺃﺭﺳﻢ ) Y=f(xﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
•
ﹼ
ﺗﺼﻒ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (5-36ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﹼ
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻄﻄﺔ ﻭﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ
ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ .ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ.
15
15-1
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ) (Tﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ) (X, Yﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻄﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ T-Xﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ .T-Yﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ
ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ T-X
)ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ(
ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻲ ،X-Yﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ SKETCHﻭ G-SOLVEﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ
ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
kﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﹼ
).!m(SET UP
ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ.
• Axtrans Wind
• } ... {Manual}/{Autoﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ }ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ (X-Yﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ{} /ﻻ
ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ (X-Yﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ{ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ Y-ﺍﻭ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ X-ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ
ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ )ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ T-Yﺍﻭ (T-Xﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ .AXTRANS
• ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻄﻂ
• } ... {Black}/{Blue}/{Red}/{Magenta}/{Green}/{Cyan}/{Yellowﻳﺤ ﹼﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ.
• ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻄﻂ
• } ... {䡺}/{ }/{䡵ﻳﺤ ﹼﺪﺩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻄﻂ.
• ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻄﻂ
• } ... {Black}/{Blue}/{Red}/{Magenta}/{Green}/{Cyan}/{Yellowﻳﺤ ﹼﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ.
15-2
.1ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺓ
kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
• } ... {OPENﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ .g3p/g3b
• } ... {DELETEﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ .g3p/g3b
• } ... {SEARCHﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻠﻒ .g3p/g3b
• } ... {DETAILﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(11-6
kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
• } ... {FILEﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• } ... {OPENﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
• } ... {SAVEﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻧﺴﺨﺘﻪ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ(.
• } ... {SAVE • ASﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﲢﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ )ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ(.
• } ... {Plotﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ )ﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(.
• } ... {Listﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ(.
• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ"
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(15-4
• } ... {DefGﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• } ... {MODIFYﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-36
• } ... {AXTRNSﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• } ... {T-X}/{T-Yﻳﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﺼﻔﲔ )ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﳝﲔ( ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ }ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ = ،Tﻭﻣﺤﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ = /{Y
}ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ = ،Tﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ = {Xﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ.
• } ... {REGﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ )ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-24ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ
ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ.
• } ... {EDITﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻄﻂ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(.
• } ... {DELETEﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(.
• } ... {PLAYﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ،g3bﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
• } ... {Autoﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ g3bﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
• } ... {Manualﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ g3bﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )dﺧﻠﻒ( ﻭ )eﺃﻣﺎﻡ(.
• } ... {PICTUREﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• } ... {1~20ﲢﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
ﻣﻌﲔ.
• } ... {SAVE • ASﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﲢﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ
ﹼ
• } ... {PANﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-10
• } ... {FadeI/Oﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(15-12
15-3
kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ
• } ... {AXTRNSﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻛـ } {AXTRNSﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ".
• } ... {EDITﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ.
• } ... {DEL • BTMﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ.
• } ... {DEL-ALLﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ.
• } ... {SETﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )) (Tﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(15-15
• } ... {JUMPﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• }} ... {BOTTOM}/{TOPﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ{}/ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ{
• } ... {Plotﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻭ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ.
• } ... {REGﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻛـ } {REGﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ".
ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ) Xﺍﻭ (Yﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
• } ... {STOREﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ
ﹼ
• } ... {RECALLﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ ﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ X-ﺃﻭ ﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ.Y-
kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ
• } ... {PICTUREﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻛـ } {PICTUREﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ".
• } ... {UNDOﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻄﻄﺔ .ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ }.{UNDO
• } ... {EDITﻧﻔﺲ ﻛـ } {EDITﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ".
kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ AXTRANS
ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ )ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ (X-Yﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .AXTRANS
• }... {Switch
ﹼ
• } ... {Cutoutﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ )ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ (X-Yﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .AXTRANS
• } ... {Listﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ.
• } ... {REGﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ )ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-24ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ
ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ )ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ T-Yﺍﻭ (T-Xﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .AXTRANS
• } ... {P-LINKﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ AXTRANS
ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ.
15-4
.2ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﲟﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
ﻣﻠﻒ ... g3pﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
ﻣﻠﻒ ... g3bﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ CASIOﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ .http://edu.casio.com
kﺑﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ) g3pﺃﻭ .(g3b
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﺑﻌﺪ
ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺳﻴﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﻬﺎ ﺁﺧﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﻓﺈﻧﻚ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻻ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
uﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ( ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) K1(FILE)1(OPENﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﺃﻭ fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(OPENﺃﻭ .w
kﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ
ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ) g3pﺍﻭ .(g3bﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺎ
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ
ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ .ﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻪ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
15-5
uﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ :ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ
Axtrans Wind
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
䡬*1
䡬
Graph Func
Plot Color
䡬*1
Plot Type
䡬*1
Sketch Color
䡬*1
Sketch Line
䡬*2
Angle
䡬
Complex Mode
䡬
Coord
䡬
Grid
䡬*2
Axes
䡬*2
Label
䡬*2
䡬
Display
ﻣﻌﲔ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
* 1ﺑﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﹼ
* 2ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ
ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﻓﺘﺤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﹼﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
• ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﰎ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﻭ ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .ﻭ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ.
uﳊﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) .K1(FILE)2(SAVEﺳﻴﺤﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ
ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ(.
15-6
uﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﲢﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).K1(FILE)3(SAVE • AS
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ROOTﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ.
ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
• ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
ﹼ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(OPEN
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(SAVE • AS
.4ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ) ،Y=f(xﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ.
kﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ
uﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
.1ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ g3pﺍﻭ .g3b
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ"
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(15-5
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) K2(Plotﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ.
• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ )ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ( ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﺨﻄﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ.
ﺳﻴﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻠﻒ ،g3b
ﹼ
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ) "g3bﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(15-8
• ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻄﻄﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).K2(UNDO
• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﲔ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﲔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(15-8
15-7
.4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 3ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
• ﻫﻨﺎ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) ،K3(EDITﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ،ﻭ ﲢﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ .ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ
"ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(15-9
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ 50ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .g3pﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ،g3bﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
.5ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﺃﻭ ).!J(QUIT
ﻣﻌﲔ
uﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ
ﹼ
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ،ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ) bﺍﻟﻰ (jﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
j
i
h
g
f
e
d
c
b
uﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ g3b
ﻣﻠﻒ g3bﻫﻮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ 30ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ.
• ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ g3bﻣﻊ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
→
→
• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ،g3bﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) K6(g)5(PLAYﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﹼ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Autoﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﹼﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 2(Manualﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ dﺃﻭ eﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).K6(g)5(PLAY
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ g3bﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
15-8
uﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻄﻂ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).K6(g)3(EDIT
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) K2(Plot)K3(EDITﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻨﻪ.
• ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻄﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﹼﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻄﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ
ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ T-ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ
ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (15-14
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ
ﻟﻠﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ dﻭ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻄﻂ ،ﻭ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ )ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ( ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
.w
• ﺳﻴﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻄﻂ .ﻭ ﺳﻴﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻪ.
→
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .3
.4ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﺃﻭ ).!J(QUIT
uﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ
ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "."Plot Color
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) !f(FORMATﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ،FORMATﻭﻣﻦ
ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ.
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ FORMATﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Plot Colorﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ .ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ
ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ.
15-9
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) ،K6(g)4(DELETEﻭ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ.
ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(Noﺑﺪﻻ ﻋﻨﻪ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
• ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ،ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻄﻄﺔ .ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(15-14
kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ) Y=f(xﻭ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ) Y=f(xﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) K4(DefGﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ،ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ = Yﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ") "Yﻧﻮﻉ = (Yﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .3ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﺪ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) 5(MODIFYﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﺘﻌ ﹼﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻮﻉ = Yﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﹼ
) K5(MODIFYﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ"
ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-36
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻄﻂ ﻭﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ.
uﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(15-7
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).K6(g)2(REG
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ.
15-10
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ* 1ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ.
• ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) .3(X2ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ
2
ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ*.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) 5(COPYﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ) Y=f(xﻭ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(15-10
.4ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(DRAW
* 1ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(6-16
* 2ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-17ﻭ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ 6-17ﺍﻟﻰ .6-21
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
• ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ .ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ) Y=f(xﻭ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(15-10
uﲤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ XY-ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ،ﻭ
ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ،ﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ،ﻭ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) K6(g)5(PANﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ )ﺑﺎﻧﺘﺰﺍﻉ ﻭ ﺟﺮ ﹼ( ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ .XY-ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻫﻲ
ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-10
15-11
uﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ,ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ AXTRANS
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ AXTRANSﻣﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(15-14ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
) !6(G⇔Tﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،AXTRANSﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ.
)!6(G⇔T
)!6(G⇔T
)!6(G⇔T
kﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ )ﺑﻬﺖ (I/Oﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ) 0%ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ( ﺍﻟﻰ ) 100%ﻏﻴﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ( ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﺧﻔﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟـ 100%ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ.
→
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳋﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳋﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻻ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ 16ﺑﺖ.
• ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
) K1(FILE)2(SAVEﺃﻭ ).3(SAVE • AS
uﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ )ﺑﻬﺖ (I/Oﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).K6(g)6(g)3(FadeI/O
• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻖ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ eﺃﻭ dﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺗﻪ .ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻟـ ،20%ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
.caw
.3ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
15-12
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭ
ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ.
kﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻄﻄﺎﺕ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ(
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻄﻂ ) ،(X, Yﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ،
ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻄﻂ ،ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻄﻂ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ) (Tﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
T-Xﺍﻭ .(AXTRANS) T-Y
uﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻄﻂ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )K3(List
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ.
• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ Xﻭ Yﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻄﻂ .ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ T-ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ) .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ
ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ،T-ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ T-Yﻭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ) T-Xﺷﺎﺷﺔ "(AXTRANS
ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (.15-14ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ Xﻭ Yﻓﻘﻂ.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ X-ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ Y-ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
).2(EDIT
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .3
• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﺃﻭ ).!J(QUIT
• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﲟﺨﻄﻂ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) 6(g)4(STOREﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭ ) 6(g)5(RECALLﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻭﻣﻊ
ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
15-13
uﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ X-ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ Y-ﻟﻠﺨﻂ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 3(DEL • BTMﻣﺮﺓ
ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻄﻂ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ X-ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ Y-ﻷﻱ ﺧﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
) 3(DEL • BTMﻣﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 3(DEL • BTMﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻂ
ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ.
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 4(DEL-ALLﻭ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ .ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺬﻑ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(Noﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ.
uﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ،!J(QUIT) ،Jﺃﻭ ).!6(G⇔T
kﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ T-Yﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ) T-Xﺷﺎﺷﺔ (AXTRANS
ﻛﻤﺎ ﺷﺎﻫﺪﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ،ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ Xﻭ ،Yﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ .T
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ﻛﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ) (X, Yﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ،X-Yﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﳝﻜﻦ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ Tﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ) (T, Yﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ T-Yﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ) (T, Xﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ
.T-X
• ﲢﺖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،0ﻭ ،1ﻭ 2ﻭ ﺍﻟﺦ )ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ 0ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ
ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﻦ ،(1ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ T
ﹼ
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ T-Yﻭ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ T-Xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﺎﺓ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ
.AXTRANSﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ AXTRANSﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ X-Yﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ T-Yﺃﻭ
T-Xﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ T-Xﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ X-Y
15-14
uﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )(T
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).5(SET
.2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﻭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﻦ ،1.5ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .bwb.fw
.3ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) wﺃﻭ .(J
• ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ ،ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ Tﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ.
–1.0E+10 < Start < 1.0E+10
0 < Step < 1.0E+10
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ T-Yﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ T-X
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) .1(AXTRNSﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ
ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).K6(g)1(AXTRNS
.2ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(T-Yﺃﻭ ).2(T-X
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،AXTRANSﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ
ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ X-Yﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ T-Yﺃﻭ
T-Xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ.
15-15
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،AXTRANSﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Gridﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Offﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ،ﻋﻨﺪ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Labelﺗﻜﻮﻥ " ."Onﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟـ" ،"Axesﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ " "Onﺃﻭ " ."Scaleﺇﺫﺍ
ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Offﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻰ " "Onﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
• ﺑﺄﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،AXTRANSﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ T-ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ،ﺑﻐﺾ
ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ "Axtransﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ.
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Kﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ:
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ
)1(Switch
ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ )ﻧﻈﺎﻡ
ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ (X-Yﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ AXTRANS
ﺍﺫﻫﺐ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ
)3(List
ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ
)4(REG
ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 3ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ"
)ﺻﺤﻔﺔ (15-10
ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻄﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
AXTRANSﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ
ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ
)5(P-LINK
"ﳉﻌﻞ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﳝﻦ
ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ AXTRANSﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (15-17
—
.3ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
uﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ )ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ (X-Yﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ AXTRANS
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،AXTRANSﺍﺿﻐﻂ Kﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(Switch
• ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Switchﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﳌﺒﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
→
→
) (1ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ
) (2ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻁ(
15-16
) (3ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ،ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ )) (2ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻁ( ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ
ﻗﻄﻌﻪ .ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 2(Cutoutﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ dﻭ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ
ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ .ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
ﻓﻬﺬﺍ
ﹼ
→
.3ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
uﳉﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ AXTRANSﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ
ﻣﻨﻬﺎ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ AXTRANSﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).K5(P-LINK
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ
)ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ (X-Yﻭ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ )ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ (T-Xﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺨﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(.
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ dﺃﻭ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻒ ﻭ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ .ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ.
.2ﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
uﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ AXTRANS
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﺃﻭ ).!6(G⇔T
15-17
.5ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ !1ﺍﻟﻰ !5ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ.
• )" ... !1(TRACEﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (5-52
• )" ... !2(ZOOMﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (5-8
• )" ... !3(V-WINﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )) "(View Windowﺻﻔﺤﺔ (5-5
• )" ... !4(SKETCHﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ،ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ،ﻭ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﻣﺨﻄﻂ(" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (5-50
• )" ... !5(G-SOLVEﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) "(G-SOLVEﺻﻔﺤﺔ (5-54
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) ،!1(TRACEﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻄﻂ.
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).!1(TRACE
• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ )!1(TRACE
ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ f
ﺃﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ dﺃﻭ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻧﻪ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) !f(FORMATﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ .FORMAT
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ.
15-18
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ
ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،3D Graphﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺗﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ
ﻭﻣﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ.
kﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ 3D Graph
ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ 3D Graphﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
) !m(SET UPﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .3D Graph
ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ.
•
) Axesﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ 3Dﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ/ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ(
• }} ... {On}/{Box}/{Offﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ{}/ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ{}/ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻔﻴﺔ{
ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ،3Dﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ Axesﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ..
On
•
Off
Box
) Labelﻣﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ/ﺍﻔﻴﺔ(
• }} ... {On}/{Offﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ{}/ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺍﻔﻴﺔ{
ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ،3Dﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ Labelﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ .,
Off
On
16
16-1
.1ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ 3D Graph
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ )(x2 + y2 + z2 = 22
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .3D Graph
• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .3D
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 3(TYPEﺃﻭ .d/e
• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ccﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ " "Sphereﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ.
.4ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ.
awawawcw
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(SET
• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ
.3Dﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ.
.6ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(DRAWﺃﻭ .w
• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﻭﺭﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ.
• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ،3Dﺍﺿﻐﻂ .Aﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ،3D
ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ ) !6(G⇔Tﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .3D
16-2
.2ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ .3D Graph
kﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .3D Graph
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) !3(V-WINﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ
ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .3D
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
.w
.4ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .3D
ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ
... Xmin/Xmaxﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ/ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭx-
... Xgridﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ) x-ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﲔ Xminﻭ (Xmax
... Ymin/Ymaxﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ/ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭy-
... Ygridﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ) y-ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﲔ Yminﻭ (Ymax
... Zmin/Zmaxﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ/ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭz-
... Angleθﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﺭ(−180° < θ < 180°) x-
... Angleφﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻭ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ(0° < φ < 360°) z-
• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ/ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ .1E97
• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ > 2ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻴﺔ > .50
• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ θﻭ φﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ
• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻢ Xgridﻭ Ygridﺃﻛﺒﺮ ،ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ .ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻻﺣﻆ ﹰ
ﹰ
ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ،ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ.
• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻼ ﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ Xgridﻭ Ygridﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ.
• ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ Xgridﻭ Ygridﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ
ﻋﻮﺿﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ.
ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ
ﹰ
16-3
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ
ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .3D
uﳊﻔﻆ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .3D Graph
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) !3(V-WINﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).4(3D-VMEM)1(STORE
.4ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ) 3Dﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ (6ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺿﻐﻂ ،bwﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 1 3D
).(3DVWIN1
uﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .3D Graph
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) !3(V-WINﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .3D
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).4(3D-VMEM)2(RECALL
.4ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ) 3Dﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ (6ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺿﻐﻂ ،bwﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 1 3D
).(3DVWIN1
.3ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
• } ... {SELECTﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ.
• } ... {DELETEﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ.
• } ... {TYPEﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(16-7
• } ... {3D-GMEMﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(16-6
• } ... {DRAWﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .3D
16-4
kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(SELECT
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ).(:
• ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(SELECTﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ.
kﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺎ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺤﺬﻓﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 2(DELETEﺃﻭ .D
• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(Yes
kﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ Line Colorﻭ Area Colorﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
.1ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ،3Dﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻧﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).!f(FORMAT
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ " "Line Colorﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
.4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ .2
16-5
.5ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ " "Area Colorﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
.6ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ .2
.7ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﻬﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
• ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ .Area Color
• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ Clearﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ Area Colorﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ
ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ .Line Color
• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ Clearﻟﻜﻼ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﲔ Line Colorﻭ Area Colorﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ "."Invalid Setting
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ،Lineﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ .Area Color
kﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ 20ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ
) 3D G-Mem 1ﺇﻟﻰ (3D G-Mem 20ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ
ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ.
ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
• ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ/ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ
• ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
)ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ(
ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
• ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
• ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
)ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(
• ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
uﳊﻔﻆ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ 3Dﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﺲ
ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).4(3D-GMEM)1(STORE
.2ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ) 3Dﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ (20ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺿﻐﻂ ،bwﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .(3DGMEM1) 1 3D
• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ wﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ
ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
• ﺳﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺒﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
16-6
uﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).4(3D-GMEM)2(RECALL
.2ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ) 3Dﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ (20ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺿﻐﻂ ،bwﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 1 3D
).(3DGMEM1
• ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ
ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺑﺎﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ .ﰎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
.4ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ
ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ،3Dﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 3(TYPEﺃﻭ d/eﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ،d/eﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
… Lineﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ.
… Planeﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ.
… Sphereﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ.
… Cylinderﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ.
kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ
ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ،ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ wﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ .ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ.
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(SETﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .3D
16-7
uﳕﻮﺫﺝ Line
ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ.
) ... 1(EXPRESSﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ.
) ... 2(VECTORﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ.
) ... 3(P&Vﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻬﺔ.
) ... 4(POINTSﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ.
• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ "."Invalid Setting
• a=0 :EXPRESSﺃﻭ b=0ﺃﻭ c=0
• :VECTORﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ vﻫﻲ 0
• :P&Vﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻫﻲ 0
• :POINTSﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ P1ﻭ P2ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ
16-8
uﳕﻮﺫﺝ Plane
ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ.
) ... 1(EXPRESSﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ.
) ... 2(VECTORﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ.
) ... 3(POINTSﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ.
• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ "."Invalid Setting
• a=0 :EXPRESSﺃﻭ b=0ﺃﻭ c=0
• :VECTOR
• ﻛﻼ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ uﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ،vﺃﻭ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﻫﻤﺎ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ uﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ vﻫﻲ .0
• ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ uﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ vﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ.
• :POINTS
• ﻟﺪﻯ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ.
• ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ.
16-9
uﳕﻮﺫﺝ Sphere
ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻨﻮﻋﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ.
) ... 1(FACTORﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ .(X−a)2+(Y−b)2+(Z−c)2=r2
) ... 2(EXPANDﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ .X2+Y2+Z2+aX+bY+cZ+d=0
• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ "."Invalid Setting
• r = 0 :FACTORﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ
• :EXPANDﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻮﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ .a2+b2+c2>4d
uﳕﻮﺫﺝ Cylinder
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ.
• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ "."Invalid Setting
• 0 :Radiusﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ
• ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ :ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ
16-10
.5ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
kﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻟﻠﻴﻤﲔ.
ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .3D
kﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ
ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ .ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
ﹰ
ﹰ
ﺩﻭﺭﺗﲔ.
.1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ،3Dﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).K2(ROTATE
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ.
) … 1(L→Rﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ.
) … 2(R→Lﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ.
) … 3(T→Bﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
) … 4(B→Tﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ.
kﺣﻔﻆ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ
ﹰ
ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺁﺧﺮ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﻻ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .3Dﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ،3D
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ")ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-20
kﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻴﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .3D
16-11
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﻬﺎ.
) … !2(Zoom)1(INﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻴﺔ.
) … 2(OUTﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻴﺔ.
) … 3(VIEW-Xﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ x-ﺍﻹﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
) … 4(VIEW-Yﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ y-ﺍﻹﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
) … 5(VIEW-Zﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ z-ﺍﻹﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
) … 6(ORIGINALﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )ﺩﻭﻥ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ،ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺯﻭﻡ(.
kﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻧﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .3D
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .3D
.2ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
• ... Plot/LineColﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺒﺪﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ.
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﻬﺎ.
) … !4(SKETCH)1(Clsﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻄﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﻮﺏ.
) … 2(Plotﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ.
) … 3(Textﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ.
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻪ ) ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﻪ.
.5ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺎ :ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ :ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
kﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ) 3Dﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (G-SOLVE
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-ﺃﻭ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ y-ﺃﻭ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ z-ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ )ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ
ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .(3D
16-12
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .3D
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).!5(G-SOLVE)1(CROSS
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﻌﺮﺿﻪ.
) … 1(Xﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ x-ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ.
) … 2(Yﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ y-ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ.
) … 3(Zﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ z-ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎﻁ )ﺍﳌﻘﻄﻊ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ .Area Color
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ
ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ.
16-13
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ
ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
) … 3(VIEW-Xﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ x-ﺍﻷﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
) … 4(VIEW-Yﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ y-ﺍﻹﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
) … 5(VIEW-Zﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ z-ﺍﻹﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
) … 6(ORIGINALﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ.
uﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ))1(UPﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ( ﺃﻭ ))2(DOWNﺳﻠﺒﻲ( ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ.
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ
ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ.
16-14
ﻣﻠﺤﻖ
.1ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﻃﺌﺔ
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ:
ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
Syntax
ERROR
• ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ
• ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ.
Ma ERROR
• ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
• ﺧﻄﺄ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ )ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺼﻔﺮ ،ﺍﻟﺦ(.
ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ
ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃ ﹼﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ.
Stack ERROR
ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ
ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ.
• ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ 10
ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ 26 ،ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
Input value
must be
integer.
ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
Input value
must be a
matrix.
ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
Input value
must be a
matrix or
vector.
ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ.
ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ.
ﻟﻸﻭﺍﻣﺮ.
• ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ.
Input value
must be a list.
ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ
ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
Input value
must be a real
number.
ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ.
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ.
Invalid polar
form
ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ θﺍﻭ
.(r∠θ) r
ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ.
Wrong
argument size
relationship.
ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺠﺞ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﳌﺎ
ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝnCr(3,10) :
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎ ﹰ.
α
α-1
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ:
ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
Non-Real
ERROR
ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Realﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎ ﹰ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﺁﺧﺮ
ﻏﻴﺮ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ.
Can’t Simplify
ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
) 'Simpﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(2-26ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ
ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻟـ 3ﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ .4/8
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ 'Simp
!Can’t Solve
Adjust initial
value or
bounds. Then
try again
ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ
• ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
Time Out
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳊﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ
ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻗﻢ
ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ
ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ.
Conversion
ERROR
• ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ
ﻭﺣﺪﺗﲔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ.
• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ.
ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﲔ
ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ.
Invalid Type
ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﳊﺔ.
Underflow
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺠﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ
ﺍﳊﺠﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ،∑(X,X,1,2,1E–50) :
،1E99x2+1E99x+1E–99=0ﺍﻟﺦ.
ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ،
ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﲢﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ( ﻭ
ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
α-2
ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ.
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ:
ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
Invalid List,
Matrix or
Vector
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺃﻭ
ﳌﺘﺠﻪ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ
ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ.
Dimension
ERROR
ﺑﻌﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
Complex
Number in List
ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﳊﺔ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ.
Complex
Number in
Matrix
ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﳊﺔ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ.
Complex
Number In
Matrix or
Vector
ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ.
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﳊﺔ.
Improper
Number of
Elements
ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ 999ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ،ﻭ
ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 999ﺻﻒ ×
999ﻋﻤﻮﺩ .ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﺣﺪﺩ
ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ 1ﺻﻒ × 999ﻋﻤﻮﺩﹰﺍ ﺃﻭ 999ﺻﻔﹰ ﺎ
× 1ﻋﻤﻮﺩ.
ﻗﻤﺖ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺃﻭ
ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ.
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ:
ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ:
Infinitely Many
Solutions
ﻋﺪﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ
ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ.
—
No Solution
ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ.
—
No Variable
ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﻞ.
ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ.
α-3
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ،ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ،ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ:
ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
Range
ERROR
ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ
ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
No Variable
ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
Too Many
Variables
ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ
ﻣﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ
ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ.
No item is
selected
ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ.
ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
Expression in
use
ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺎﻝ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻊ
ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ.
ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
Requires
one variable
expression.
• ﻗﻤﺖ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ.
• ﻗﻤﺖ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ.
ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ.
Invalid graph
type
• ﻗﻤﺖ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺎﺕ.
• ﻗﻤﺖ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻭ
ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺎﺕ ،ﺃﻭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ.
ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
Too Many
Sectors
ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
G-Solve ∫dx - ROOT ،∫dx - INTSECTﺃﻭ
∫dx - MIXEDﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ 21ﺟﺬﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﺎﻝ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺑﻚ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺿﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
α-4
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ:
ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
Condition
ERROR
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )1(GRAPH)4(SELECT
Data in use
• ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ
ﺑـ ") "Resid Listﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ( ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺛﻘﺔ ،ﺃﻭ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ
ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺏ "."Save Res
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ /ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ،
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ" ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻮﻡ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ.
• ﻟـ " "Resid Listﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ
ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ.
• ﻟـ " ،"Save Resﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ،ﺃﻭ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ.
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ:
ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
Go ERROR
1ﻻ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ Lbl nﻟـ .Goto n
1ﺃﺩﺧﻞ Lbl nﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻴﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟـ
Goto nﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺬﻑ Goto nﺃﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ
ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
"ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ" .Progﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺬﻑ "ﺍﺳﻢ
ﺍﳌﻠﻒ" Progﺃﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
2ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
"ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ" .Prog
Nesting
ERROR
ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺭﻭﺗﲔ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺑـ "ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ" Progﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ
10ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ.
Too many pathﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
levels
α-5
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ "ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ" Progﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺃﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ
ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ .ﺃﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ .ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ
"ﺍﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ" Progﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
• ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ
ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻟﻰ
ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ .ﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ
ﻣﻔﻌﻠﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ.
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ:
ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
Range
ERROR
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﺼﻖ ،ﻭ
ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ،ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ
ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ.
Circular
ERROR
ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ )ﻣﺜﻞ " "= A1ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ (A1
ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ
ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ.
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ eActivity
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ:
ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
No MEMO
• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊeActivity،
ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) 5(MEMOﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ .MEMO
ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ
ﹼ
• ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ MEMOﻋﻨﺪ
ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ .MEMO
ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ
ﹼ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ .MEMO
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ
ﹼ
Only one
memo allowed
per line.
• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،eActivityﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﳊﺎﻕ MEMO
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺇﳊﺎﻕ MEMOﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ.
• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،eActivityﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺭﻣﺰ
ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳋﻄﲔ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﰎ ﺇﳊﺎﻕ MEMO
—
ﺍﻟﻴﻬﻤﺎ.
Image wrong
size for
insertion.
ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،eActivityﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﻪ.
α-6
ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺣﺠﻤﻪ
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(10-14
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ:
ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
Memory
ERROR
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ
ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻴﺔ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ
ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ.
• ﺃﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺰﻥ
ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
Folder has
over 300 files.
Some will be
skipped
ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ* 1ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻼ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺃﻱ
ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ .300
ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ 300
ﻣﻠﻒ.
Sub-folders
in this folder
cannot be
displayed
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ
ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ،3ﻭ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ
ﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ) .4ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻠﺪ ﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ،4ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ(.
ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ* 1ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ
ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ
ﺍﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ.
Too Much
Data
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺜﻴﺮ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ.
Fragmentation
ERROR
ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ
ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
Invalid Name
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ
ﺻﺎﳊﺔ.
ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ
ﺻﺎﻟﺢ.
Invalid Type
ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﳊﺔ.
Storage
Memory Full
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳑﺘﻠﺌﺔ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ.
Data ERROR
ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
* 1ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(13-5
α-7
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ:
File System
ERROR
ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ
ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻫﺎﻡ!"
ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ
ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(12-4
ﹼ
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ
ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USB
ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻗﻢ
ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ
ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ،
ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ
ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(13-3
α-8
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ:
ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
Complex
Number in
Data
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ.
)ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(
ﹼ
ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ
ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﹼ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ
ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻟـ .CFX-9850G
ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ
ﹼ
ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ.
CSV error
in row [A] or
]column [B
ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ
ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ،Aﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ Bﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ.
USB Connect
ERROR
ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ
ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﺟﻬﺰﺓ
ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(.
Com ERROR
ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ
ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ .ﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ
ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
Transmit
ERROR
ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ
ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ،ﻭﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ
ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
Receive
ERROR
ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺘﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ
ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ،ﻭﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ
ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
Memory Full
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﳑﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﺃﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ
ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
Invalid Data
Size
ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻦ
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ.
ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﳊﺠﻢ
ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ.
Invalid Data
Number
ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ
ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
Please
Reconnect
ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻻﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
α-9
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ:
ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
First select a
segment.
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﻄﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ.
ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
First select a
line and point.
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ.
First select
2 points or a
segment.
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ.
First select
the applicable
figure.
• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻄﲔ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ.
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ
ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ
ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ.
• ﺃﻧﺖ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭﻻ.
First select 2
segments.
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ.
Too Many
!Objects
Work memory
cleared.
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﲔ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ
ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ.
Invalid
Measurement
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﳑﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ.
ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ
ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
Too Many
Animations
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ 10ﲢﺮﻛﺎﺕ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﳊﺬﻑ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ،ﺃﻭ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭ
ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﲢﺮﻳﻜﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
First select
point(s).
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
Too Many
Trace Points
ﺃﻧﺖ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ 10ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ 10ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ.
Too Many
Rows
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ 26ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻏﻴﺮ
ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
α-10
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ:
ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
First configure
animation
settings.
• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﲢﺮﻙ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ.
• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ
ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
Cannot Add
Animation
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ
ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺦ.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ
ﲢﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻻﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻨﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ.
Select the
applicable
measurement
icon.
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ.
ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ.
First configure
animation
settings and
create a table.
ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ
ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ.
Create at leastﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ
one figure withﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ )(K(Option) – 7:Area Calc
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ
a fill color.
ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ.
α-11
ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ:
ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ:
Too many
plots
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ.
ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
—
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ:
ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
Out of Domain
ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ.
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ.
Invalid setting
• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ.
• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺎﻝ ﻭ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ.
• ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .0
• ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝXmin = 10, Xmax = 10 :
• ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
t0=t1ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ.
• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ
)ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺮ ،ﺍﻟﺦ (.ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ.
Out of Range
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﻦ 0ﺁﺧﺮ.
• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ
ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻷﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﲢﺮﻳﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻷﻧﻪ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ t0ﻭ t1ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ.
• ﻣﻨﺬ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﺎ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ
ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
• ﰎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ
3D Graphﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ.
• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .3D
ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
α-12
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ:
ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
No Data
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ )ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
No File
ﺍﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﻦ 1
ﺍﻟﻰ (20ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ
ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ.
Not Enough
Elements
• ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
• ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻻ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ.
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ • ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻳﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﺻﻔﺮ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ
ﺟﻤﻴﻌﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻳﺔ.
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ.
α-13
.2ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
sinx
cosx
tanx
ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ
)|x| < 9 × (109)° (DEG
)|x| < 5 × 107π rad (RAD
)|x| < 1 × 1010 grad (GRA
sin–1x
cos–1x
|x| < 1
tan–1x
|x| < 1 × 10100
sinhx
coshx
|x| < 230.9516564
tanhx
|x| < 1 ×10100
sinh–1x
|x| < 1 × 10100
cosh–1x
1 < x < 1 × 10100
tanh–1x
|x| < 1
"
"
logx
lnx
1 × 10–99 < x < 1 × 10100
10x
–1 × 10100 < x < 100
ex
–1 × 10100 < x
< 230.2585092
x
'
0 < x < 1 × 10100
x2
|x| < 1 × 1050
1/x
|x| < 1 × 10100, x ≠ 0
3
'
x
!x
nPr
nCr
|x| < 1 × 10100
0 < x < 69
) xﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ(
"
"
"
"
ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ،
ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻫﻲ
±1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ
ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ*.
ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻟـ :tanx
)DEG :|x| ≠ 90(2n+1
)RAD :|x| ≠ π/2(2n+1
)GRA :|x| ≠ 100(2n+1
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ
ﻛﺤﺠﺞ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ
ﻛﺤﺠﺞ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ
ﻛﺤﺠﺞ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ
ﻛﺤﺠﺞ.
ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ < 1 × 10100
) n, rﻫﻲ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ nﻭ (r
0 < r < n, n < 1 × 1010
)x2 + y2 < 1 × 10100 Pol (x, y
Rec
)(r ,θ
15ﺭﻗﻢ
ﺩﻗﺔ
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ
|r| < 1 × 10100
)|θ | < 9 × (109)° (DEG
)|θ | < 5 × 107π rad (RAD
)|θ | < 1 × 1010 grad (GRA
"
"
"
"
"
α-14
"
ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻟـ : tanθ
)DEG :|θ | ≠ 90(2n+1
)RAD :|θ | ≠ π/2(2n+1
)GRA :|θ | ≠ 100(2n+1
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ
”’ °
|a|, b, c < 1 × 10100
0 < b, c
⎯←
”’ °
|x| < 1 × 10100
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻲ:
|x| < 1 × 107
15ﺭﻗﻢ
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ
ﺩﻗﺔ
ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ،
ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻫﻲ
±1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ
ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ*.
:x > 0
–1 × 10
100
)^(xy
< ylogx < 100
y>0:x=0
m :x<0
–––– y = n,
2n+1
"
"
)ﻫﻲ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ (m, n
ﻟﻜﻦ؛
100
–1 × 10 < y log |x| < 100
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ
ﻛﺤﺠﺞ.
x≠0:y>0
–1 × 10100 < 1 logy < 100
x
y
'
x
x>0:y=0
n+1 : y < 0
––––x = 2n+1, 2
m
)ﻫﻲ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ m, n
;(m ≠ 0
ﻟﻜﻦ؛
"
"
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ
ﻛﺤﺠﺞ.
–1 × 10100 < 1 log |y| < 100
x
ab/c
ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻂ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ
10ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ )ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ(.
"
"
* ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﻮ ±1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ) .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ ،ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻫﻮ
±1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ (.ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻷﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ
'^(xy), x
'y, x!, 3
ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ) .ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﺻﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ x,
،nPr, nCr,ﺍﻟﺦ(.
ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ،ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ.
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ،
ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ،ﺳﺖ
ﻋﺸﺮﻱ
ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ:
–2147483648 < x < 2147483647 :DEC
) 1000000000000000 < x < 1111111111111111 :BINﺳﻠﺒﻲ(
،0) 0 < x < 111111111111111ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ(
) 20000000000 < x < 37777777777 :OCTﺳﻠﺒﻲ(
،0) 0 < x < 17777777777ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ(
) 80000000 < x < FFFFFFFF :HEXﺳﻠﺒﻲ(
،0) 0 < x < 7FFFFFFFﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ(
α-15
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
ﻳﻀﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) (Examination Modeﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ؛ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳋﻀﻮﻉ
ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ .ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳋﻀﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ.
ﻓﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﻭﺿﻊ eActivityﻭﻭﺿﻊ Memoryﻭﻭﺿﻊ E-CON4ﻭﻭﺿﻊ Program
ﻭﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ )^ )ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ() : ،ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ() _ ،ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ(( ،ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ،
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ،ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ )ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ( ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ .ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ
ﹰ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
uﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !o(OFFﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ
.2ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺣﲔ cﻭ ،hﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ oﹰ
ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 1
ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(Yes
• ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ.
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .2
• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .J
• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
،Language ،Q1Q3 Type ،Display ،Complex Mode ،Angle ،Frac Result ،Input/Output
Battery Type ،Function menu language
β-1
β
uﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺍﻣﺾ ) ( ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻭﻳﺘﺒﺎﻃﺄ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻟﻠﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ 15ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ
ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ
• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ 60ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ.
• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ a-ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ .ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻀﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ .RESTART ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﲔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ.• ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ
ﺃﺧﺮﻯ
ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ RESTART
ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
β-2
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﻻ
ﻻ
ﻻ
uﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
) (1ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ USBﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
.2ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ") "Select Connection Modeﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
.3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
.4ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
.5ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
) (2ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﲟﺮﻭﺭ 12ﺳﺎﻋﺔ
ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ 12ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
ﹰ
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ RESTARTﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ
ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ 12ﺳﺎﻋﺔ.
) (3ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ
.1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ )ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،(Aﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،Linkﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
).4(CABLE)2(3PIN
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ 1*SB-62ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ Aﺑﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ )ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .(B
* 1ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ.
ﻛﺎﺑﻞ SB-62
β-3
.3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،Aﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).2(RECV
.4ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،2*Bﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ،Linkﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).3(EXAM)1(UNLOCK)1(Yes
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ Bﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .A
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ A
.1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،Bﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ،Linkﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(TRANSMIT)1(MAIN)1(SELECT
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "."SETUP
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(SELECT)6(TRANSMIT)1(Yes
* 2ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
• ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ ) ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
uﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Link
) ... 3(EXAM)2(ENTERﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
) ... 3(EXAM)3(APPﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
) ... 3(EXAM)4(EXITﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
β-4
E-CON4
Application
(English)
Important!
• All explanations in this section assume that you are fully familiar with all calculator and Data
Logger (CMA CLAB* or CASIO EA-200) precautions, terminology, and operational procedures.
• The E-CON4 application is designed to get the most out of the measurement functions of the
CASIO EA-200 Data Logger. Though it can run on a CMA CLAB Data Logger, CLAB does not
have a SONIC port, microphone, or speaker as is equipped on the EA-200. While a calculator
is connected to a CLAB Data Logger, attempting to configure E-CON4 application settings and
perform measurement using parameters that are not supported by CLAB will cause an error.
CLAB firmware must be version 2.10 or higher. Be sure to check the firmware version of your
CLAB before using it.
* For information about CMA and the CLAB Data Logger, visit http://cma-science.nl/.
ε-1
E-CON4 Mode Overview
1. E-CON4 Mode Overview
The first time you enter the E-CON4 mode, a screen will appear for selecting a Data Logger.
Data Logger Selection Screen
Press 1(CLAB) or 2(EA-200) to select the Data Logger you want to use.
Selecting a Data Logger will cause the sampling screen (Time-based Sampling screen) to
appear.
Use the sampling screen to start sampling with the Data Logger and to view a graph of
samples.
CLAB
EA-200
There are four sampling modes (sampling screens), described below.
1. Time-based Sampling ... Draws a graph simultaneously as sampling is performed. Note,
however, that the graph is drawn after sampling is finished when
CH1, 2, or 3, SONIC, or [START] key is specified as the trigger
source, or when the sampling interval is less than 0.2 seconds.
2. Fast Sampling ... Select to sample high-speed phenomena (sound, etc.)
3. Period Sampling ... Select to perform periodic sampling starting from a start trigger event
and ending with an end trigger event.
4. Mic & Speaker Mode ... Select to sample sound using the built-in microphone. You can
also output a waveform using the built-in speaker. (EA-200 only)
• The Data Logger selection screen will not appear from the next time you enter the E-CON4
mode. Instead, the Time-based Sampling screen for the selected a Data Logger will appear
first.
• To change the Data Logger, change the setting on the E-CON4 setup screen.
• Connecting a Data Logger that is different from the one specified for the calculator will
cause an error message to appear. If this happens, use the setup screen to change the
“Data Logger” setting.
ε-2
E-CON4 Mode Overview
k E-CON4 Specific Setup Items
The items described below are E-CON4 setup items that displayed only when the
!m(SET UP) operation is performed in the E-CON4 mode.
Indicates the initial default setting of each item.
u Data Logger
• {CLAB}/{EA-200} ... {CLAB Data Logger}/{EA-200 Data Logger}
u Graph Func
• {On}/{Off} ... {show graph source data name}/{hide graph source data name}
u Coord
• {On}/{Off} ... {show coordinate values}/{hide coordinate values} during trace operations
u E-CON Axes
• {On}/{Off} ... {show axes}/{hide axes}
u Real Scroll
• {On}/{Off} ... {enable real-time scrolling}/{disable real-time scrolling}
u CMA Temp BT01
• {°C}/{°F} ... CMA Temperature BT01 measurement unit {°C}/{°F}
u CMA Temp 0511
• {°C}/{°F} ... CMA Temperature 0511 measurement unit {°C}/{°F}
u CASIO Temp
• {°C}/{°F} ... CASIO Temperature measurement unit {°C}/{°F}
u Vrnr Baro
• {atm}/{inHg}/{mbar}/{mmHg} ... Vernier Barometer measurement unit {atm}/{inHg}/
{mbar}/{mmHg}
u Vrnr Gas Prs
• {atm}/{inHg}/{kPa}/{mbar}/{mmHg}/{psi} ... Vernier Gas Pressure measurement unit
{atm}/{inHg}/{kPa}/{mbar}/{mmHg}/{psi}
u Vrnr Mag F L
• {mT}/{gauss} ... Vernier Magnetic Field Low-amp measurement unit {mT}/{gauss}
u Vrnr Mag F H
• {mT}/{gauss} ... Vernier Magnetic Field High-amp measurement unit {mT}/{gauss}
ε-3
Sampling Screen
2. Sampling Screen
k Changing the Sampling Screen
On any sampling screen, press 5(MODE) to display the sampling mode selection screen.
CLAB
EA-200
Use keys b through e to select the sampling mode that matches the type of sampling
you want to perform.
k Time-based Sampling Screen
CLAB
EA-200
• CLAB has three channels named CH1, CH2, and CH3.
• EA-200 has four channels named CH1, CH2, CH3, and SONIC. Note, however, that up to
only three channels can be used for sampling at any one time. If you try to start sampling
with four channels at the same time, a “Too Many Channels” error will appear.
k Fast Sampling Screen
CLAB
• Both CLAB and EA-200 can use CH1 only.
EA-200
ε-4
Sampling Screen
k Period Sampling Screen
CLAB
EA-200
• With CLAB, only CH1 can be used.
• EA-200 has two channels (CH1 and SONIC). However, only one of these can be used.
k Mic & Speaker Mode Screen (EA-200 Only)
On the sampling mode selection screen, pressing e(Mic & Speaker Mode) displays the
dialog box shown below.
Select Microphone or Speaker.
u Selecting Microphone
This displays the dialog box shown below.
“Sound wave” records the following two dimensions for the sampled sound data: elapsed
time (horizontal axis) and volume (vertical axis).
“FFT” records the following two dimensions: frequency (horizontal axis) and volume (vertical
axis).
• Selecting “Sound wave” here will display the Mic & Speaker Mode screen.
ε-5
Sampling Screen
• Selecting “Sound wave & FFT” or “FFT only” will display the dialog box shown below.
Selecting an option automatically configures parameters with the fixed values shown in the
table below.
Option
Parameter
Frequency Pitch
Frequency
Upper Limit
Sampling Period
Number of
Samples
2 - 1000Hz: 1
4 - 2000 Hz: 2 6 - 3000 Hz: 3 8 - 4000 Hz: 4
2 Hz
4 Hz
6 Hz
8 Hz
1000 Hz
2000 Hz
3000 Hz
4000 Hz
61 μsec
31 μsec
20 μsec
31 μsec
8192
8192
8192
4096
Using a function key (1 through 4) to select an FFT range, will cause a Mic & Speaker
Mode screen to appear.
Selecting “Sound wave & FFT”
Selecting “FFT only”
u Selecting Speaker
This displays the dialog box shown below.
• Selecting “Sample Data” here will display the Mic & Speaker Mode screen.
ε-6
Sampling Screen
• After selecting “y=f(x)”, perform the steps below.
From the EA-200, output the sound of the waveform indicated by the function input on the
calculator, and draw a graph of the function on the calculator unit screen.
1. Use the data communication cable (SB-62) to connect the communication port of the
calculator with the MASTER port of the EA-200.
2. On the above dialog box, select “y=f(x)”.
• This displays a dialog box like the one shown below.
3. Press w to display the View Window screen.
• The following settings will be configured automatically Ymin = −1.5, Ymax = 1.5. Do not
change these settings.
4. Press w or J to display the function registration screen.
5. In the “Y1=” line, register the function of the waveform of the sound you want to output.
• For the angle unit, specify radians.
• Register a function with an Y-value within the range of ±1.5.
6. Press 6(DRAW) to draw the graph.
• Drawing the graph causes a vertical cursor to appear on the display, as shown on the
screenshot below. Use this graph to specify the range of the sound output from the
speaker.
7. Use the d and e keys to move the vertical cursor of the output range start point and
then press w to register the start point.
ε-7
Sampling Screen
8. Use the d and e keys to move the vertical cursor of the output range end point and
then press w to register the end point.
• Setting both the start point and end point will cause the Output Frequency dialog box
shown below to appear.
R
9. Specify the output frequency percent (%) value.
• To output the original sound unchanged, specify 100 (%). To output a sound one octave
higher than the original sound, input 200 (%). To output a sound one octave lower than
the original sound, input 50 (%).
10. Input a percent (%) value and then press w.
• This outputs the sound of the waveform within the selected range.
• If the specified result cannot be output as a sound, the message “Range Error” will
appear. If this happens, press J to display the screen shown below and change the
settings.
11. To stop sound output on the EA-200, press the [START/STOP] key.
12. Press w.
• This displays a screen like the one shown below.
13. Depending on what you want to do, perform one of the operations below.
To change the output frequency and try again:
Press 1(Yes) to return to the Output Frequency dialog box. Next, perform the operation
starting from step 9, above.
To change the output range of the waveform graph and try again:
Press 6(No) to return to the graph screen in step 6, above. Next, perform the operation
starting from step 7, above.
To change the function:
Press 6(No)J to return to the function registration screen in step 5, above. Next,
perform the operation starting from step 5, above.
To exit the procedure and return to the sampling mode selection screen:
Press 6(No). Next, press J twice.
ε-8
Sampling Screen
k Sampling Screen Function Menu
• 1(SENSOR) …… Selects the sensor assigned to a channel.
• 2(CONFIG) …… Select to configure settings that control sampling (sampling period,
number of samples, warm-up time, etc.)
• 3(CALIB) …… Performs auto sensor calibration.
• 4(OTHER) …… Displays the submenu below.
• 1(GRAPH) …… Graphs the samples measured by the Data Logger. You can
use various graph analysis tools. (Cannot be used on the Period
Sampling screen.)
• 2(MEMORY) …… Saves Data Logger setup data.
• 5(INITIAL) …… Initializes setting parameters.
• 6(ABOUT) …… Shows version information about the Data Logger currently
connected to calculator.
• 5(MODE) …… Selects a sampling mode.
• 6(START) …… Starts sampling with the Data Logger.
ε-9
Auto Sensor Detection (CLAB Only)
3. Auto Sensor Detection (CLAB Only)
When using a CLAB Data Logger, sensors connected to each channel are detected
automatically. This means that you can connect a sensor and immediately start sampling.
1. On the setup screen, select “CLAB” for the “Data Logger” setting.
2. Connect the CLAB Data Logger to the calculator.
3. Connect a sensor to each of the CLAB channels you want to use.
• Detection of a sensor will cause a screen like the one below to appear.
3
1
2
1 Show the names of the sensor connected to each channel.
2 Show the current sample values of each channel.
3 Selecting (highlighting) a channel causes to appear next to it. Pressing e displays
sensor details as shown below for the currently selected sensor.
4. Press 6(START) to start sampling.
• Some sensors do not support auto detection. If this happens, press 1(SENSOR) and
then select the applicable sensor.
Note
• If a sensor that supports auto detection is not detected automatically, restart CLAB.
ε-10
Selecting a Sensor
4. Selecting a Sensor
On the sampling screen, press 1(SENSOR) to display the sensor selection screen.
k Assigning a Sensor to a Channel
1. On the sampling screen, use f and c to select the channel to which you want to
assign the sensor.
2. Press 1(SENSOR).
• This displays the sensor selection screen like the one shown below. The appearance of
the sensor selection screen depends on the Data Logger type and the selected channel.
3. Press one of the function keys below.
• CH1, CH2, CH3
1(CMA) … Displays a list of CMA sensors.
2(CASIO) … Displays a list of CASIO sensors.
3(VERNIER) … Displays a list of Vernier sensors.
4(CUSTOM) … Displays a list of custom sensors. See “7. Using a Custom Probe”
(page ε-23).
5(None) … Even if a sensor is connected, it is disabled.
6(RESCAN) … Deletes the sensor currently assigned to a channel (CLAB only).
• SONIC (EA-200 only)
2(CASIO) … Displays a list of CASIO sensors. Only “Motion” can be selected.
3(VERNIER) … Displays a list of Vernier sensors. You can select either “Motion” or
“Photogate”.
5(None) … SONIC channel not used.
Note
• After selecting “Motion” on either the CASIO or the Vernier sensor list, pressing K
will toggle smoothing (sampling error correction) between on and off. “-Smooth” will be
shown on the display while smoothing is on. Nothing is displayed when off.
• Selecting “Photogate” on the Vernier sensor list will display a menu that you can use to
select [Gate] or [Pulley].
[Gate] ... Photogate sensor used alone.
[Pulley] ... Photogate sensor used in combination with smart pulley.
ε-11
Selecting a Sensor
• Pressing a function key displays a dialog box like the one shown below. This shows the
sensors that can be assigned to the selected channel.
4. Use f and c to select the sensor you want to assign and then press w.
• This returns to the screen in step 1 of this procedure with the name of the sensor you
assigned displayed. At this time there will be a lock ( ) icon to the right of the sensor
name. This icon indicates the sensor you assigned with the operation above.
Note
• You can also assign a custom probe to a channel. To do so, press 4(CUSTOM) to
display the custom probe list. Use this list to select a custom probe and then press w.
k Disabling a Sensor
Perform the steps below when you do not want to perform sampling with a sensor that is
connected to the Data Logger.
1. On the sampling screen, use f and c to select the sensor you want to disable.
2. Press 1(SENSOR).
• This displays the sensor selection screen.
3. Press 5(NONE).
• This returns to the screen in step 1 of this procedure with no sensor assigned to the
channel. There will be a lock ( ) icon indicated for the channel in this case.
• The above operation also disables sensor auto detection.
k Removing the Sensor Assigned to a Channel (CLAB Only)
1. On the sampling screen, use f and c to select the sensor you want to remove.
2. Press 1(SENSOR).
• This displays the sensor selection screen.
3. Press 6(RESCAN).
• This returns to the screen in step 1 of this procedure with no sensor assigned to the
channel. There will be no lock ( ) icon indicated for the channel in this case.
• The above operation also enables sensor auto detection.
ε-12
Configuring the Sampling Setup
5. Configuring the Sampling Setup
You can configure detailed settings to control individual sampling parameters and to
configure the Data Logger for a specific application. Use the Sampling Config screen to
configure settings.
There are two configuration methods, described below.
Method 1 ... With this method, you configure settings for the sampling interval (Interval)
and number of samples (Samples).
Method 2 ... With this method, you configure settings for the number of samples per
second (Sample/sec) and the total sampling time (Total Time).
You can also use the Sampling Config screen to configure trigger settings. See “Trigger
Setup” (page ε-15).
Initial default settings are shown below.
• Setting Method: Method 1
• Interval: 0.2 sec
• Samples: 101
• Sample/sec: 5 (This setting is not displayed in the case of Method 1.)
• Total Time: 20 sec
• Warm-up: Auto
k Using Method 1 to Configure Settings
1. On the sampling screen, press 2(CONFIG).
• This displays the Sampling Config screen with “Interval” highlighted.
2. Press 1(sec) or 2(min) to specify the sampling interval unit.
3. Press e.
• This displays a dialog box for configuring the sampling interval setting.
4. Input the sampling interval and then press w.
ε-13
Configuring the Sampling Setup
5. Press c to move the highlighting to “Samples”.
• When the sampling mode is “Periodic Sampling” and a CMA or Vernier Photogate
Pulley is assigned to the channel, “Distance” will be displayed in place of “Samples”. For
information about “Distance”, see “To configure the Distance setting” below.
6. Press e.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the number of samples.
7. Input the number of samples and then press w.
8. Press c to move the highlighting to “Warm-up”.
9. Press one of the functions keys below.
1(Auto) … Automatically configures warm-up time settings for each sensor.
2(Manual) … Select for manual input of the warm-up time in seconds units.
3(None) … Disables warm-up time.
• Pressing 2(Manual) displays a dialog box for specifying the warm-up time. Input the
warm-up time and then press w.
• When the sampling mode is “Fast Sampling”, “FFT Graph” will be displayed in place
of “Warm-up”. For information about “FFT Graph”, see “To configure the FFT Graph
setting” below.
10. After all of settings are the way you want, press J.
• This returns to the sampling screen.
u To configure the Distance setting
Move the highlighting to “Distance” and then press 1(NUMBER). This displays a dialog box
for specifying the drop distance for the smart pulley weight.
Input a value from 0.1 to 4.0 to specify the distance in meters.
u To configure FFT Graph setting
In place of step 9 of the procedure under “Using Method 1 to Configure Settings”, specify
whether or not you want to draw a frequency characteristics graph (FFT Graph).
1(On) ... Draws an FFT graph after sampling is finished. Use the dialog box that
appears to select a frequency.
2(Off) ... FFT Graph no drawn after sampling is finished.
ε-14
Configuring the Sampling Setup
k Using Method 2 to Configure Settings
1. On the sampling screen, press 2(CONFIG).
• This displays the Sampling Config screen.
2. Press 5(Method2).
• This will cause the highlighting to move to “Sample/sec”.
3. Press e.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the number of samples per second.
4. Input the number of samples and then press w.
5. Press c to move the highlighting to “Total Time”.
6. Press e.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the sampling time.
7. Input the sampling time and then press w.
8. Press c to move the highlighting to “Warm-up”.
• Use the same procedure as that for Method 1 to configure the “Warm-up” setting.
9. After all of settings are the way you want, press J.
• This returns to the sampling screen.
u To switch between Method 1 and Method 2
If the current method is Method 1, press 5(Method2) to switch to Method 2. This will cause
the highlighting to move to “Sample/sec”.
If the current method is Method 2, press 4(Method1) to switch to Method 1. This will cause
the highlighting to move to “Interval”.
ε-15
Configuring the Sampling Setup
If the highlighting is located at “Warm-up”, it will not move when you switch from Method 1 to
Method 2.
Switching from Method 1 to Method 2 will cause Method 2 values to be automatically
calculated and configured in accordance with the values you input with Method 1. Values are
also automatically calculated when you switch from Method 2 to Method 1.
u Input Ranges
Method 1
Interval (sec): 0.0005 to 299 sec
(0.02 to 299 sec for the Motion sensor. 0.0025 to 299 sec for the CLAB
built-in 3-axis accelerometer.)
Interval (min): 5 to 240 min
(With some sensors, a setting of five minutes or greater is not supported.)
Samples: 10 to 10001
Method 2
Sample/sec: 1 to 2000
(1 to 50 sec for the CMA Motion sensor. 1 to 400 for the CLAB built-in 3-axis
accelerometer.)
• An error message will be displayed if you input a value for a setting that causes the
automatically calculated number of samples (Samples) setting to become a value that is
outside the allowable input range.
• Only Method 1 settings are supported when the Interval setting is 5min or greater.
k Trigger Setup
You can use the Trigger Setup screen to specify the event that causes sampling to start (w
key operation, etc.). The event that causes sampling to start is called the “trigger source”,
which is indicated as “Source” on the Trigger Setup screen.
The following table describes each of the eight available trigger sources.
To start sampling when this happens:
Select this trigger source:
When the w key is pressed
[EXE] key
After the specified number of seconds are counted down
Count Down
When input at CH1 reaches a specified value
CH1
When input at CH2 reaches a specified value
CH2
When input at CH3 reaches a specified value
CH3
When input at the SONIC channel reaches a specified value
(EA-200 only)
SONIC
When the built-in microphone detects sound (EA-200 only)
Mic
When the [START/STOP] key is pressed (EA-200 only)
[START] key
When [Button] is pressed (CLAB only)
[START] key
ε-16
Configuring the Sampling Setup
• To configure Trigger Setup settings
1. While the Sampling Config screen is on the display, press 6(Trigger).
• This displays the Trigger Setup screen with the
“Source” line highlighted.
• The function menu items that appears in the menu
bar depend on the sampling mode. The nearby
screen shows the function menu when “Time-based
Sampling” is selected as the sample sampling mode.
2. Use the function keys to select the trigger source you want.
• The following shows the trigger sources that can be selected for each sampling mode.
Sampling Mode
Trigger Source
Time-based
Sampling
1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cont) : Count Down, 3(CH1~3),
4(Sonic), 5(START) : [START] key
Fast Sampling
1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cont) : Count Down, 3(CH1)
Mic & Speaker
Mode
1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cont) : Count Down, 5(Mic)
• When the sampling mode is “Time-based Sampling” and the “Interval” setting is five
minutes or greater, the trigger source is always the [EXE] key.
• When the sampling mode is “Period Sampling”, the trigger source is always CH1.
However, when the SONIC channel is being used on the EA-200, the trigger source is
always SONIC.
3. Perform one of the following operations, in accordance with the trigger source that was
selected in step 2.
If this is the
trigger source:
Do this next:
[EXE] key
Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Sampling
Config screen.
Count Down
Specify the countdown start time. See “To specify the countdown
start time” below.
CH1
CH2
CH3
Specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge direction. See
“To specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge type” on
page ε-17, “To configure trigger threshold, trigger start edge, and
trigger end edge settings” or “To configure Photogate trigger start
and end settings” on page ε-18.
SONIC
Specify the trigger threshold value and motion sensor level. See
“To specify the trigger threshold value and motion sensor level” on
page ε-19.
Mic
Specify microphone sensitivity. See “To specify microphone
sensitivity” on page ε-17.
[START] key
Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Sampling
Config screen.
ε-17
Configuring the Sampling Setup
• To specify the countdown start time
1. Move the highlighting to “Timer”.
2. Press 1(Time) to display a dialog box for specifying the countdown start time.
3. Input a value in seconds from 1 to 10.
4. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Sampling Config screen.
• To specify microphone sensitivity
1. Move the highlighting to “Sense” and then press one of the function keys described
below.
To select this level of microphone sensitivity:
Press this key:
Low
1(Low)
Medium
2(Middle)
High
3(High)
2. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Sampling Config screen.
• To specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge type
Perform the following steps when “Time-based Sampling” or ”Fast Sampling” is specified as
the sampling mode.
1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”.
2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is
value that data needs to attain before sampling starts.
Sensor assigned to CH1, CH2, CH3 or the SONIC
channel
Measurement unit supported by assigned sensor
3. Input the value you want, and then press w.
4. Move the highlighting to “Edge”.
5. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of edge:
Press this key:
Falling
1(Fall)
Rising
2(Rise)
6. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Sampling Config screen.
ε-18
Configuring the Sampling Setup
• To configure trigger threshold, trigger start edge, and trigger end edge
settings
Perform the following steps when “Period Sampling” is specified as the sampling mode.
1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”.
2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is
value that data needs to attain before sampling starts.
3. Input the value you want.
4. Move the highlighting to “Start to”.
5. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of edge:
Press this key:
Falling
1(Fall)
Rising
2(Rise)
6. Move the highlighting to “End Edge”.
7. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of edge:
Press this key:
Falling
1(Fall)
Rising
2(Rise)
8. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Sampling Config screen.
• To configure Photogate trigger start and end settings
Perform the following steps when CH1 is selected as a Photogate trigger source.
Perform the operation below even while Vernier Photogate is assigned to the SONIC
channel when performing Period Sampling with the EA-200.
1. Move the highlighting to “Start to”.
2. Press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this Photogate status:
Press this key:
Photogate closed
1(Close)
Photogate open
2(Open)
3. Move the highlighting to “End Gate”.
4. Press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this Photogate status:
Press this key:
Photogate closed
1(Close)
Photogate open
2(Open)
5. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Sampling Config screen.
ε-19
Configuring the Sampling Setup
• To specify the trigger threshold value and motion sensor level
1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”.
2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is
value that data needs to attain before sampling starts.
3. Input the value you want, and then press w.
4. Move the highlighting to “Level”.
5. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of level:
Press this key:
Below
1(Below)
Above
2(Above)
6. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Sampling Config screen.
ε-20
Performing Auto Sensor Calibration and Zero Adjustment
6. Performing Auto Sensor Calibration and Zero
Adjustment
You can use the procedures in this section to perform auto sensor calibration and sensor
zero adjustment.
With auto calibration, you can configure applicable interpolation formula slope (Slope) and
y-intercept (Intercept) values for a sensor based on two measured values.
With zero adjustment, you can configure a custom probe y-intercept based on measured
values.
A sensor calibrated with auto calibration or zero adjustment is registered as a custom probe.
k Sensor Calibration Screen
1. On the sampling screen, use f and c to move the highlighting to the sensor you want
to auto calibrate or zero adjust.
2. Press 3(CALIB).
• This displays a sensor calibration screen like the one shown below.
1(EDIT) ... Select to manually modify the highlighted item.
2(CALIB) … Performs auto sensor calibration.
3(ZERO) … Performs sensor zero adjustment.
6(SET) … Select to assign the calibrated sensor to a channel. This registers the
sensor as a custom probe.
• Press J to return to the sampling screen.
k Performing Auto Sensor Calibration
Important!
• Before performing the operation below, you will need to have two known measured values
on hand.
• When inputting reference values in step 3 of the procedure below, input values that were
measured accurately under conditions used for the sampling operations in step 2 of the
procedure. When inputting reference values in step 5 of the procedure below, input values
that were measured accurately under conditions used for the sampling operations in step 4
of the procedure.
ε-21
Performing Auto Sensor Calibration and Zero Adjustment
1. On the sensor calibration screen, press 2(CALIB).
• A screen like the one shown below will appear after the first sampling operation starts.
First sampling operation
Real-time display of sampled values
2. After the sampled value stabilizes, hold down w for a few seconds.
• This registers the first sampled valued and displays it on the screen. At this time, the
cursor will appear at the bottom of the display, indicating that a reference value can be
input.
3. Input a reference value for the first sample value and then press w.
• A screen like the one shown below will appear after the second sampling operation starts
automatically.
Second sampling operation
4. After the sampled value stabilizes, hold down w for a few seconds.
• This registers second sampled valued and displays it on the screen. At this time, the
cursor will appear at the bottom of the display, indicating that a reference value can be
input.
5. Input a reference value for the second sample value and then press w.
• This returns to the sensor calibration screen.
• E-CON4 calculates slope and y-intercept values based on the two input reference values
and automatically configures settings. Automatically calculated values are displayed on
the sensor calibration screen.
k Performing Sensor Zero Adjustment
1. On the sensor calibration screen, press 3(ZERO).
• A screen like the one shown below will appear after sampling starts.
ε-22
Performing Auto Sensor Calibration and Zero Adjustment
2. When the sampled value that you want to zero adjust is displayed, press w.
• This returns to the sensor calibration screen.
• E-CON4 automatically sets a y-intercept value based on the measured value.
Automatically calculated values are displayed on the sensor calibration screen.
k Configuring Settings Manually
1. On the sensor calibration screen, use f and c to move the highlighting to the item
whose setting you want to change.
2. Press 1(EDIT).
3. Input the information below for each of the items.
Probe Name ... Sensor name up to 18 characters long. (17 characters long when the
sensor name includes “±”.)
Slope ... Interpolation formula slope (value that specifies constant a of ax+b)
Intercept ... Interpolation formula y-intercept (value that specifies constant b of ax+b)
4. After you finish inputting, press w.
k Assigning a Calibrated Sensor to a Channel
1. Perform auto sensor calibration and sensor zero adjustment. (Or configure settings
manually.)
2. On the sensor calibration screen, press 6(SET).
• This displays a dialog box like the one shown below.
Number is assigned automatically.
3. Press J.
• This assigns the calibrated sensor to the channel and returns to the sampling screen.
• The calibrated sensor is stored under the custom probe number shown on the dialog box
above.
ε-23
Using a Custom Probe
7. Using a Custom Probe
The sensors shown in the CASIO, Vernier, and CMA sensor lists under “4. Selecting a
Sensor” are E-CON4 mode standard sensors. If you want to sample with a sensor not
included in a list, you must configure it as a custom probe.
k Registering a Custom Probe
1. On the sensor selection screen, press 4(CUSTOM).
• This displays the custom probe list screen.
• If there is no registered custom probe, the message “No Custom Probe” appears on the
display.
2. Press 1(NEW).
• This displays a custom probe setup screen like the one shown below.
3. Press 1(EDIT).
4. Input up to 18 characters for the custom probe name and then press w.
• This will cause the highlighting to move to “Slope”.
5. Move the highlighting to the setting you want to configure and then press 1(EDIT).
• Setting items are described below.
Slope ... Input the interpolation formula slope (value that specifies constant a of ax+b)
Intercept ... Input the interpolation formula y-intercept (value that specifies constant b of
ax+b)
Unit Name ... Input up to eight characters for the unit name.
Warm-up ... Specify the warm-up time.
Type ... Select the sensor type (“0-5V” or “±10V”). Press 4(0-5V) or 5(±10V).
6. Perform auto calibration and zero adjustment of the custom probe as required.
• Press 2(CALIB) to perform auto calibration of the custom probe. See “Performing Auto
Sensor Calibration” (page ε-20).
• Press 3(ZERO) to perform zero adjustment of the custom probe. See “Performing
Sensor Zero Adjustment” (page ε-21).
ε-24
Using a Custom Probe
7. After configuring the required settings, press 6(SAVE) or w.
• This displays the dialog box shown below.
8. Input the custom probe registration number (1 to 99) and then press w.
• This registers the custom probe and returns to the custom probe list screen.
k Assigning a Custom Probe to a Channel
1. On the sampling screen, use f and c to select the channel to which you want to
assign the custom probe.
2. Press 1(SENSOR) to display the sensor selection screen.
3. Press 4(CUSTOM).
• This displays the custom probe list screen.
4. Use f and c to select the custom probe you want to assign and then press w.
k Changing the Settings of a Custom Probe
1. On the custom probe list screen, use f and c to select the custom probe whose
settings you want to change.
2. Press 2(EDIT).
• This displays a custom probe setup screen.
3. Perform steps 3 through 6 under “Registering a Custom Probe”.
4. After configuring the required settings, press 6(SAVE) or w.
• This returns to the custom probe list screen.
k Recalling CMA or Vernier Sensor Settings to Register a Custom Probe
1. On the custom probe list screen, press 4(CMA) or 5(VERNIER).
• This displays a sensor list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the sensor whose settings you
want to use as the basis of the custom probe and then press w.
• The name of the selected sensor and its setting information are shown on the custom
probe setup screen.
3. Perform steps 3 through 8 under “Registering a Custom Probe”. However, you will not be
able to change the sensor type.
ε-25
Using Setup Memory
8. Using Setup Memory
Data logger setup data (Data Logger settings, sampling mode, assigned sensor, sampling
setup) is stored at the time it is created in a memory area called the “current setup memory
area”. The current contents of the current setup memory area are overwritten whenever you
create other setup data.
You can use setup memory to save the current setup memory area contents to calculator
memory to keep it from being overwritten, if you want.
k Saving a Setup
1. Display the sampling screen you want to save.
2. Press 4(OTHER)2(MEMORY).
• This displays the setup memory list.
• The message “No Setup-MEM” will appear if there is no setup data stored in memory.
3. Press 2(SAVE).
• This displays a setup name input screen.
4. Input up to 18 characters for the setup name and then press w.
• This displays a memory number input dialog box.
5. Input a memory number (1 to 99) and then press w.
• This returns to the setup memory list.
6. Press J.
• This returns to the sampling screen.
Important!
• Since you assign both a setup name and a file number to each setup, you can assign the
same name to multiple setups, if you want.
k Using and Managing Setups in Setup Memory
All of the setups you save are shown in the setup memory list. After selecting a setup in the
list, you can use it to sample data or you can edit it.
• To preview saved setup data
You can use the following procedure to check the contents of a setup before you use it for
sampling.
1. On the sampling screen, press 4(OTHER)2(MEMORY) to display the setup memory
list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
ε-26
Using Setup Memory
3. Press K(Setup Preview) (or e).
• This displays the preview dialog box.
4. To close the preview dialog box, press J.
• To recall a setup and use it for sampling
Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with a Data Logger.
1. Connect the calculator to a Data Logger.
2. Turn on Data Logger power.
3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the
appropriate Data Logger channel.
4. Prepare the item whose data is to be sampled.
5. On the sampling screen, press 4(OTHER)2(MEMORY) to display the setup memory
list.
6. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
7. Press 1(START).
8. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1.
• Pressing w sets up the Data Logger and then starts sampling.
• To clear the confirmation message without sampling, press 6.
Note
• See “Operations during a sampling operation” on page ε-29 for information about
operations you can perform while a sampling operation is in progress.
• To change the name of setup data
1. On the sampling screen, press 4(OTHER)2(MEMORY) to display the setup memory
list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press 3(RENAME).
• This displays the screen for inputting the setup name.
4. Input up to 18 characters for the setup name, and then press w.
• This changes the setup name and returns to the setup memory list.
• To delete setup data
1. On the sampling screen, press 4(OTHER)2(MEMORY) to display the setup memory
list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press 4(DELETE).
ε-27
Using Setup Memory
4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the
setup.
• To clear the confirmation message without deleting anything, press 6(No).
• To recall setup data
Recalling setup data stores it in the current setup memory area. After recalling setup data,
you can edit it as required. This capability comes in handy when you need to perform a setup
that is slightly different from one you have stored in memory.
1. On the sampling screen, press 4(OTHER)2(MEMORY) to display the setup memory
list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press 5(LOAD).
4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to recall the setup.
• To clear the confirmation message without recalling the setup, press 6(No).
Note
• Recalling setup data replaces any other data currently in the current setup memory area.
However, if there is setup data for a sampling mode that is different from the current mode,
that data will not be overwritten.
ε-28
Starting a Sampling Operation
9. Starting a Sampling Operation
This section describes how to use a setup configured using the E-CON4 mode to start a
Data Logger sampling operation.
k Before getting started...
Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with a Data Logger.
1. Connect the calculator to a Data Logger.
2. Turn on Data Logger power.
3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the
appropriate Data Logger channel.
4. Prepare the item whose data is to be sampled.
k Starting a Sampling Operation
A sampling operation can be started from the sampling screen or the setup memory list.
Here we will show the operation that starts from the sampling screen. See “To recall a setup
and use it for sampling” on page ε-26 for information about starting sampling from the setup
memory list.
• To start sampling
1. Enter the sampling mode you want to use and then press 6(START).
• This displays a sampling start confirmation screen like the one shown below.
2. Press w.
• This sets up the Data Logger using the setup data in the current setup memory area.
• The message “Setting Data Logger...” remains on the display while Data Logger setup
is in progress. You can cancel the setup operation any time this message is displayed
by pressing A.
• The screen shown nearby appears after Data Logger
setup is complete.
ε-29
Starting a Sampling Operation
3. Press w to start sampling.
• The screens that appear while sampling is in progress and after sampling is complete
depend on setup details (sampling mode, trigger setup, etc.). For details, see
“Operations during a sampling operation” below.
• Operations during a sampling operation
Sending a sample start command from the calculator to a Data Logger causes the following
sequence to be performed.
Setup Data Transfer → Sampling Start → Sampling End →
Transfer of Sample Data from the Data Logger to the Calculator
The table on the next page shows how the trigger conditions and sensor type specified in the
setup data affects the above sequence.
Period Sampling
Mic & Speaker
Mode
Fast Sampling
Time-based
Sampling
Mode
1. Data Logger Setup
Starts Sampling
2. Start Standby
Pressing 1 advances to
“4. Graphing”.
Pressing w there returns to
“3. Sampling”.
• Time-based Sampling: Interval of 5min or greater
• The screen shown below appears when CH1~3,
SONIC, or Mic is used as the trigger.
3. Sampling
1
w
Sample values are stored as
List data only.
The following three graph
types can be produced when
Photogate -Pulley is being
used.
1. Time and distance graph
2.
Time and velocity graph
• When Number of Samples > 1
3. Time and acceleration graph
• When Number of Samples = 1
w
Input values.
w
w
• Mic & Speaker Mode: Speaker - Sample Data
Graph screen does not show all sampled values,
but only a partial preview.
Sampled values are saved as
Current Sample Data.
4. Graphing
ε-30
Starting a Sampling Operation
ε-31
Using Sample Data Memory
10. Using Sample Data Memory
Performing a Data Logger sampling operation from the E-CON4 mode causes sampled
results to be stored in the “current data area” of E-CON4 memory. Separate data is saved
for each channel, and the data for a particular channel in the current data area is called that
channel’s “current data”.
Any time you perform a sampling operation, the current data of the channel(s) you use is
replaced by the newly sampled data. If you want to save a set of current data and keep it
from being replaced by a new sampling operation, save the data in sample data memory
under a different file name.
k Managing Sample Data Files
• To save current sample data to a file
1. On the sampling screen, press 4(OTHER)1(GRAPH).
• This displays the Graph Mode screen.
Graph Mode Screen
• For details about the Graph Mode screen, see “Using the Graph Analysis Tools to
Graph Data” (page ε-33).
2. Press 2(DATA).
• This displays the Sampling Data List screen.
List of current data files
“cd” stands for “current data”. The text on
the right side of the colon indicates the
channel name.
Sampling Data List Screen
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the current data file you want
to save, and then press 2(SAVE).
• This displays the screen for inputting a data name.
ε-32
Using Sample Data Memory
4. Enter up to 18 characters for the data file name, and then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for inputting a memory number.
5. Enter a memory number in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w.
• This saves the sample data at the location specified by the memory number you input.
The sample data file you save is
indicated on the display using the format:
:.
• If you specify a memory number that is already being used to store a data file, a
confirmation message appears asking if you want to replace the existing file with the
new data file. Press 1 to replace the existing data file, or 6 to return to the memory
number input dialog box in step 4.
6. To return to the sampling screen, press J twice.
Note
• You could select another data file besides a current data file in step 3 of the above
procedure and save it under a different memory number. You do not need to change the
file’s name as long as you use a different file number.
ε-33
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data
11. Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph
Data
Graph Analysis tools make it possible to analyze graphs drawn from sampled data.
k Accessing Graph Analysis Tools
You can access Graph Analysis tools using either of the two methods described below.
• Accessing Graph Analysis tools from the Graph Mode screen, which is displayed by
pressing 4(OTHER)1(GRAPH) on the sampling screen
Graph Mode Screen
• The sampling screen appears after you perform a sampling operation. Press
4(OTHER)1(GRAPH) at that time.
• When you access Graph Analysis tools using this method, you can select from among a
variety of other Analysis modes. See “Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph”
(page ε-34) for more information about the other Analysis modes.
• Accessing Graph Analysis tools from the screen of a graph drawn after a sampling
operation is executed from the sampling screen (Time-based Sampling, Fast
Sampling, Mic & Speaker Mode - Microphone)
Graph Screen
• In this case, data is graphed after the sampling operation is complete, and the calculator
accesses Graph Analysis tools automatically. See “Graph Screen Key Operations” on
page ε-37.
ε-34
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data
k Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph
This section contains a detailed procedure that covers all steps from selecting an analysis
mode to drawing a graph.
Note
• Step 4 through step 7 are not essential and may be skipped, if you want. Skipping any step
automatically applies the initial default values for its settings.
• If you skip step 2, the default analysis mode is the one whose name is displayed in the top
line of the Graph Mode screen.
• To select an analysis mode and draw a graph
1. On the sampling screen, press 4(OTHER)1(GRAPH).
• This displays the Graph Mode screen.
2. Press 3(MODE), and then select the analysis mode you want from the menu that
appears.
To do this:
Perform this menu
operation:
To select this
mode:
Graph three sets of sampled data
simultaneously
[Norm]
Graph Analysis
Graph sampled data along with its first
and second derivative graph
[diff]
d/dt & d2/dt2
Display the graphs of different sampled
data in upper and lower windows for
comparison
[COMPARE] → [GRAPH]
Compare Graph
Output sampled data from the speaker,
displaying graph of the raw data in
the upper window and the output
waveform in the lower window (EA-200
only)
[COMPARE] → [Sound]
Compare Sound
Display the graph of sampled data
in the upper window and its first
derivative graph in the lower window
[COMPARE] → [d/dt]
Compare d/dt
Display the graph of sampled data
in the upper window and its second
derivative graph in the lower window
[COMPARE] → [d2/dt2]
Compare d2/dt2
• The name of the currently selected mode appears in the top line of the Graph Mode
screen.
Analysis mode name
ε-35
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data
3. Press 2(DATA).
• This displays the Sampling Data List screen.
4. Specify the sampled data for graphing.
a. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the name of the sampled
data file you want to select, and then press 1(ASSIGN) or w.
• This returns to the Graph Mode screen, which shows the name of the sample data file
you selected.
Sample data file name
Graph on/off indicator
Name of sensor used for sampling
Graph Mode Screen
b. Repeat step a above to specify sample data files for other graphs, if there are any.
• If you select “Graph Analysis” as the analysis mode in step 2, you must specify
sample data files for three graphs. If you select “Compare Graph” as the analysis
mode in step 2, you must specify sample data files for two graphs. With other modes,
you need to specify only one sample data file.
• For details about Sampling Data List screen operations, see “Using Sample Data
Memory” (page ε-31).
5. Turn on graphing for each of the graphs listed on the Graph Mode screen.
a. On the Graph Mode screen, use the f and c cursor keys to select a graph, and
then press 1(SELECT) to toggle graphing on or off.
Graphing turned off.
Graphing turned on.
b. Repeat step a to turn each of the graphs listed on the Graph Mode screen on or off.
6. Select the graph style you want to use.
a. On the Graph Mode screen, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting
to the graph (Gph1, Gph2, etc.) whose style you want to specify, and then press
4(STYLE). This will cause the function menu to change as shown below.
ε-36
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data
b. Use the function keys to specify the graph style you want.
To specify this graph style:
Press this key:
Line graph with dot ( • ) data markers
1(
)
Line graph with square ( 䡺 ) data markers
2(
)
Line graph with X (×) data markers
3(
)
Scatter graph with dot ( • ) data markers
4(
)
Scatter graph with square ( 䡺 ) data markers
5(
)
Scatter graph with X (×) data markers
6(
)
c. Repeat a and b to specify the style for each of the graphs on the Graph Mode screen.
7. On the Graph Mode screen, press 6(DRAW) or w.
• This draws the graph(s) in accordance with the settings you configured in step 2
through step 6.
Graph Screen
• When a Graph screen is on the display, the function keys provide you with zooming and
other capabilities to aid in graph analysis.
For details about Graph screen function key operations, see the following section.
• To deselect sampled data assigned for graphing on the Graph Mode screen
1. On the Graph Mode screen, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to
the graph (Gph1, Gph2, etc.) whose sampled data you want to deselect.
2. Press 5(DELETE).
• This will deselect sample data assigned to the highlighted graph.
ε-37
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
12. Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen
Operations
This section explains the various operations you can perform on the graph screen after
drawing a graph.
You can perform these operations on a graph screen produced by a sampling operation,
or by the operation described under “Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph” on
page ε-34.
k Graph Screen Key Operations
On the graph screen, you can use the keys described in the table below to analyze (CALC)
graphs by reading data points along the graph (Trace) and enlarging specific parts of the
graph (Zoom).
Key Operation
Description
!1(TRACE)
Displays a trace pointer on the graph along with the coordinates of
the current cursor location. Trace can also be used to obtain the
periodic frequency of a specific range on the graph and assign it
to a variable. See “Using Trace” on page ε-38.
!2(ZOOM)
Starts a zoom operation, which you can use to enlarge or reduce
the size of the graph along the x-axis or the y-axis. See “Using
Zoom” on page ε-39.
!3(V-WIN)
Displays a function menu of special View Window commands for
the E-CON4 mode graph screen.
For details about each command, see “Configuring View Window
Parameters” on page ε-47.
!4(SKETCH)
Displays a menu that contains the following commands: Cls, Plot,
F-Line, Text, PEN, Vertical, and Horizontal. For details about
each command, see “Drawing Dots, Lines, and Text on the Graph
Screen (Sketch)” on page 5-50.
K1(PICTURE)
Saves the currently displayed graph as a graphic image. You can
recall a saved graph image and overlay it on another graph to
compare them. For details about these procedures, see “Saving
and Recalling Graph Screen Contents” on page 5-20.
K2(LISTMEM)
Displays a menu of functions for saving the sample values in a
specific range of a graph to a list. See “Transforming Sampled
Data to List Data” on page ε-40.
K3(EDIT)
Displays a menu of functions for zooming and editing a particular
graph when the graph screen contains multiple graphs. See
“Working with Multiple Graphs” on page ε-44.
K4(CALC)
Displays a menu that lets you transform a sample result graph to a
function using Fourier series expansion, and to perform regression
to determine the tendency of a graph. See “Using Fourier Series
Expansion to Transform a Waveform to a Function” on page ε-41,
and “Performing Regression” on page ε-42.
ε-38
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
Key Operation
Description
K5(Y=fx)
Displays the graph relation list, which lets you select a Y=f(x)
graph to overlay on the sampled result graph. See “Overlaying a
Y=f(x) Graph on a Sampled Result Graph” on page ε-43.
K6(SPEAKER)
Starts an operation for outputting a specific range of a sound data
waveform graph from the speaker (EA-200 only). See “Outputting
a Specific Range of a Graph from the Speaker” on page ε-46.
k Scrolling the Graph Screen
Press the cursor keys while the graph screen is on the display scrolls the graph left, right, up,
or down.
Note
• The cursor keys perform different operations besides scrolling while a trace or graph
operation is in progress. To perform a graph screen scroll operation in this case, press J
to cancel the trace or graph operation, and then press the cursor keys.
k Using Trace
Trace displays a crosshair pointer on the displayed graph along with the coordinates of the
current cursor position. You can use the cursor keys to move the pointer along the graph.
You can also use trace to obtain the periodic frequency value for a particular range, and
assign the range (time) and periodic frequency values in separate Alpha memory variables.
• To use trace
1. On the graph screen, press !1(TRACE).
• This causes a trace pointer to appear on the graph.
The coordinates of the current trace pointer location
are also shown on the display.
2. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the trace pointer along the graph to the location
you want.
• The coordinate values change in accordance with the trace pointer movement.
• You can exit the trace pointer at any time by pressing J.
• To obtain the periodic frequency value
1. Use the procedure under “To use trace” above to start a trace operation.
2. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range whose periodic frequency you want
to obtain, and then press w.
ε-39
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
3. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range whose periodic frequency you want
to obtain.
• This causes the period and periodic frequency value
at the start point you selected in step 2 to appear
along the bottom of the screen.
4. Press w to assign the period and periodic frequency values to Alpha memory variables.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying variable
names for [Period] and [Frequency] values.
• The initial default variable name settings are “S” for
the period and “H” for the periodic frequency. To
change to another variable name, use the up and
down cursor keys to move the highlighting to the item
you want to change, and then press the applicable
letter key.
5. After everything is the way you want, press w.
• This stores the values and exits the trace operation.
• For details about using Alpha memory, see Chapter 2 of this manual.
k Using Zoom
Zoom lets you enlarge or reduce the size of the graph along the x-axis or the y-axis.
Note
• When there are multiple graphs on the screen, the procedure below zooms all of them.
For information about zooming a particular graph when there are multiple graphs on the
screen, see “Working with Multiple Graphs” on page ε-44.
• To zoom the graph screen
1. On the graph screen, press !2(ZOOM).
• This causes a magnifying glass cursor (
in the center of the screen.
) to appear
2. Use the cursor keys to move the magnifying glass cursor to the location on the screen
that you want at the center of the enlarged or reduced screen.
ε-40
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
3. Press w.
• This causes the magnifying glass to disappear and enters the zoom mode.
• The cursor keys perform the following operations in the zoom mode.
To do this:
Press this cursor key:
Enlarge the graph image horizontally
e
Reduce the size of the graph image horizontally
d
Enlarge the graph image vertically
f
Reduce the size of the graph image vertically
c
4. To exit the zoom mode, press J.
k Transforming Sampled Data to List Data
Use the following procedure to transform the sampled data in a specific range of a graph into
list data.
• To transform sampled data to list data
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 2(LISTMEM).
• This displays the LISTMEM menu.
2. Press 2(SELECT).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the range on the graph.
3. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range
you want to convert to list data, and then press w.
4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range you want to convert to list data, and
then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the lists where you want to store the time data
and the sampled data.
→
• The initial default lists are List 1 for the time and List 2 for sample data. To change to
another list (List 1 to List 26), use the up and down cursor keys to move the highlighting
to the list you want to change, and then input the applicable list number.
ε-41
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
5. After everything is the way you want, press w.
• This saves the lists and the message “Complete!” appears. Press w to return to the
graph screen.
• For details about using list data, see Chapter 3 of this manual.
Note
• Pressing 1(All) in place of 2(SELECT) in step 2 converts the entire graph to list data. In
this case, the “Store Sample Data” dialog box appears as soon as you press 1(All).
k Using Fourier Series Expansion to Transform a Waveform to a
Function
Fourier series expansion is effective for studying sounds by expressing them as functions.
The procedure below assumes that there is a graph of sampled sound data already on the
graph screen.
• To perform Fourier series expansion
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 4(CALC).
• The CALC menu appears at the bottom of the
display.
2. Press 1(FOURIE).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the graph range.
3. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range for
which you want to perform Fourier series expansion,
and then press w.
4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range for which you want to perform Fourier
series expansion, and then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the start degree of the Fourier series.
→
ε-42
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
5. Input a value in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for inputting the degree of
the Fourier series.
6. Input a value in the range of 1 to 10, and then press w.
• The graph relation list appears with the calculation
result.
7. Pressing 6(DRAW) here graphs the function.
• This lets you compare the expanded function graph
and the original graph to see if they are the same.
Note
• When you press 6(DRAW) in step 7, the graph of the result of the Fourier series
expansion may not align correctly with the original graph on which it is overlaid. If this
happens, shift the position the original graph to align it with the overlaid graph.
For information about how to move the original graph, see “To move a particular graph on
a multi-graph display” (page ε-45).
k Performing Regression
You can use the procedure below to perform regression for a range specified using the trace
pointer. All of the following regression types are supported: Linear, Med-Med, Quadratic,
Cubic, Quartic, Logarithmic, Exponential, Power, Sine, and Logistic.
For details about these regression types, see Chapter 6 of this manual.
The following procedure shows how to perform quadratic regression. The same general
steps can also be used to perform the other types of regression.
ε-43
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
• To perform quadratic regression
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 4(CALC).
• The CALC menu appears at the bottom of the display.
2. Press 5(X2).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the range
on the graph.
3. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range for which you want to perform
quadratic regression, and then press w.
4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range for which you want to perform
quadratic regression, and then press w.
• This displays the quadratic regression calculation
result screen.
5. Press 6(DRAW).
• This draws a quadratic regression graph and
overlays it over the original graph.
• To delete the overlaid quadratic regression graph,
press !4(SKETCH) and then 1(Cls).
k Overlaying a Y=f(x) Graph on a Sampled Result Graph
You can use the E-CON4 mode to graph equations based on the form Y=f(x). From the
graph screen, press K5(Y=fx) to display the graph relation list screen. From there,
operations are identical to those in the Graph mode.
Note
• The data on the graph relation list screen is shared with the Graph mode. Note, however,
that only Y= type graphs can be used in the E-CON4 mode. Because of this, calling up
the graph relation list screen from the E-CON4 mode will display a “Y” (Y= type) item for
function menu key 3. Also, 5(MODIFY) is not displayed, because it is not used in the
E-CON4 mode.
ε-44
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
k Working with Multiple Graphs
The procedures in this section explain how you can zoom or move a particular graph when
there are multiple graphs on the display.
• To zoom a particular graph on a multi-graph display
1. When the graph screen contains multiple graphs, press K, and then 3(EDIT).
• The EDIT menu appears at the bottom of the display.
2. Press 1(ZOOM).
• This displays only one of the graphs that were
originally on the graph screen.
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to cycle through the graphs until the one you want is
displayed, and then press w.
• This enters the zoom mode and causes all of the
graphs to reappear, along with a magnifying glass
cursor ( ) in the center of the screen.
4. Use the cursor keys to move the magnifying glass cursor to the location on the screen
that you want at the center of the enlarged or reduced screen.
ε-45
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
5. Press w.
• This causes the magnifying glass to disappear and enters the zoom mode.
• The cursor keys perform the following operations in the zoom mode.
To do this:
Press this cursor key:
Enlarge the graph image horizontally
e
Reduce the size of the graph image horizontally
d
Enlarge the graph image vertically
f
Reduce the size of the graph image vertically
c
→
6. To exit the zoom mode, press J.
• To move a particular graph on a multi-graph display
1. When the graph screen contains multiple graphs, press K, and then 3(EDIT).
• This displays the EDIT menu.
2. Press 2(MOVE).
• This displays only one of the graphs that were originally on the graph screen.
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to cycle through the graphs until the one you want is
displayed, and then press w.
• This enters the move mode and causes all of the graphs to reappear.
4. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the graph left and right, or the f and c
cursor keys to move the graph up and down.
→
5. To exit the move mode, press J.
ε-46
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
k Outputting a Specific Range of a Graph from the Speaker
(EA-200 only)
Use the following procedure to output a specific range of a sound data waveform graph from
the speaker.
• To output a graph from the speaker
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 6(SPEAKER).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the range
on the graph.
2. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range you want to output from the speaker,
and then press w.
3. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range you want to output from the speaker,
and then press w.
• After you specify the start point and end point, an output frequency dialog box shown
below appears on the display.
→
4. Input a percent value for the output frequency value you want.
• The output frequency specification is a percent value. To output the original sound as-is,
specify 100%. To raise the original sound by one octave, input a value of 200%. To
lower the original sound by one octave, input a value of 50%.
5. After inputting an output frequency value, press w.
• This outputs the waveform between the start point and end point from the EA-200
speaker.
• If the sound you configured cannot be output for some reason, the message “Range
Error” will appear. If this happens, press J to scroll back through the previous setting
screens and change the setup as required.
6. To terminate sound output, press the EA-200 [START/STOP] key.
7. Press w.
• This displays a screen like the one shown nearby.
ε-47
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
8. If you want to retry output from the speaker, press 1(Yes). To exit the procedure and
return to the graph screen, press 6(No).
• Pressing 1(Yes) returns to the “Output Frequency” dialog box. From there, repeat the
above steps from step 4.
k Configuring View Window Parameters
Pressing !3(V-Window) while the graph screen is on the display displays a View
Window function key menu along the bottom of the display.
Press the function key that corresponds to the View Window parameter you want to
configure.
Function Key
Description
1(Auto)
Automatically applies the following View Window parameters.
Y-axis Elements: In accordance with screen size
X-axis Elements: In accordance with screen size when 1 data item
equals 1 dot; 1 data equals 1 dot in other cases
2(FULL)
Resizes the graph so all of it fits in the screen.
3(Y)
Resizes the graph so all of it fits in the screen along the Y-axis,
without changing the X-axis dimensions.
4(UNIT)
Specifies the unit of the numeric axis grid displayed by the E-CON
Axes setting of the Setup Screen.
1(μsec): microseconds
2(msec): milliseconds
3(Sec): seconds
4(DHMS): days, hours, minutes, seconds (1 day, 2 hours, 30
minutes, 5 seconds = 1d2h30m5s)
5(Auto): Auto selection
5(CHANGE)
Toggles display of the source data on the graph screen on and off.
To exit the View Window function key menu and return to the standard function key menu,
press J.
ε-48
Calling E-CON4 Functions from an eActivity
13. Calling E-CON4 Functions from an eActivity
You can call E-CON4 functions from an eActivity by including an “E-CON strip” in the
eActivity file. The following describes each of the two available E-CON strips.
• E-CON Top strip
This strip calls the Time-based Sampling screen. This strip provides access to almost
all executable functions, including detailed Data Logger setup and sampling execution;
graphing and Graph Analysis Tools, etc.
Note
• Using an E-CON Top strip to configure a setup causes the setup information to be
registered in the applicable strip. This means that the next time you open the strip,
sampling can be performed in accordance with the previously configured setup
information.
• E-CON Result strip
This strip graphs sampled data that is recorded in the strip. The sampled data is
recorded to the strip the first time the strip is executed.
• E-CON Strip Memory Capacity Precautions
• The memory capacity of each E-CON strip is 23 KB. An error will occur if you perform
an operation that causes this capacity to be exceeded. Particular care is required
when handling a large number of samples, which can cause memory capacity to be
exceeded.
• Always make sure that FFT Graph is turned off whenever performing sampling with the
microphone. Leaving FFT Graph turned on cause memory capacity to be exceeded.
• If an error occurs, press !a(') to return to the eActivity workspace screen and
perform the procedure again.
• For information about checking the memory usage of each strip, see “To display the
strip memory usage screen” on page 10-21.
For details about eActivity operations, see Chapter 10 of this manual.
Manufacturer:
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome
Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan
Responsible within the European Union:
Casio Europe GmbH
Casio-Platz 1
22848 Norderstedt, Germany
www.casio-europe.com
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome
Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan
SA1703-A
© 2017 CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
| | | | Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Encryption : Standard V4.4 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Print high-res Page Mode : UseOutlines XMP Toolkit : 3.1-701 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows) Create Date : 2017:02:24 13:37:39+09:00 Creator Tool : Adobe InDesign CS4 (6.0.5) Modify Date : 2017:03:03 07:28:18+09:00 Metadata Date : 2017:03:03 07:28:18+09:00 Format : application/pdf Creator : CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. Title : fx-CG50 Document ID : uuid:e06c7a23-8699-443b-bf95-a76349750565 Instance ID : uuid:8a38e407-ff97-11e6-81c8-0016cb38804c Has XFA : No Page Count : 623 Page Layout : OneColumn Author : CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools